Get documents about "Backup Exec for WindowsNT (PDF)
Document Sample
VERITASTM Backup Exec 9.1 for
Windows Servers
Administrator’s Guide
N120578
Disclaimer
The information contained in this publication is subject to change without notice. VERITAS Software
Corporation makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this manual, including, but not limited to,
the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. VERITAS Software
Corporation shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages
in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
VERITAS Legal Notice
Copyright © 2003 VERITAS Software Corporation. All rights reserved. VERITAS, the VERITAS logo,
and all other VERITAS product names and slogans are trademarks or registered trademarks of
VERITAS Software Corporation. VERITAS, VERITAS Backup Exec for Windows Servers, the VERITAS
logo, Reg. U.S. Pat. & Tm. Off. Other product names and/or slogans mentioned herein may be
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
VERITAS Software Corporation
350 Ellis Street
Mountain View, CA 94043
USA
Phone 650–527–8000 Fax 650–527–2908
www.veritas.com
Third-Party Copyrights
Douglas C. Schmidt and his research group at Washington University and University of California, Irvine
ACE (TM) is copyrighted by Douglas C. Schmidt and his research group at Washington University and University of California, Irvine,
Copyright (c) 1993-2002, all rights reserved.
Apache Software Foundation
Apache Tomcat 4.0, Apache Xerces C++ 1.2.0 and 1.3.0
Apache Software License
Version 1.1
Copyright (c) 2000 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)."Alternately, this acknowledgment
may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party acknowledgments normally appears.
4. The names "Apache" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
prior written permission. For written permission, please contact apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their name, without prior written permission of
the Apache Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software Foundation. For more information
on the Apache Software Foundation, please see <http://www.apache.org/>. Portions of this software are based upon public domain software
originally written at the National Center for Supercomputing Applications, University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign.
Crystal Decisions, Inc. (formerly Seagate Software Information Management Group, Holdings, Inc.
Crystal Reports 8.5
Use, duplication, reproduction, or transfer of this commercial software and accompanying documentation is restricted in accordance with FAR
12.212 and DFARS 227.7202 and by a license agreement. Contact: Crystal Decisions, Inc., Attn: Contrcts Department, 895 Emerson Street, Palo Alto,
CA 94301.
Nebiru Software Inc. (dba DomAPI)
DomAPI LIbrary 5.0 Copyright 2001-2003
Boris Fornitchev
STLPort 3.2.1
Copyright 1999,2000 Boris Fomitchev
This material is provided "as is", with absolutely no warranty expressed or implied. Any use is at your own risk. Permission to use or copy this
software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided the above notices are retained on all copies. Permission to modify the code and
to distribute modified code is granted, provided the above notices are retained, and a notice that the code was modified is included with the above
copyright notice. The Licensee may distribute binaries compiled with STLport (whether original or modified) without any royalties or restrictions.
The Licensee may distribute original or modified STLport sources, provided that: (i) The conditions indicated in the above permission notice are
met; (ii) The following copyright notices are retained when present, and conditions provided in accompanying permission notices are met:
Copyright 1994 Hewlett-Packard Company
Copyright 1996,97 Silicon Graphics
Computer Systems, Inc.
Copyright 1997 Moscow Center for SPARC Technology.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided
that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
documentation. Hewlett- Packard Company makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is"
without express or implied warranty. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is
hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission
notice appear in supporting documentation. Silicon Graphics makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is
provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for
any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and
this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Moscow Center for SPARC Technology makes no representations about the suitability
of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
Carnegie Mellon University and The Regents of the University of California
ucd-snmp 4.1.1 Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work -Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California All Rights Reserved Permission to use, copy, modify and
distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice
appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of
CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without
specific written permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Ronald L. Rivest
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all
material mentioning or referencing this software or this function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc.
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any
particular purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.
Wei Dai
Compilation Copyright (c) 1995-2003 by Wei Dai. All rights reserved.
This copyright applies only to this software distribution package as a compilation, and does not imply a copyright on any particular file in the
package.
The following files are copyrighted by their respective original authors, and their use is subject to additional licenses included in these files.
mars.cpp - Copyright 1998 Brian Gladman.
All other files in this compilation are placed in the public domain by Wei Dai and other contributors.
I would like to thank the following authors for placing their works into the public domain:
Joan Daemen - 3way.cpp
Leonard Janke - cast.cpp, seal.cpp
Steve Reid - cast.cpp
Phil Karn - des.cpp
Michael Paul Johnson - diamond.cpp
Andrew M. Kuchling - md2.cpp, md4.cpp
Colin Plumb - md5.cpp, md5mac.cpp
Seal Woods - rc6.cpp
Chris Morgan - rijndael.cpp
Paulo Baretto - rijndael.cpp, skipjack.cpp,
square.cpp
Richard De Moliner - safer.cpp
Matthew Skala - twofish.cpp
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this compilation for any purpose, including commercial applications, is hereby granted without
fee, subject to the following restrictions:
1. Any copy or modification of this compilation in any form, except in object code form as part of an application software, must include the above
copyright notice and this license.
2. Users of this software agree that any modification or extension they provide to Wei Dai will be considered public domain and not copyrighted
unless it includes an explicit copyright notice.
3. Wei Dai makes no warranty or representation that the operation of the software in this compilation will be error-free, and Wei Dai is under no
obligation to provide any services, by way of maintenance, update, or otherwise. THE SOFTWARE AND ANY DOCUMENTATION ARE
PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL WEI DAI OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR BE
LIABLE FOR DIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
4. Users will not use Wei Dai or any other contributor's name in any publicity or advertising, without prior written consent in each case.
5. Export of this software from the United States may require a specific license from the United States Government. It is the responsibility of any
person or organization contemplating export to obtain such a license before exporting.
6. Certain parts of this software may be protected by patents. It is the users' responsibility to obtain the appropriate licenses before using those
parts.
If this compilation is used in object code form in an application software, acknowledgement of the author is not required but would be
appreciated. The contribution of any useful modifications or extensions to Wei Dai is not required but would also be appreciated.
Maarten Hoeben
ReportCtrl.h 2.0.1
Stac Electronics
Copyright (C) Stac Electronics 1993, including one or more U.S. patents No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739 and 5146221 and other pending patents.
Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Chapter 1. Introducing Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
What’s New in This Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Backup Exec Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
How Backup Exec Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Chapter 2. Installing Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Changing Windows Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Installing Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Installing Backup Exec Using the Installation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Installing Backup Exec Options on a Local Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Installing Backup Exec Media Servers to Remote Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Installing Backup Exec Remote Agents and Options on Remote Servers . . . . . . . . 58
Installing Backup Exec from the Command Line (Silent Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Registering Backup Exec Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Repairing Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Starting and Stopping Backup Exec Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Uninstalling Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Installing the Backup Exec Remote Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Using VERITAS Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Upgrading from Previous Versions of Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Upgrading Backup Exec Options on Remote Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
1
Chapter 3. Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Before Starting Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Starting Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
First Time Startup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Using the Administration Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Using Backup Exec Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Using the Overview View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Using the Backup Exec Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Backup Exec Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Changing Default Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Changing General Job Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Chapter 4. Managing Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Viewing Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Viewing Media Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Configuring Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Hot Swap for Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Pausing, Resuming, and Renaming Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Using Drive Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Creating Drive Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Adding Drives to a Drive Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Setting Priorities for Drives in a Drive Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Deleting Drives from a Drive Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Deleting Drive Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Retargeting Jobs from a Deleted Drive Pool or Media Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Renaming a Drive Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Viewing Drive Pool Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Using Cascaded Drive Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Requirements for Using Cascaded Drive Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
2 Administrator’s Guide
Creating a Cascaded Drive Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Adding Drives to a Cascaded Drive Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Deleting Drives from a Cascaded Drive Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Deleting a Cascaded Drive Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Renaming a Cascaded Drive Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Viewing Properties of a Cascaded Drive Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Viewing Server Properties and Running Server Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Viewing General Drive Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Viewing Drive Configuration Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Viewing Drive SCSI Information Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Viewing Drive Statistics Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Viewing Drive Cleaning Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Viewing and Specifying a Drive’s Media Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Configuring a Robotic Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Viewing Properties of a Robotic Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Creating Robotic Library Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Redefining Robotic Library Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Adding a Backup Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Renaming a Backup Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Changing the Path of a Backup Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Deleting a Backup Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Recreating a Backup Folder and Its Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Pausing and Resuming a Backup Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Viewing Backup Folder Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Renaming a Backup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Deleting a Backup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Recreating a Deleted Backup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents 3
Viewing and Changing Backup File Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Using Microsoft’s Removable Storage Feature with Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Using Media in Drives Managed by Removable Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Creating Utility Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Inventorying Media in Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Erasing Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Erasing Backup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Retensioning a Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Formatting Media in a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Labeling Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Ejecting Media from a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Setting Up Cleaning Jobs for Robotic Library Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Importing Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Exporting Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Locking the Robotic Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Unlocking the Robotic Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Chapter 5. Managing Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Media Overwrite Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Default Media Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Media Overwrite Protection Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Media Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Media Overwrite Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Media Append Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Overwriting Allocated or Imported Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Removing Damaged Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Media Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Imported Media Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Bar Code Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Renaming Media Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
4 Administrator’s Guide
Setting Default Media Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Media Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Creating User-defined Media Vaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Finding Media in a Location or Vault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Renaming a User-defined Media Vault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Adding Media to the Offline Location or a User-Defined Vault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Moving Media by Dragging and Dropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Deleting a User-defined Media Vault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Media Rotation Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Son Media Rotation Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Father/Son Media Rotation Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Grandfather Media Rotation Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Running the Media Rotation Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Media Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Deleting Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Moving Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Viewing General Media Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Viewing Media Management Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Viewing Media Statistical Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Viewing Media Cleaning Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Media Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Running the Media Set Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Creating Media Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Deleting a Media Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Renaming a Media Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Editing and Viewing Media Set Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Chapter 6. Backing Up Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Creating a Backup Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Using the Backup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents 5
Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Selecting Data to Back Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
About Selecting Distributed File System (Dfs) Links for Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Including or Excluding Files for Backup Using Advanced File Selection . . . . . . 269
Changing the Order for Processing Backup Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Changing Logon Accounts for Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Using Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Creating Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Using Selection Lists to Create a Backup Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Merging and Replacing Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Deleting Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Editing Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
About the Excludes Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Setting Up User-defined Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Using Backup Job Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Creating a New Backup Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Editing a Backup Job Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Creating a Copy of a Backup Job Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Creating a New Backup Job from a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Reapplying a Template to Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Using Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Specifying or Changing Backup Settings for Windows Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Submitting a Backup Job from Windows Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Running a One-button Backup Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Archiving Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Archiving Data Using Disk Grooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Using Resource Discovery to Search for New Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
General Options for Resource Discovery Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Resources Options for a Resource Discovery Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Duplicating Backed Up Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
6 Administrator’s Guide
General Options for a Duplicate Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Advanced Options for a Duplicate Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Verifying a Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Creating a Test Run Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
General Options for Test Run Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Setting Test Run Default Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Setting Default Backup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Setting Default Pre/Post Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Specifying Backup Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Specifying the Default Backup Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Changing the Backup Network for a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Using Backup Exec with Firewalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Browsing Systems Through a Firewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Protecting Windows Server 2003 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
About the Backup Exec Shadow Copy Components File System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Protecting Upgraded Windows Server 2003 Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Backing Up Utility Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Backing Up NetWare Network Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
About Backup Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Choosing a Backup Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Understanding Backup Methods and Their Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Understanding the Archive Bit and Backup Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Understanding Modified Time and Backup Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Chapter 7. Administrating Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Configuring Logon Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Default Backup Exec Logon Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Backup Exec System Logon Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Creating a Backup Exec Logon Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Editing a Backup Exec Logon Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents 7
Replacing a Backup Exec Logon Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Deleting a Backup Exec Logon Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Changing Your Default Backup Exec Logon Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Creating a New Backup Exec System Logon Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Viewing and Clearing the Audit Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Scheduling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Editing the Job Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Configuring Default Schedule Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Configuring Holiday Scheduling for Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Monitoring Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Viewing and Filtering Jobs in the Job List View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Viewing and Filtering Jobs in the Calendar View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Viewing and Changing Active Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Viewing and Modifying Scheduled Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Viewing Completed Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Error-Handling Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Configuring Error-Handling Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Configuring Database Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Using ExecView in Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Configuring ExecView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Chapter 8. Restoring Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Restore Operations and the Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Cataloging Media in a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Setting Catalog Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Catalog Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Restoring Data to a Server or Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Using the Restore Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Creating a Manual Restore Job by Configuring Job Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Restoring File Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
8 Administrator’s Guide
Restoring System State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Restoring Windows Server 2003 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Restoring Utility Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Restoring Distributed File System (Dfs) Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Restoring Media Created With Other Backup Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Selecting Data to Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Using the Resource View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Using the Media View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Changing Resource Credentials for Restore Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Using Advanced File Selection to Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Searching for Files to Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Restore Operations and Media Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Redirecting a Restore Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Using Redirected Restore for Active Directory, Active Directory Application Mode,
and Install from Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Setting Restore Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Specifying the Restore Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Canceling a Restore Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Catalog Icon Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Chapter 9. Alerts and Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Viewing and Filtering Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Viewing Alert Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Responding to Active Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Viewing the Job Log for Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Clearing Informational Alerts from the Active Alerts Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Enabling or Disabling Alerts from the Active Alerts Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Configuring Alert Category Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Viewing and Clearing the Audit Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Deleting Alerts from the Alert History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Configuring E-mail and Pager Notification Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents 9
Configuring SMTP E-Mail for Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Configuring MAPI E-Mail for Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Configuring VIM E-Mail for Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Configuring a Pager for Alert Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Configuring Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Configuring SMTP Mail for a Person Recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Configuring MAPI Mail for a Person Recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Configuring VIM Mail for a Person Recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Configuring a Pager for a Person Recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Configuring a Net Send Recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Configuring a Printer Recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Configuring a Group Recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Scheduling Notification for Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Editing Recipient Notification Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Editing Recipient Notification Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Removing Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Assigning Recipients to Alert Categories for Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Selecting Recipients for Job Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Configuring SNMP Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Adding Windows Management Instrumentation Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Uninstalling WMI Providers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Chapter 10. Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Viewing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Running a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Running and Viewing a New Report Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Viewing Report Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Available Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Active Alerts Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Alert History Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
10 Administrator’s Guide
Audit Log Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Backup Sets by Media Sets Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Configuration Settings Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Device Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Error-Handling Rules Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Event Logs Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Media Set Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Media Vault Contents Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Operations Overview Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Robotic Library Inventory Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Scratch Media Availability Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Test Run Results Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Chapter 11. Disaster Preparation and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Key Elements of a Disaster Preparation Plan (DPP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Disaster Preparation of the Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Returning to the Last Known Good Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Creating a Hardware Profile Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Creating an Emergency Repair Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Using Windows’ Automated System Recovery and System Restore to Recover a
Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Creating and Using an Emergency Boot Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Manual Disaster Recovery of Windows Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Disaster Recovery of a Local Windows NT Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Disaster Recovery of a Remote Windows NT Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Disaster Recovery of a Local Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 Computer (includes
non-authoritative restore of Active Directory for a domain controller) . . . . . . . . 565
Disaster Recovery of a Remote Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 Computer (includes
non-authoritative restore of Active Directory for a domain controller) . . . . . . . . 567
Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents 11
Chapter 12. Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
General Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Hardware-related Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Backup Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Restore Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Chapter 13. VERITAS Backup Exec - Workstation Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
The Backup Exec Windows 98 and Windows Me Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Requirements for Running the Backup Exec Windows 98/Me Agent . . . . . . . . . 588
Installing the Backup Exec Windows 98/Me Agent on the Workstation . . . . . . . 589
Configuring the Backup Exec Windows 98/Me Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Publishing Drives and Directories Using the Backup Exec Windows 98/Me Agent
592
Configuring the Network Protocol for the Backup Exec Windows 98/Me Agent . .
594
The Backup Exec Macintosh Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Requirements for Running the Backup Exec Macintosh Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Installing and Configuring the Macintosh Agent on a Mac OS X Workstation . . 597
Modifying the NetInfo Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
About the Backup Exec UNIX Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Requirements for Running the Backup Exec UNIX Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Installing the Backup Exec UNIX Agent on the Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Configuring the Backup Exec UNIX Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Troubleshooting Workstation Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Chapter 14. VERITAS Backup Exec - Command Line Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Command Line Applet Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Using the Command Line Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Using Command Line Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Switches Used With All Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
12 Administrator’s Guide
Backup Job Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Switches for Administrating Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Restore Job Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Switches for Viewing and Responding to Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Switches for Error Handling Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Switches for Managing Media and Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
Backup Exec Services Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Logon Account Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Report Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
Setting Default Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Using Backup or Restore Job Script Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Creating a Backup Job Script File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Creating a Restore Job Script File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
Saving and Launching the Backup or Restore Job Script File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Using Scripts and Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Creating a Selection List Script File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Using Scripts and Backup Job Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Creating a Backup Job Template Script File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Creating a Backup Job Template Using a Script File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
Creating a Backup Job from a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
Using a Schedule Script with Device and Media Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
Understanding Job Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
Chapter 15. Using VERITAS Backup Exec with Server Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
How Backup Exec Works in a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
Requirements for Installing Backup Exec on a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Installing Backup Exec on a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
Upgrading Backup Exec on a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
Installing Additional Backup Exec Options on a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
Uninstalling Backup Exec From A Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents 13
Creating Drive Pools for Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
Using Checkpoint Restart on Cluster Failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
Enabling or Disabling Checkpoint Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
Specifying A Different Failover Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
Designating a New SAN SSO Database Server in a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
Configurations for Backup Exec and Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Two-node Cluster with Locally-attached Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Two-node Cluster with Tape Devices on a Shared SCSI Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Two-node Clusters on a Fibre Channel SAN with the SAN SSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
Four-node Clusters on a Fibre Channel SAN with the SAN SSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
Backing Up Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
Backing Up Windows 2000 and Windows Server 2003 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
Backing Up Local Disks in a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
Backing Up Shared Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
Backing Up Database Files in a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
Restoring Data To Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
Restoring Windows 2000 and Windows Server 2003 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
Restoring the Cluster Quorum for Windows 2000 and Windows Server 2003 Sys-
tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
Restoring the Cluster Quorum to a Windows 2000 or Windows Server 2003 Node
Running Active Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
Specifying a New Drive Letter for the Cluster Quorum Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
Disaster Recovery of A Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
Using IDR to Prepare for Disaster Recovery of A Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Recovering Nodes on the Cluster Using IDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Recovering Backup Exec on a Cluster Using IDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Recovering the Entire Cluster Using a Manual Disaster Recovery Procedure . . 797
Recovering the Cluster Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
Recovering All Shared Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800
Recovering Clustered Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
Troubleshooting Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
14 Administrator’s Guide
Chapter 16. VERITAS Backup Exec - Web Administration Console . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Requirements for BEWAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Installing BEWAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
Starting BEWAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
Differences Between BEWAC and Backup Exec for Windows Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
Accessing Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
Navigating in BEWAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Viewing, Clearing, and Responding to Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
Chapter 17. Backup Exec Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
Starting the Backup Exec Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
Completing Tasks using the Backup Exec Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
Running Backup Exec Utility General Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
Add a New Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
Create a New Media Server Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Delete a Media Server from the All Media Servers Subnode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
Delete a Media Server Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
Run Backup Exec Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
View Media Server Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
Running Backup Exec Utility Services Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
Stop Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
Start Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
Change Service Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
Edit Server Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
Running Backup Exec Utility SAN SSO Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
Set the Primary SAN SSO Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
Remove the Primary SAN SSO Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
Configure the SAN SSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents 15
Promote a Media Server to a Primary SAN SSO Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
Move the Primary SAN SSO Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
Running Database Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
Check the Database Consistency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
Age the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
Compact a Media Server Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
Dump a Media Server Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
Rebuild Media Server Database Indices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
Repair a Media Server Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
Recover a Media Server Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
Change the SQL Server sa Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
Change Database Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
Running Media Server Group Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
Add Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
Remove a Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Running Cluster Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
Edit Cluster Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
Appendix A. VERITAS Backup Exec - Remote Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
Requirements for the Remote Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
Installing the Remote Agent to Remote Windows Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
Installing the Remote Agent on a 64-bit Computer Using the Installation Program
846
Installing and Uninstalling the 32-bit Remote Agent to Remote Windows Comput-
ers Using the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
Installing and Uninstalling the 64-bit Remote Agent and Advanced Open File Op-
tion Using a Command Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
Stopping and Starting the Remote Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
Backing Up Data in a Mixed Environment Using the Remote Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
16 Administrator’s Guide
Appendix B. VERITAS Backup Exec -
Admin Plus Pack Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
Installing the Admin Plus Pack Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
Using a Clone CD Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
Creating a Clone CD Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
Installing Locally Using a Clone CD Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
Installing to a Remote System Using a Clone CD Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
Copying Jobs, Selection Lists, and Job Templates
Between Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
Advanced Reporting Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
Scheduling Report Jobs and Setting Notification Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
Active Alerts by Media Server Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Alert History by Media Server Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Backup Job Success Rate Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
Backup Set Details by Resource Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
Backup Size By Resource Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
Backup Success Rate Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
Daily Job Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
Daily Network Device Utilization Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
Device Usage by Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
Event Recipients Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
Failed Backup Jobs Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
Job Distribution by Device Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
Job Queue Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
Job Templates Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
Machines Backed Up Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
Media Required for Recovery Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873
Move Media to Vault Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
Overnight Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
Problem Files Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
Recently Written Media Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents 17
Resource Risk Assessment Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
Retrieve Media from Vault Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
Scheduled Server Workload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
Template Definition Usage Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Appendix C. VERITAS Backup Exec - Intelligent Disaster Recovery Option . . . 881
Requirements for Using IDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
Installing the IDR Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
Using an Evaluation Version of the IDR Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
Getting Started with IDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
Setting Data Paths for the *.dr Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
Creating and Updating Recovery Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
Choosing Generic or Current SCSI Drivers for Windows NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Requirements for Running the IDR Preparation Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
Running the IDR Preparation Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896
Creating A Full Set of Diskettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
Creating a Bootable CD Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
Creating a Bootable Tape Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
Creating the Intelligent Disaster Recovery Diskettes Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
Updating the Full Set of Disaster Recovery Diskettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
Updating the Intelligent Disaster Recovery Diskettes Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
Updating Bootable Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
Preparing IDR Media Via Other Media Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
Using IDR to Recover a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
Changing Hardware in the Computer to be Recovered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
Using IDR To Recover IBM Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
Using IDR To Recover Windows 2000 Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
Booting the Computer in an IDR Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Using the Windows Setup in an IDR Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
Using the Disaster Recovery Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
18 Administrator’s Guide
Altering Hard Drive Partition Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
Recovering Computers Requiring OEM-Specific SCSI Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931
Performing a Manual Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
Performing Remote IDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
Microsoft SQL Server Recovery Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
Microsoft Exchange Recovery Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
SharePoint Portal Server Recovery Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
Appendix D. VERITAS Backup Exec - SAN Shared Storage Option . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
Requirements for the SAN Shared Storage Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Installing the SAN Shared Storage Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
About Devices in the Shared Storage Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943
Monitoring Drives in the Shared Storage Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
Viewing Media in the Shared Storage Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
Using Drive Pools with the SAN Shared Storage Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
Using Device Operations with the SAN Shared Storage Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
Sharing Robotic Libraries Between Backup Exec for NetWare Servers and Backup
Exec for Windows Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Scheduling and Viewing Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956
Sharing Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Cataloging Media in SAN SSO Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Media Rotation in SAN SSO Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
Designating a New Database Server and Setting Up Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
Tips for Maintaining the Database Server
and the ADAMM Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
Creating a Standby Primary Database Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961
Starting and Stopping Backup Exec Services on Multiple Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962
Troubleshooting and Recovering Failed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
Checklist for Troubleshooting Devices That Have Gone Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
Replacing a Fibre to SCSI Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
Replacing the Hub or Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents 19
Appendix E. VERITAS Backup Exec - ServerFree Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
Understanding ServerFree Backup Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
ServerFree Backup Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
Installing the ServerFree option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
Running the ServerFree Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
Restoring A ServerFree Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Appendix F. VERITAS Backup Exec - Advanced Open File Option . . . . . . . . . . . 977
Understanding the Advanced Open File Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977
Snapshot Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978
Requirements for Using the Advanced Open File Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980
Installing the Advanced Open File Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
Installing and Uninstalling the Advanced Open File Option to Remote Windows
Servers Using the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982
Uninstalling the Advanced Open File Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
Changing the Advanced Open File Option Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984
Using the Advanced Open File Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
Selecting the Advanced Open File Option for a Single Backup Job . . . . . . . . . . . 987
Setting Advanced Open File Option as the Default Setting for All Backup Jobs . 989
Checking the Job Log When Using the Advanced Open File Option . . . . . . . . . . 991
Snap Starting a VERITAS Volume Manager Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
Advanced Open File Option Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
Appendix G. VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for Microsoft SQL Server . . . . . . . 999
Requirements for Using the SQL Agent with SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
Installing the SQL Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
Using Backup Exec Logon Accounts for SQL 2000 Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
Backup Strategies for SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
Consistency Checks for SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006
Using the Advanced Open File Option with SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
Setting Backup Options for SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
20 Administrator’s Guide
Backing Up SQL 2000 Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
Backing Up SQL 2000 Filegroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
Backing Up SQL 2000 Transaction Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
Restore Options for SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
About Restoring SQL 2000 Databases and Filegroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023
Restoring from SQL 2000 Database Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024
Restoring from SQL 2000 Transaction Logs Up to a Point in Time . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
Restoring from SQL 2000 Transaction Logs Up to a Named Transaction . . . . . . 1026
Restoring from SQL 2000 Filegroup Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
Restoring the SQL 2000 Master Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030
Redirecting Restores for SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
Setting Default Backup and Restore Options for SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
Preparing for Disaster Recovery of SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
Disaster Recovery of SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042
Manual Recovery of SQL 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
About the Agent for SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
Requirements for Agent for SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
Installing the SQL Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
Using Backup Exec Logon Accounts for SQL 7.0 Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
Backup Strategies for SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052
Consistency Checks for SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
Setting Backup Options for SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
Backing Up SQL 7.0 Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058
Backing Up SQL 7.0 Filegroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060
Backing Up SQL 7.0 Transaction Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1062
Restore Options for SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064
About Restoring SQL 7.0 Databases or Filegroups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
Restoring from SQL 7.0 Database Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070
Restoring from SQL 7.0 Transaction Logs Up to a Point in Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
Restoring from SQL 7.0 Filegroup Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents 21
Restoring the SQL 7.0 Master Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
Redirecting Restores for SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076
Setting Default Backup and Restore Options for SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079
Preparing for Disaster Recovery of SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084
Disaster Recovery of SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
Manual Recovery of SQL 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086
Protecting SQL Server on Windows Server 2003 Using the SQL Server Writer . . . 1089
Backing up SQL Server Using the SQL Server Writer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
Restoring SQL Server Using the SQL Server Writer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090
Appendix H. VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for Microsoft Exchange Server . . 1093
About Using the Exchange Agent with Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
Requirements for Using the Exchange Agent with Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . 1094
Installing the Exchange Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094
Using Backup Exec Logon Accounts with Exchange 2000 and 2003 Resources . . . 1095
Backup Strategies for Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096
Recommended Configurations for Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
Backup Options for Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
Backing Up Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104
Reviewing Circular Logging for Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
Backing Up Exchange 2000 and 2003 Mailboxes and Public Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
Restore Options for Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
Restoring Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114
. . .Redirecting Exchange 2000 and 2003 Storage Group and Database Restores 1115
Restoring Exchange 2003 Data Using the Recovery Storage Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117
Redirecting Exchange 2003 Restores Using the Recovery Storage Group . . . . . 1119
Restoring Exchange 2000 and 2003 Mailboxes and Public Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
Redirecting Mailbox and Public Folder Restores in Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . 1123
Setting Default Backup and Restore Options for Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . 1127
Preparing for Disaster Recovery of Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
22 Administrator’s Guide
Disaster Recovery for Exchange 2000 and 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132
About Using the Exchange Agent with Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135
Requirements for Using the Exchange Agent with Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135
Installing the Exchange Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136
Using Backup Exec Logon Accounts with Exchange 5.5 Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136
Backup Strategies for Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137
Recommended Configurations for Exchange 5.5 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
Backup Options for Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1140
Backing Up Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
Reviewing Circular Logging for Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145
Backing Up Exchange 5.5 Mailboxes and Public Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145
Restore Options for Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149
Restoring Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151
Redirecting Exchange 5.5 Database Restores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153
Restoring Exchange 5.5 Mailboxes and Public Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155
Redirecting Mailbox and Public Folder Restores in Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157
Setting Default Backup and Restore Options for Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161
Preparing for Disaster Recovery of Exchange 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167
Disaster Recovery for Exchange Server 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168
Protecting Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 Using the Exchange Writer . . . . . . . . . 1171
Backing Up Exchange Server 2003 Using the Exchange Writer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172
Restoring Exchange Server 2003 Using the Exchange Writer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173
Appendix I. VERITAS Backup Exec - Library Expansion Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175
Setting Up Robotic Library Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175
Configuring Multi-drive Robotic Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176
Installing the Library Expansion Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177
Starting Backup Exec After Installing
the Library Expansion Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177
Viewing Robotic Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents 23
Appendix J. Backup Exec Desktop and Laptop Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
How the Desktop and Laptop Option Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182
Installing the Backup Exec Desktop and Laptop Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
Updating DLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
Deploying the Desktop Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
Using the DLO Administration Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
Creating Administrator Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
Connecting to a Backup Exec Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
The DLO Overview View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189
Setting Up DLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
Creating DLO Storage Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
Setting up a DLO Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195
Configuring the Global Exclude List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
Setting up Automated User Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
Managing Desktop Agent Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212
Restoring Files and Folders from the DLO Administration Console . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219
Searching for Desktop Files to Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1222
Deleting a Desktop Computer from DLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223
Monitoring DLO Job Histories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1224
Setting Job History View Filters on the DLO Administration Console . . . . . . . . 1227
Monitoring Alerts on the DLO Administration Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228
Configuring Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232
Managing Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1233
Alert Grooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234
Maintaining the DLO Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
Clustering the Desktop and Laptop Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
Using the Desktop Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238
System Requirements for the Desktop Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239
Using the Desktop Agent Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240
24 Administrator’s Guide
Installing the Desktop Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244
Using the Desktop Agent to Back Up Your Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245
Modifying Desktop Agent Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
Synchronizing Desktop User Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257
Viewing the Desktop Agent Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262
Restoring Files Using the Desktop Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263
Searching for Desktop Files to Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266
Monitoring Job History in the Desktop Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271
Troubleshooting the DLO Administration Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271
Troubleshooting the Desktop Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275
Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277
Appendix K. VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for Oracle Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281
Requirements for Using the Oracle Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282
Backup Strategies for An Oracle Database Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282
Types of Oracle Database Data You Can Protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
Requirements for Configuring the Oracle Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284
Creating a New Oracle User Account for the Oracle Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
Verifying ARCHIVELOG Mode and Automatic Archival Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
Running Multiple Database Instances on a Single Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287
Using Fully Specified Paths for Oracle Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
Understanding the Oracle Agent Configuration Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1289
Installing the Oracle Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1290
Configuring the Oracle Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291
Adding Media Servers to Use with the Oracle Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
Backing Up Data Using the Oracle Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
Backing Up an Entire Online Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
Backing Up Individual Online Tablespaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297
Backing Up a Closed Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298
Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents 25
Restoring the Oracle Database Using the Oracle Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
Restoring an Online Oracle Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
Restoring a Closed Oracle Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
Restoring Individual Tablespaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302
Restoring the Database Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303
Disaster Recovery Using the Oracle Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304
Disaster Recovery Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304
Recovering a Remote Oracle Database Server from a Disaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
Recovering a Combination Oracle Database Server/Media Server . . . . . . . . . . 1306
Oracle Agent Error Message Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
Appendix L. VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for Lotus® Domino™ . . . . . . . . . . 1309
Lotus Domino Agent Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310
Installing the Lotus Domino Agent on the Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311
Viewing and Selecting Lotus Domino Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312
Configuring Default Lotus Domino Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
Backing Up Lotus Domino Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
Supported Lotus Domino Database Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
Lotus Domino Transaction Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316
Backup Options for Lotus Domino Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317
Restoring Lotus Domino Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320
Selecting Lotus Domino Databases for Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321
Restore Options for Lotus Domino Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323
Redirecting Restore Jobs for Lotus Domino Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324
Preparing for Disaster Recovery on a Lotus Domino Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325
Disaster Recovery of a Lotus Domino Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326
Disaster Recovery of a Lotus Domino Server Using Archive Logging . . . . . . . . 1327
Disaster Recovery of a Lotus Domino Server Using Circular Logging . . . . . . . . 1328
26 Administrator’s Guide
Appendix M. VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for R/3 for Oracle Server . . . . . . . 1329
Backup Exec R/3 Agent Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330
Backup Exec Alerts and the BACKINT Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331
Requirements for Backup Exec R/3 Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331
Installing the Backup Exec R/3 Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332
Using the R/3 Agent to Back Up the R/3 Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332
Specifying Backup Exec Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333
Backing Up the R/3 Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335
Restoring the R/3 Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336
Disaster Recovery Using the Backup Exec R/3 Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337
Disaster Recovery Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338
Recovering a Remote R/3 Database Server from a Disaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338
Recovering a Combination R/3 Database Server/Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
Appendix N. VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server
1341
Requirements for the SharePoint Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
Installing the SharePoint Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343
Backing Up a SharePoint Portal Server or Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343
Backing Up Folders and Documents from a SharePoint Portal Workspace . . . . 1343
Restoring SharePoint Portal Servers and SharePoint Portal Workspaces . . . . . . . . . 1345
Restoring a SharePoint Portal Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345
Restoring a SharePoint Portal Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346
Redirecting SharePoint Portal Server Restore Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347
Redirecting SharePoint Portal Workspace Restore Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348
Disaster Recovery of a SharePoint Portal Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1351
Uninstalling and Reinstalling the SharePoint Portal Server Software . . . . . . . . . 1352
Restoring SharePoint Portal Server Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1352
Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents 27
Appendix O. VERITAS Backup Exec - Remote Agent for NetWare Servers . . . 1353
Requirements for the Remote Agent for NetWare Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
Maximizing Remote Agent Performance on the NetWare Server . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
Installing the Remote Agent for NetWare Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355
Using NetWare Servers 5.x and 6.x in a TCP/IP Only Environment . . . . . . . . . 1356
Adding BESTART to the AUTOEXEC.NCF File on the NetWare Server . . . . . . 1356
Unloading the Remote Agent for NetWare Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
About Backing Up NetWare Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358
Backing up the NetWare Directory Services (NDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359
Backing Up NetWare Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361
About Restoring NetWare Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363
Restoring NetWare Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363
Default Settings for the Remote Agent for NetWare Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
Saving Configuration Information for the NetWare Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368
Disaster Recovery of NetWare Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369
Appendix P. VERITAS Backup Exec - Tivoli Storage Manager Option . . . . . . . 1371
Requirements for the TSM Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371
Backup Exec as a TSM Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1372
TSM Backup Exec Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373
Preparing the TSM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375
Allocating Storage Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375
Creating The bexpi.dsm Storage Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1376
Running the BEX.MAC Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378
Enabling TSM Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379
Changing the Defaults for Backup Exec for Windows Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379
BEX.MAC Macro Command Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386
Viewing TSM-related Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386
TSM Problem Resolutions for Backup Exec for Windows Servers . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
28 Administrator’s Guide
Appendix Q. Accessibility and Backup Exec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389
Keyboard Navigation and Shortcuts in Backup Exec 9.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390
General Keyboard Navigation Within the GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390
Keyboard Navigation Within Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390
Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1392
Support for Accessibility Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407
Administrator’s Guide - Table of Contents 29
30 Administrator’s Guide
Using Backup Exec Documentation
This comprehensive manual provides detailed information and procedures for using
VERITAS Backup Exec for Windows Servers. Topics covered in this manual require the
reader to have a working knowledge of the Windows operating environment.
Conventions
The following conventions are used in this manual:
Steps Numbered steps are listed as 1., 2., …etc.
Text that you type Text that you are required to type on the keyboard is preceded
by the word "Type" and may be followed by any keys that you
must press:
For example:
Type a:install and press <Enter>.
Text that you replace Text that you must replace is shown in an italic font. For
example:
JOB_PRIORITY=priority
Items on the interface Items that are on the Backup Exec interface are shown in a
bold font. For example:
On the Properties pane, under Settings, click Exchange
Keys Keys appear in angle brackets (< >). For example:
<Enter>, <Esc>, <Del>, etc.
When two or more keys need to be pressed simultaneously to
perform a function, they appear in angle brackets with a plus
sign. For example:
<Shift + F1>
31
Conventions
32 Administrator’s Guide
Introduction
Introducing Backup Exec 1
Backup Exec is a high-performance data management solution for Windows® servers
networks. With its client/server design, Backup Exec provides fast, reliable backup and
restore capabilities for servers and workstations across the network.
Backup Exec is available in configurations that can accommodate multi-platform
networks of all sizes:
VERITAS Backup ExecTM Installs on and protects any supported version of Microsoft Windows
for Windows® Servers Server 2003, Windows 2000, or Windows NT 4. Also includes Backup
Exec agent software to protect unlimited remote workstations
running on Windows XP Professional, Windows 2000 Professional,
Windows NT 4 Workstation, Windows Me, Windows 98, UNIX, and
Macintosh platforms.
This edition supports unlimited stand-alone drives. Support for a
single robotic library drive for use with Backup Exec is provided
when you purchase Backup Exec. To enable support for additional
robotic library drives, you must purchase the Library Expansion
Option.
Support for protecting additional Windows Server 2003, Windows
2000, or Windows NT 4 servers, NetWare servers, databases, open
files, and more can be purchased separately.
33
Small Business Server Installs on and protects supported versions of Microsoft Small
Business Server. Two versions of Backup Exec for Windows Small
Business Server are available: Standard and Premium.
The Standard version can be installed only on a computer with the
Microsoft Small Business Server Standard Edition operating system.
It includes the Backup Exec for Windows Servers Agent for Microsoft
Exchange Server and the Intelligent Disaster Recovery Option.
The Premium version can be installed on a computer with Microsoft
Small Business Server for Windows Server 2003, NT 4, or Windows
2000. It includes the Backup Exec for Windows Servers Agent for
Microsoft Exchange Server, Agent for Microsoft SQL Server, and
Intelligent Disaster Recovery Option.
You can purchase Small Business Server versions of the following
options to add to either the Standard or Premium versions: Library
Expansion Option, Advanced Open File Option, Desktop and
Laptop Option (75-user license only), and the Remote Agent for
Windows Servers.
Both the Standard and Premium versions support client
workstations running Windows XP Professional, Windows 2000
Professional, Windows NT 4 Workstation, Windows Me, Windows
98, and Windows XP.
This edition supports unlimited stand-alone drives. Support for a
single robotic library drive for use with Backup Exec is provided
when you purchase Backup Exec. To enable support for additional
robotic library drives, you must purchase the Library Expansion
Option.
To protect additional Windows 2000, or Windows NT 4 servers,
NetWare servers, or databases you must upgrade to the Backup Exec
for Windows Servers Edition.
QuickStart Edition Installs on and protects any supported version of Microsoft Windows
(OEM release only) Server 2003, Microsoft Windows NT 4 or Windows 2000. Also
includes Backup Exec agent software for workstations running on
Windows XP Professional, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows NT
4.0 Workstation, Windows Me, Windows 98, UNIX, and Macintosh
platforms.
This edition supports unlimited stand-alone drives. Support for a
single robotic library drive for use with Backup Exec is provided
when you purchase Backup Exec. To enable support for additional
robotic library drives, you must purchase the Library Expansion
Option.
See also:
“Backup Exec Options” on page 37
34 Administrator’s Guide
Introduction
What’s New in This Release
What’s New in This Release
This release of Backup Exec includes the following new features and capabilities:
VERITAS Backup Exec DLO enables you to protect employees’ data on their desktops and
Desktop and Laptop laptops. The Backup Exec Administrator sets the backup and restore
Option (DLO) rights for each employee. DLO backs up the employee’s data to a
storage location on the network. The data on the network can then be
backed up to media using Backup Exec.
Support for Windows The Backup Exec Web Administration Console (BEWAC) provides
Storage Server 2003 support for Windows Storage Server 2003.
Remote Agent support for The Remote Agent for 64-bit systems provides protection of remote
64-bit systems 64-bit Windows resources. The 64-bit Remote Agent supports the:
Shadow Copy Components file system
Backup Exec Advanced Open File Option
Backup Exec Agent for Microsoft SQL Server on a 64-bit version
of SQL Server 2000
Microsoft Exchange 2003 The Shadow Copy Components file system for Windows Server 2003
Writer/Snaphot support has been enhanced to include support for the Microsoft Exchange
2003 Writer, which protects Microsoft Exchange 2003 via the Volume
Shadow Copy Service snapshot.
Protection of Microsoft The Exchange Agent protects Microsoft Exchange 2003 data and
Exchange 2003 via the supports the Recovery Storage group feature.
Exchange Agent
Microsoft Small Business Two versions of Backup Exec for Windows Small Business Server are
Server 2003 Standard and available: Standard and Premium.
Premium versions The Standard version can be installed only on a computer with the
Microsoft Small Business Server Standard Edition operating system.
It includes the Backup Exec for Windows Servers Agent for Microsoft
Exchange Server and the Intelligent Disaster Recovery Option.
The Premium version can be installed on a computer with Microsoft
Small Business Server for Windows Server 2003, NT 4, or Windows
2000. It includes the Backup Exec for Windows Servers Agent for
Microsoft Exchange Server, Agent for Microsoft SQL Server, and
Intelligent Disaster Recovery Option.
Chapter 1, Introducing Backup Exec 35
What’s New in This Release
Admin Plus Pack Option When you select the Admin Plus Pack for installation, the following
installation selection are selected for installation:
update Push Install Media Servers
Admin Plus Pack Option Reports
Push of Jobs
If you want to include the Clone CD feature of the Admin Plus Pack
Option, you must select it for installation.
Quick Installation Guide The Quick Installation Guide is a printed manual that is shipped
with Backup Exec. It provides the information you need to install
Backup Exec on a local server. It does not replace the Backup Exec
Administrator’s Guide, which is available in electronic format on the
Backup Exec installation CD or in printed format from the VERITAS
DocStore.
36 Administrator’s Guide
Introduction
Backup Exec Options
Backup Exec Options
You can purchase the following options for your Backup Exec configuration:
◆ VERITAS Backup Exec Library Expansion Option (LEO) enables support for
multi-drive tape or optical robotic libraries and library storage systems. When
utilizing the Advanced Device And Media Management (ADAMM) features, the
Library Expansion Option provides extensive configuration and management
capabilities which include unattended backup and restore operations, and bar code
reader and portal support. Device partitioning allows you to assign specific robotic
library slots for backup targets. For more information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec -
Library Expansion Option” on page 1175.
◆ VERITAS Backup Exec Advanced Open File Option ensures that all files on your
network are protected even if they are being used. Whether used alone or in
combination with specific database agents, this option handles open files at the
volume level and is seamlessly integrated with Backup Exec. You do not need to
know which files are open ahead of time; just set a scheduled backup to use this
option. For more information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec - Advanced Open File
Option” on page 977.
◆ VERITAS Backup Exec Intelligent Disaster Recovery Option (IDR) provides a
recovery solution for both local and remote Windows systems. This option eliminates
the need to manually re-install the entire operating system after a system crash. Using
diskettes, CD-R/CD-RW or bootable tape, IDR gets you back online fast allowing you
to restore from your last complete backup set - including full, incremental, differential
and working set backups. For more information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec -
Intelligent Disaster Recovery Option” on page 881.
◆ VERITAS Backup Exec Admin Plus Pack Option provides features designed for
distributed data management of your media and remote servers, including the ability
to create a clone CD image so you can install Backup Exec on additional servers using
the same installation settings. This option also allows you to copy jobs, selection lists,
and templates between media servers and provides advanced reporting capabilities,
such as scheduling a report and e-mailing report output. For more information, see
“VERITAS Backup Exec - Admin Plus Pack Option” on page 851.
◆ VERITAS Backup Exec Agent for Microsoft Exchange Server provides a fast and
flexible way of protecting your online Exchange 5.5 and Exchange 2000 and 2003
Server data. This agent provides complete individual mailbox backup (also utilizing
single instance restore), including protection for embedded messages, objects,
attributes and all Outlook components. For more information, see “VERITAS Backup
Exec - Agent for Microsoft Exchange Server” on page 1093.
Chapter 1, Introducing Backup Exec 37
Backup Exec Options
◆ VERITAS Backup Exec Agent for Microsoft SQL Server fully protects active databases
and verifies all of your SQL v7.0 and SQL 2000 data automatically. SQL 7.0 and SQL
2000 users can customize their data protection needs down to the filegroup level. For
fast point-in-time backups, you can use this option to run transaction log backups
with truncation. Redirected restores allow you to easily restore SQL data to other SQL
servers on the network. Multi-pipe support along with SQL VDI provides users the
easiest and fastest way to complete SQL database protection. For more information,
see “VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for Microsoft SQL Server” on page 999.
◆ VERITAS Backup Exec Remote Agent for NetWare Servers expands network-wide
data protection by providing a Client Access License (CAL), fully protecting all NDS
information across NetWare 5.1 and 6.x environments. In addition to backing up
NetWare servers from your Windows media server, you get 100 percent SMS
compatibility supporting the current versions of NetWare. The exclusive Agent
Accelerator ™ technology maximizes backup performance and reduces network
traffic by using source level compression and distributed processing. For more
information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec - Remote Agent for NetWare Servers” on
page 1353.
◆ VERITAS Backup Exec Remote Agent for Windows® Servers provides a Client Access
License (CAL) to enable protection of remote Windows servers. With its exclusive
Agent Accelerator™ technology, the Remote Agent uses source compression and
distributed processing to optimize backup performance. For more information, see
“VERITAS Backup Exec - Remote Agent” on page 843.
◆ VERITAS Backup Exec Agent for Oracle® provides seamless online backup protection
for Oracle Database Server versions 8.0.5, 8i-8.1.6, 9i and Oracle Application Server 9i.
Integrating Oracle backup with the advanced features of Backup Exec provides data
protection of both individual table spaces as well as complete Oracle databases. You
can also include archived redo files and control files without taking them offline. For
more information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for Oracle Server” on
page 1281.
◆ VERITAS Backup Exec Agent for R/3™ for Oracle® Server provides superior data
protection by allowing backups of critical data while the application is still online and
in use. The R/3 Agent, certified by SAP, is a reliable solution that allows Backup Exec
to provide both local and remote protection of the latest versions of SAP™R/3™
databases utilizing the SAP (BC-BRI BACKINT) interface while enabling you to
efficiently manage your data. For more information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec -
Agent for R/3 for Oracle Server” on page 1329.
◆ VERITAS Backup Exec Agent for Lotus® Domino™ provides seamless online backup
protection for versions 5 and 6. Using Lotus Domino APIs, the Agent for Lotus
Domino now fully supports transactional logging, providing users with
uncompromising data protection of the entire Lotus Domino server. For more
information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for Lotus® Domino™” on
page 1309.
38 Administrator’s Guide
Introduction
Backup Exec Options
◆ VERITAS Backup Exec SAN Shared Storage Option (SAN SSO) allows Backup Exec to
operate in a Storage Area Network (SAN), providing a high performance LAN-free
backup solution. SAN SSO allows multiple distributed media servers to share
common, centralized storage devices connected over a SAN. This configuration
provides greater efficiency and fault tolerance. In addition to increasing performance
and backup speeds in the SAN environment, the Shared Storage Option load balances
backup activity across multiple Backup Exec media servers and centralizes
management tasks while lowering the total cost of hardware ownership. For more
information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec - SAN Shared Storage Option” on page 939.
◆ VERITAS Backup Exec - Tivoli Storage Manager (TSM) Option lets you combine the
speed and localized control of Backup Exec with the TSM policy-based system of
centralized storage management. This option allows the TSM server’s storage
resources to appear as a robotic library in the list of target devices on the Backup Exec
server. Backup Exec administrators can then direct the output of any Backup Exec job
to the TSM server simply by selecting the name of the TSM robotic library as the
destination when submitting the job. For more information, see “VERITAS Backup
Exec - Tivoli Storage Manager Option” on page 1371.
◆ VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server protects all of
the files and attributes associated with an installation of SharePoint Portal Server.
Backup Exec, which offered the first complete backup and recovery solution for
SharePoint Portal Server, now allows backup and restore of individual workspaces
and documents. Restores can be made to the original SPS information store or
redirected to another SPS information store without affecting other workspaces. For
more information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec - Agent for Microsoft SharePoint Portal
Server” on page 1341.
◆ VERITAS Backup Exec - ServerFree Option enables you to increase backup
performance by freeing up media server processor resources and moving the backup
processing operations to hardware solutions that may be installed in your storage
area network environment. Use of this option requires VERITAS Backup Exec
Advanced Open File Option and VERITAS Backup Exec SAN Shared Storage Option.
For more information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec - ServerFree Option” on page 967.
◆ VERITAS Backup Exec - Desktop and Laptop Option enables you to protect all
business data. It provides continuous backup protection whether users are in the
office or on the road. Users can synchronize files between their desktop and laptop.
For more information, see “VERITAS Backup Exec - Desktop and Laptop Option” on
page 1181.
Chapter 1, Introducing Backup Exec 39
How Backup Exec Works
How Backup Exec Works
In Backup Exec, backup, restore, and utility operations, called jobs, are submitted using
the Administration Console. Administrators can run the Administration Console from the
media server, a Windows server with storage hardware attached, or from a remote system.
After jobs are created, they are processed by the Backup Exec server components running
on the media server. All interaction to the Backup Exec system, such as submitting jobs,
viewing results, and performing device and media operations, can be done through the
Administration Console.
The following diagram illustrates how the components work together to provide
complete backup and restore functionality to the entire network:
How Backup Exec Works
Backup Exec
administration console
Backup Exec database
Backup Exec media server
running the Backup Exec
engine Backup Exec workstation
storage devices and server agents
and media
Through the Administration Console, you configure settings, called default options, that
you want Backup Exec to use for most jobs. However, you can select to override these
default options while setting up a specific jobs, such as a weekly backup of selected
workstations. You can create a once-only job, such as a restore of a particular file to a
server, or you can schedule recurring jobs, such as daily backup jobs.
40 Administrator’s Guide
Introduction
How Backup Exec Works
Wizards guide you through most Backup Exec operations, including the creation of a
backup or restore job, setting up media rotation jobs, and setting media overwrite
protection.
You can monitor a job’s progress through the Job Monitor, or use Backup Exec’s Calendar
to quickly view all jobs scheduled to run for the day.
The media server contains media and device databases designed to simplify the process of
organizing and allocating storage devices attached to your media server and to aid in
preventing media from being accidentally overwritten. Through Backup Exec’s device
management functions, you can logically group storage devices together in drive pools.
Through the media management function, you can organize, track, and troubleshoot all of
the media in your library. You can define overwrite protection periods to ensure that
media is not accidentally overwritten, set up automatic media labeling, and view media
statistics such as the media’s age, hours of use, number of mounts, bytes written and read,
and errors encountered, which are automatically tracked by Backup Exec.
After a job has been processed, the job’s results are stored in a job history database. A
record of the data that was backed up is kept in Backup Exec’s catalog. The job history is a
report of what happened during the processing of the job (statistics, errors, and so on),
and the catalog file is the record from which restore selections are made.
Chapter 1, Introducing Backup Exec 41
How Backup Exec Works
42 Administrator’s Guide
Installation
Installing Backup Exec 2
Backup Exec installation on the media server includes:
◆ Installing the storage device hardware (controller, drives, robotic libraries) in the
media server. Refer to the documentation included with your storage device
hardware for installation instructions. Use the appropriate Windows hardware setup
functions to configure your controller and storage devices. (Refer to your Microsoft
Windows documentation for more information.)
◆ Installing Backup Exec software on the media server. All Backup Exec program files
are installed on the media server from the Backup Exec installation CD. During
installation, files required for workstation agent installation are also copied to the
media server.
◆ Rebooting the media server to initialize changes (when necessary).
The installation program installs Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine (with Service
Pack 3a) components required to run Backup Exec. These include SQL Server 2000 core
components, MDAC 2.8, and ODBC 3.0. With ODBC, the installation program installs and
configures the base 32-bit ODBC administrator v3.0, including runtime DLLs, and the
ODBC driver for the Backup Exec catalogs.
If you are running applications that use earlier versions of these components, problems
may occur due to the upgraded drivers. If problems occur, contact the vendor of the
incompatible software to obtain a version compatible with the MDAC.
Caution The MDAC version that Backup Exec installs as part of the MSDE 2000
installation is incompatible with a clustered version of Microsoft SQL Server
7.0. Do not install Backup Exec on a clustered version of SQL 7.0 server.
43
System Requirements
If SQL Server 2000 is already installed on the server, you are prompted to do one of the
following:
◆ Install the required Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine (MSDE 2000)
components with Backup Exec and create a default Backup Exec instance.
◆ Select a SQL Server 2000 instance that already exists on which to run Backup Exec.
Note If you choose to install Backup Exec into an existing SQL 2000 instance, make sure
that SQL 2000 service pack 3a or later is installed before you continue with the
installation.
When Backup Exec is installed into an existing instance, the automated master
database restore feature is not available. To recover the Master database, you must
replace it with the Master database copy that Backup Exec automatically creates and
updates when the Master database is backed up.
When Backup Exec is installed into an instance other than a default Backup Exec
instance, the Cluster Configuration Wizard is not available.
After installing Backup Exec on the media server, Backup Exec Workstation Agent
software can be installed and configured on remote workstations on the network.
System Requirements
The following are the minimum system requirements for running this version of Backup
Exec:
Minimum System Requirements
Operating System Microsoft Windows NT Workstation v4.0 or Microsoft Windows NT
Server Operating System v4.0; Service Pack 6a or later.
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional version, Windows 2000 Server
version, Windows 2000 Advanced Server, or Windows 2000
Datacenter.
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 server family.
Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 1 or later.
Internet Browser Internet Explorer 5.01 or later; however, version 5.5 is recommended.
Processor Pentium system.
44 Administrator’s Guide
System Requirements
Minimum System Requirements (continued)
Memory Required: 256 MB RAM
Recommended: 512 MB (or more for better performance).
Installation
Note RAM requirements may vary depending on operations
performed, the options installed, and the specific machine
configuration.
Virtual Memory Recommendations: 20 MB above Windows
recommended size for total paging file size (total for all disk
volumes). To view or set the paging file size:
On Windows NT, click the Start button, point to Settings, and
then click Control Panel. Double-click System, and then click the
Performance tab.
On Windows 2000 or Windows Server 2003, click the Start
button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel.
Double-click System, click the Advanced tab, and then click
Performance Options.
Disk Space 550 MB hard disk space required after Microsoft Windows is
installed (typical installation).
Other Hardware (Recommended if remote activity is to be performed) Network
interface card or a virtual network adapter card.
CD-ROM drive.
(Optional) Printer supported by Microsoft Windows.
(Recommended) A mouse.
(Optional for pager notification) Modem supported by Windows.
Storage Hardware Backup Exec requires at least one storage media drive and/or robotic
library and the appropriate controller card. Removable storage
devices and non-removable hard drives can also be targeted for
backups. Refer to the Backup Exec hardware compatibility list for a
complete list of devices that are supported. Support for multi-drive
robotic libraries is available separately. Refer to the Windows
Hardware Compatibility list for a complete list of supported SCSI
controllers.
Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec 45
Changing Windows Security
Changing Windows Security
You can set up Windows security with the Backup Exec service account to protect your
data. Depending on how the Windows network is configured, change security properties
for the following scenarios:
◆ Servers in one domain.
◆ Servers and selected workstations in one domain.
◆ Servers in more than one domain.
◆ Servers and workstations in more than one domain.
The following procedures give the Backup Exec service account administrative rights in
the appropriate domains and workstations. You must grant the Backup Exec service
account administrative rights to give Backup Exec access to the administrative shares (for
example, C$) and the ability to protect the Windows registry.
Use one of the following procedures, as appropriate for the environment.
◆ For Windows NT 4.0, use the User Manager for Domains tool in the Administrative
Tools group.
◆ For Windows 2000, use the Active Directory Users and Computers tool and Domain
and Trusts tool in the Active Directory administrative tools group.
▼ If You Are Backing Up Servers (only) in One Domain:
❖ When prompted for a user name in the Service Account window, add the name of an
existing or new Service Account (for example, Administrator) as a member of the
local Administrators group for the Domain. It is highly recommended that you also
enter a password.
▼ If You Are Backing Up Servers and Selected Workstations in One Domain:
1. Add the name of an existing or new Service Account (for example, Administrator) as
a member of the Global Domain Admins group.
2. Ensure that on each workstation in the domain you want to back up, the Global
Domain Admins group is a member of the workstation’s local Administrators group.
46 Administrator’s Guide
Changing Windows Security
▼ If You Are Backing Up Servers in More Than One Domain:
1. Establish a One Way Trust Relationship between the Host Domain (the domain in
which the media server resides) and the Target Domains (the domains that are to be
Installation
backed up):
a. In the Host Domain, permit the Target Domains to trust the Host Domain.
b. In each Target Domain, trust the Host Domain.
2. In each Target Domain, add the Host Domain’s name of an existing or new Service
Account (for example, Administrator) in the local Administrators group.
▼ If You Are Backing Up Servers and Workstations in More Than One Domain:
1. Establish a One Way Trust Relationship between the Host and Target Domains:
a. In the Host Domain, permit the Target Domains to trust the Host Domain.
b. In each Target Domain, trust the Host Domain.
2. In each Target Domain, add the Host Domain’s name of an existing or new Service
Account (for example, Administrator) in the Local Administrators group.
3. On each workstation to back up, add the Host Domain’s name of an existing or new
Service Account (e.g., Administrator) in the Local Administrators group.
Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec 47
Installing Backup Exec
Installing Backup Exec
When installing Backup Exec, use the installation program on the Backup Exec CD, or
install it from the command line, which is referred to as Silent Mode Installation. The silent
mode installation uses the setup.exe program on the Backup Exec CD.
If you are installing an evaluation version of Backup Exec, you can install any additional
options. To install the Backup Exec Web Administration Console, you must be installing
Backup Exec on a server appliance or on a Windows Server 2003 server with the Remote
Administration (HTML) components installed.
Please note the following information before installing Backup Exec:
Minimum system requirements
Hardware Make sure that storage device hardware and associated drivers are
properly installed and recognized by the Windows operating system.
System Exit all programs before installing Backup Exec.
Rights To install Backup Exec, Administrator rights are required, or the
account must belong to an Administrator-equivalent group.
48 Administrator’s Guide
Installing Backup Exec
Minimum system requirements
The Backup Exec Service All Backup Exec services on the media server run in the context of a
Account user account configured for Backup Exec’s system services. This
account can be created during Backup Exec’s installation, or an
Installation
existing user account can be used. To create a service account for
Backup Exec during installation, supply a user name and password
when prompted. The account designated for Backup Exec’s services -
whether it is a new account or an existing user account - will be
assigned the following rights:
Authenticate as any user and gain access to resources under any
user identity.
Create a token object, which can then be used to access any local
resources.
Log on as a service.
Administrative rights (provides complete and unrestricted rights
to the computer).
Backup operator rights (provides rights to restore files and
directories).
Manage auditing and security log.
Due to security implementations in Microsoft Small Business Server,
the service account must be "Administrator."
On a computer running Windows Server 2003 or Windows XP, you
cannot install Backup Exec using a service account that has a blank
password. If you attempt to do so, the following error message
displays when Backup Exec services are created:
"The given password is not correct for account [server]\[username]."
You can configure Windows to allow for blank passwords. For more
information, see your Windows documentation.
See also:
“Installing Backup Exec Using the Installation Program” on page 50
“Installing Backup Exec from the Command Line (Silent Mode)” on page 60
Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec 49
Installing Backup Exec
Installing Backup Exec Using the Installation Program
The Backup Exec CD includes an installation program that guides you through the
installation process.
Note On Windows NT 4.0 Terminal Server Edition, you must install Backup Exec locally
on the Terminal Server using Add/Remove Programs, instead of using the Backup
Exec installation program. Because the Add/Remove program does not support
UNC paths, you will receive an error message if you attempt to install Backup Exec
from a Terminal Server Client.
Note If you are installing Backup Exec through Terminal Services and the installation
media is on a shared drive (CD-ROM or network share), you must install it using a
UNC path. Installation via mapped drives is not supported in this situation.
▼ To install Backup Exec using the installation program:
1. From the installation CD browser, select the option to install VERITAS Backup Exec.
The Welcome window appears.
2. Click Next to proceed with the installation.
The License Agreement appears.
3. Select I accept the terms of the license agreement, and then click Next.
4. Do any of the following:
- To install to a local computer, select Local Install and Install Backup Exec
software and options, click Next, and then continue with step 5 on page 51.
- To install the Remote Administrator, go to “Installing the Backup Exec Remote
Administrator” on page 72.
- To install Backup Exec media servers and options to remote computers, go to
“Installing Backup Exec Media Servers to Remote Computers” on page 54.
- To install the Backup Exec Remote Agent for Windows Servers or the Advanced
Open File Option to remote computers, or the Backup Exec NetWare Agent to a
remote NetWare server, go to “Installing Backup Exec Remote Agents and
Options on Remote Servers” on page 58.
50 Administrator’s Guide
Installing Backup Exec
5. If Backup Exec Setup detects an existing installation of MS SQL Server 2000, you can
allow the required Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Desktop Engine (MSDE 2000)
components to be installed with Backup Exec and create a default Backup Exec
instance, or you can choose to use a SQL Server 2000 instance that already exists on
Installation
which to run Backup Exec.
Select an option, and then click Next.
A dialog that requests your serial numbers appears.
6. You can manually enter the serial numbers for Backup Exec and any options, or you
can import an existing besernum.xml file to enter the serial numbers.
- To manually enter the serial numbers for Backup Exec and any additional options,
type the serial number into the field, and then click Add. When finished, click
Next.
- To import the serial numbers from a file, click Import, and then browse for and
select an existing besernum.xml file. When finished, click Next.
Note When you click Next, the serial numbers you entered are saved to the file
besernum.xml, located in the Windows directory.
If another installation of Backup Exec 9.1 for Windows Servers is found on the
computer, the serial number appears in the Existing Serial Numbers field. To
remove an older serial number, select the number and click Remove. A serial
number is not required for Backup Exec’s fully functional evaluation version.
- To install a 60-day evaluation copy of the software, click Next without entering
serial number information.
Installing an evaluation copy enables many options that must be purchased
separately and are not included as part of Backup Exec.
Note For information about clustering Backup Exec, see “Installing Backup Exec on a
Cluster” on page 762.
7. Review the local features to be installed.
All features that are not to be installed have an "X" displayed in the feature icon. To
enable any of these options, click the icon to clear the X, and then follow the prompts
to install it. If the feature icon is gray, the option is not available for change.
Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec 51
Installing Backup Exec
8. To accept the local features for installation, and to accept the default Destination
Folder for Backup Exec, click Next. To select another destination folder for Backup
Exec, click Change, and follow the prompts.
Note Selecting a mount point as the destination directory is not recommended because
the mount point is deleted if Backup Exec is uninstalled.
9. Provide a user name and password that the Backup Exec system services can use (see
“The Backup Exec Service Account” on page 49), and then click Next.
10. If prompted, select how to install device drivers for the tape storage devices that are
connected to the server, and then click Next.
It is recommended that you select Use VERITAS device drivers for all tape devices.
11. If you are prompted, enter information or choose settings for additional options being
installed. Click Next after each selection.
12. Read the Backup Exec installation review, and then click Install.
The MSDE 2000 (if selected), VERITAS Update, and Backup Exec program files are
installed.
13. When the installation is complete, you can choose to register Backup Exec online,
view the readme, create a shortcut to Backup Exec on the desktop, and restart the
computer.
If Restart System appears, restart the computer in order for the configuration to take
effect.
If the installation fails, an installation job log named bkupinst.log is created in the
Windows root directory on the computer where Backup Exec is installed; this file lists
any errors that may have occurred during installation. When prompted, click View
Installation Log.
See also:
“Getting Started” on page 79
52 Administrator’s Guide
Installing Backup Exec
Installing Backup Exec Options on a Local Server
You can install additional options, such as the Library Expansion Option, when you are
installing Backup Exec by following the procedures described in “Installing Backup Exec
Using the Installation Program” on page 50. However, if you have already installed
Installation
Backup Exec and want to install additional options, you should first review the section on
that option to ensure that you have met all minimum requirements and then continue
with the following steps.
If you have installed the evaluation version of Backup Exec or have installed the Not For
Resale (NFR) or the Open Option Suite edition, you can install evaluation versions of the
additional options.
Note If you are installing Backup Exec through Terminal Services and the installation
media is on a shared drive (CD-ROM or network share) you must install using a
UNC path. Installation via mapped drives is not supported.
▼ To install an option on a local media server:
Note You can also install Backup Exec options using Add/Remove Programs in the
Windows Control Panel.
1. Start Backup Exec for Windows Servers or verify that it is running.
2. On the Tools menu, click Serial Numbers and Installation.
3. Click Next when the Welcome window appears.
4. Make sure Local Install and Additional Options are selected, and then click Next.
5. Type the option’s serial number and click Add, or click Import to import the serial
number from an existing besernum.xml file, and then click Next.
6. Review the local features to be installed, and then click Next.
All features that are not to be installed have an "X" displayed in the feature icon. To
enable any of these options, click the icon to clear the X, and then follow the prompts
to install it. If the feature icon is gray, the option is not available for change.
7. If you are prompted, enter information or choose settings for additional options being
installed. Click Next after each selection.
Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec 53
Installing Backup Exec
8. Read the Backup Exec installation review, and then click Install.
When the installation is complete, you can choose to register Backup Exec online,
view the readme, create a shortcut to Backup Exec on the desktop, and restart the
computer.
9. Make your selections, and then click Finish.
If Restart System appears, you should restart the computer in order for the
configuration to take effect.
If the installation fails, an installation job log named bkupinst.log is created in the
Windows root directory on the computer where Backup Exec is installed; this file lists
any errors that may have occurred during installation. If prompted, click View
Installation Log, and check this log.
10. After the computer has rebooted, restart Backup Exec for Windows Servers.
Installing Backup Exec Media Servers to Remote Computers
You can install Backup Exec media servers and options to remote computers.
To install a Backup Exec media server to a remote computer, you must have one of the
following installed on the local media server:
◆ The Admin Plus Pack option
◆ An evaluation version of Backup Exec
◆ The Not For Resale (NFR) option
If you are installing Backup Exec through Terminal Services and the installation media is
on a shared drive (CD-ROM or network share) you must install using a UNC path.
Installation via mapped drives is not supported.
54 Administrator’s Guide
Installing Backup Exec
▼ To install Backup Exec to a remote computer:
1. Do one of the following:
- If you are installing Backup Exec for the first time, from the installation CD
Installation
browser, select the option to install VERITAS Backup Exec, and then when
prompted, click Next to proceed with the installation. Select I accept the terms of
the license agreement, and then click Next.
- If Backup Exec is already installed, make sure that it is running, and then on the
Tools menu, click Serial Numbers and Installation. Click Next when the
Welcome window appears.
Note You can also use Microsoft’s Add/Remove Programs utility to install Backup Exec
to a remote computer. See your Microsoft documentation for more information.
2. To install Backup Exec media servers and options to remote computers, select
Remote Install, and then click Next.
Note If you do not need to install any Backup Exec options to the local computer, clear the
Local Install selection.
3. On the Backup Exec Remote Features dialog box, in the Destinations Systems pane,
right-click Windows Media Servers.
4. Do one of the following:
- Select Add Remote Computer, browse to select the remote server, and then click
Next.
- Select Add Remote Computer Manually, type the Domain and Computer Name,
and then click OK.
5. Enter the user name, password and domain credentials of an account that has
administrative rights on the remote computers, and then click OK.
Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec 55
Installing Backup Exec
6. Select one of the following options:
Item Description
Remote install with Select this option to enter serial numbers for the remote computers.
serialized options During the install, you are prompted for the serial numbers for the
remote computers.
If you select this option to install a Backup Exec media server
(Windows Media Server) to a remote computer, then you are
prompted to select a destination folder.
You can accept the default destination folder on the remote
computer, or make changes.
After selecting this option, continue with step 7 on page 56.
Remote install with Select this option to install remotely using all of the installation
cloned local settings options installed on the local computer. When this option is used,
you cannot change any settings on the remote computer. For
example, if you have installed the Intelligent Disaster Recovery
option locally, this option will also be installed remotely.
After selecting this option, continue with step 13 on page 52.
Remote install from Select this option to install remotely using the clone file settings that
clone file settings may be contained on a clone CD image or that could also be
contained in a previously created parameter file (see “Creating and
Using Installation Parameter Files” on page 66). When this option is
selected, you can browse to a parameter file.
After selecting this option, continue with step 13 on page 52.
A dialog that requests your serial numbers appears.
Note Each remote computer targeted for an option installation must have a unique
option serial number.
7. Do one of the following:
- Enter the serial numbers for Backup Exec and any additional options, clicking
Add after entering each serial number. When finished, click Next.
- Click Import, and then browse for and select an existing besernum.xml file. When
finished, click Next.
Note When you click Next, the serial numbers you entered are saved to the file
besernum.xml, located in the Windows directory.
56 Administrator’s Guide
Installing Backup Exec
8. Provide a user name and password that the Backup Exec system services can use (see
“The Backup Exec Service Account” on page 49), and then click Next.
9. If prompted, select how to install device drivers for the tape storage devices that are
Installation
connected to the server, and then click Next.
It is recommended that you select Use VERITAS device drivers for all tape devices.
10. If you are prompted, enter information or choose settings for additional options being
installed. Click Next after each selection.
11. Review the features to be installed, and then click Next.
All features that are not to be installed have an "X" displayed in the feature icon.
12. Read the Backup Exec installation review, and then click Install.
13. When the installation is complete, click Next, and then click Finish. You may need to
restart the computer in order for the configuration to take affect.
If the installation fails, an installation job log named bkupinst.log is created in the
Windows root directory on the computer where Backup Exec is installed; this file lists
any errors that may have occurred during installation. If prompted, click View
Installation Log, and check this log.
Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec 57
Installing Backup Exec
Installing Backup Exec Remote Agents and Options on
Remote Servers
You can install the Backup Exec Remote Agent to remote Windows computers, the Backup
Exec Advanced Open File option to remote computers, and the Backup Exec NetWare
Agent to remote NetWare computers.
These features are push installed to remote computers from a media server. Push
installations save time by eliminating the need for local access at the target computer for
the installation to be successful.
You cannot push install Backup Exec to a remote Windows XP Professional computer
when the operating system on the remote computer is in the ForceGuest configuration
and the remote computer is not in a domain. ForceGuest is a configuration that limits
incoming users to Guest-level access. Instead, you must locally install the Remote Agent
on the Windows XP computer by using the installation CD, or over the network by
following the procedure in “Installing Backup Exec from the Command Line (Silent
Mode)” on page 60.
You cannot push install the 64-bit version of the Remote Agent for Windows Servers. If
you are using the Desktop and Laptop Option, you cannot push install the Desktop
Agent.
Note If you are installing Backup Exec remote agents and options through Terminal
Services and the installation media is on a shared drive (CD-ROM or network share)
you must install using a UNC path. Installation via mapped drives is not supported.
▼ To install a feature to a remote computer:
1. Do one of the following:
- If you are installing Backup Exec for the first time, from the installation CD
browser, select the option to install VERITAS Backup Exec, and then when
prompted, click Next to proceed with the installation. Select I accept the terms of
the license agreement, and then click Next.
- If Backup Exec is already installed, make sure that it is running, and then on the
Tools menu, click Serial Numbers and Installation. Click Next when the
Welcome window appears.
Note You can also use Microsoft’s Add/Remove Programs utility to install Backup Exec
to a remote computer. See your Microsoft documentation for more information.
58 Administrator’s Guide
Installing Backup Exec
2. To install Backup Exec remote agents and options to remote computers, select
Remote Install, and then click Next.
Note If you do not need to install any Backup Exec options to the local computer, clear the
Installation
Local Install selection.
3. On the Backup Exec Remote Features dialog box, in the Destinations Systems pane,
right-click either of the following:
- Windows Agent/Options Computers. Enables you to install the Backup Exec
Remote Agent to a remote Windows computer, or to install the Advanced Open
File Options to a remote computer.
- NetWare Agent Server. Enables you to install the Backup Exec NetWare Agent to
a remote NetWare server.
4. Do one of the following:
- Select Add Remote Computer, browse to select the remote server, and then click
Next.
- Select Add Remote Computer Manually, type the Domain and Computer Name,
and then click OK. This option is not available for NetWare servers.
5. Enter the user name, password and domain credentials of an account that has
administrative rights on the remote computers, and then click OK.
6. Review the features to be installed, and then click Next.
All features that are not to be installed have an "X" displayed in the feature icon. To
enable any of these options, click the icon to clear the X, and then follow the prompts
to install it. If the feature icon is gray, the option is not available for change.
7. Read the installation review, and then click Install.
8. When the installation is complete, click Next, and then click Finish. You may need to
restart the computer in order for the configuration to take effect.
If the installation fails, an installation job log named bkupinst.log is created in the
Windows root directory on the computer where Backup Exec is installed; this file lists
any errors that may have occurred during installation. If prompted, click View
Installation Log, and check this log.
You can try to manually install the Remote Agent for Windows Servers (see
“Installing and Uninstalling the 32-bit Remote Agent to Remote Windows Computers
Using the Command Line” on page 847.)
Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec 59
Installing Backup Exec
Installing Backup Exec from the Command Line (Silent Mode)
Installing Backup Exec from the command line is referred to as Silent Mode Installation.
This method of installation uses the setup.exe program on the Backup Exec CD, a series of
command switches, and the -S switch. Silent mode installation is only supported if
Backup Exec is being installed on a computer for the first time.
Requirements for Command Line Installation include:
◆ Backup Exec installation CD.
◆ Administrator privileges on the computer where you want to install, configure, or
uninstall Backup Exec.
▼ To install Backup Exec from the command line:
1. Open a Windows command prompt.
2. Change to the drive containing the Backup Exec CD.
3. Change directories to \WINNT\INSTALL\BE.
4. Type setup /TS: and the appropriate switches. For example:
setup /TS: /USER:<user> /DOM:domain /PASS:password /SNO:serial
number -S
For descriptions of the switches, see “Command Line Switches for Backup Exec Silent
Mode Installation” on page 61.
If you use the command line switches without the -S switch, the Backup Exec
installation program launches with the command line parameters as defaults for the
installation options. For example, if -S had been left in the above example, the Backup
Exec installation program launches with the user name, domain, password, and serial
number appearing on the installation dialog boxes.
5. Press <Enter>.
An installation job log named bkupinst.log is created in the Windows root
directory on the computer where Backup Exec is installed; this file lists any errors that
may have occurred during installation, and is the only source of feedback when
running setup.exe. Check this job log to determine if you need to reboot the computer
to complete the installation.
60 Administrator’s Guide
Installing Backup Exec
Command Line Switches for Backup Exec Silent Mode Installation
The command line switches used for silent mode installation of Backup Exec are
described in the following table. Note the following general rules for using these switches:
Installation
◆ Substitute values appropriate for your environment for values shown in italics; for
example substitute your password for password.
◆ Enclose the value in quotation marks if it contains spaces, such as “Operations Weekly
Backup”.
Note Additional switches appearing in BOLD are required.
Command Line Switches for Silent Mode Installation of Backup Exec
Switch Additional Switches Description
/TS: Installs Backup Exec using the options
specified with the additional switches. The
/USER:"user" /DOM:"dm" /PASS:"pw" is
required.
/USER:"user" Required. Specifies an existing user,
/DOM:"dm" domain, and password for the Backup
Exec system service account. Silent mode
/PASS:"pw"
installation will not create a user.
Note When using /PASS:, if a quote is
needed as part of the password,
specify it as \". For example, if the
password is pass"word, type it as
/PASS:pass\"word. If the characters
\" are used as part of the password,
you must precede each character
with a \. For example, if the
password is pass\"word, type it as
/PASS:pass\\\"word.
/DEST:"path" Specifies the path where Backup Exec will
be installed. Otherwise, the default path
Program Files\VERITAS\Backup
Exec\NT is used.
/DOCS: Installs online documentation.
Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec 61
Installing Backup Exec
Command Line Switches for Silent Mode Installation of Backup Exec (continued)
Switch Additional Switches Description
/NOINSTALL: Allows you to select all install options
without actually installing the Backup
Exec software. This option can be used in
conjunction with the /CPF: or /XML:
switches.
/SNO:serial number Specifies one or more serial numbers to
use for installing Backup Exec and
additional options. Serial numbers are not
required to install the Remote
Administrator. You may specify up to 99
serial numbers. If none are specified, then
an Evaluation copy of Backup Exec is
installed.
The following examples show how the
/SNO switch can be used:
/SNO:s1
/SNO:s1 s2 s3 s4
/SNO:s1 /SNO:s2 /SNO:s3 /SNO:s4
/TD:NEW or ALL /TD:NEW installs tape drivers only for
drives that do not have drivers loaded.
/TD:ALL installs tape drivers for all
drives.
/CPF:"file name" Creates a file containing all of the
installation parameters provided. This file
is encrypted.
/XML:"file name" Creates an XML file containing all of the
installation parameters provided.
Note The XML file is not encrypted, which
exposes parameters such as the
password.
62 Administrator’s Guide
Installing Backup Exec
Command Line Switches for Silent Mode Installation of Backup Exec (continued)
Switch Additional Switches Description
Note The following switches are designed for use with Not For Resale, Open Option, and
Installation
Evaluation versions of Backup Exec only.
/LOADER: Installs the Library Expansion Option.
/IDR: Installs the Intelligent Disaster Recovery
Option.
/R3: Installs the Backup Exec Agent for R/3™
for Oracle® Server.
/OFO: Installs the Advanced Open File Option.
/TSM:IP address:port Installs the IBM ADSM/TSM Option.
/SSO: Installs the SAN Shared Storage Option
with this server as the primary server.
/SSO:server name Installs the SAN Shared Storage Option
with this server as the secondary and the
<server name> as the primary.
/SHAREPT: Installs the Agent for Microsoft SharePoint
Portal Server.
/EXCH: Installs the Agent for Microsoft Exchange
Server.
/LOTUS: Installs the Agent for Lotus Domino.
/ORACLE: Installs the Agent for Oracle Server.
/SQL: Installs the Agent for Microsoft SQL
Server.
/NTA: Installs the Remote Agent for Windows
Servers.
/NWA: Installs the NetWare Agent.
/SVRFREE: Installs the ServerFree Option.
Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec 63
Installing Backup Exec
Command Line Switches for Silent Mode Installation of Backup Exec (continued)
Switch Additional Switches Description
/BEWSA: Installs the Backup Exec Web
Administration Console
/DLO: Installs the Backup Exec Desktop and
Laptop Option.
/ECM:<EIS server 1> <EIS Installs the ExecView Communication
server 2>... Module.
Type setup.exe /? to get the syntax.
For example: setup.exe
/ECM:myserver1 myserver2
myserver3 -s
If a server is not specified, ECM will not be
enabled.
See also:
“Installing Backup Exec Using the Installation Program” on page 50
“Uninstalling Backup Exec from the Command Line” on page 66
Installing the Remote Administrator from the Command Line
You can also use Silent Mode Installation to install the Remote Administrator. Options for
the Remote Administrator are specified with the use of additional command switches.
▼ To install the Remote Administrator from the command line:
1. Open a Windows command prompt.
2. Change to the drive containing the Backup Exec CD.
3. Change directories to \WINNT\INSTALL\BE
4. Type setup /RA: and the appropriate switches. For example:
setup /RA: -s
64 Administrator’s Guide
Installing Backup Exec
The command line switches used for silent mode installation of the Remote
Administrator are described in the following table. Remember the following general
rules for using these switches:
- Substitute values appropriate for your environment for values in italics; for
Installation
example, substitute your password for password.
- Enclose the value in quotation marks if it contains spaces, such as “Program
Files\VERITAS\Backup Exec\NT”.
Command Line Switches for Remote Administrator Silent Mode Installation
Switch Additional Switches Description
/RA: Installs Remote Administrator using the
options specified with the additional
switches.
/DEST:"path" Specifies the path where Remote
Administrator will be installed. Otherwise,
the default path Program
Files\VERITAS\Backup Exec\NT is
used.
/DOCS: Installs online documentation.
/NOINSTALL: Allows you to select all install options
without actually installing the Backup
Exec software. This option can be used
with the /CPF: or /XML: switches.
/CPF:"file name" Creates a file containing all of the
installation parameters provided. This file
is encrypted.
/XML:"file name" Creates an XML file containing all of the
installation parameters provided.
Note The XML file is not encrypted, which
exposes parameters such as the
password.
Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec 65
Installing Backup Exec
Uninstalling Backup Exec from the Command Line
If Backup Exec is already installed, you can use the setup.exe program to uninstall Backup
Exec program files and Backup Exec data.
▼ To uninstall Backup Exec using the command line:
1. Open a Windows command prompt.
2. Change to the drive containing the Backup Exec CD.
3. Change directories to \WINNT\INSTALL\BE.
4. To remove the Backup Exec program files but keep all of the Backup Exec data, type:
SETUP /UNINSTALL:
To remove the Backup Exec program files and the Backup Exec data, type:
SETUP /REMOVEALL:
Creating and Using Installation Parameter Files
If you use the command line switches without the -S switch, the Backup Exec installation
program launches with the command line parameters as defaults for the installation
options. For example, suppose you type:
SETUP /TS: /USER:user /DOM:domain /PASS:password /SNO:serial
number
The Backup Exec installation program is launched. The screens that allow you to enter the
logon credentials and the serial number will appear with the information you provided on
the command line. Unless you are installing a Not For Resale (NFR) or Open Options
Suite edition, you do not have to enter commands for installing options such as Agent for
Microsoft SQL Server or Agent for Microsoft Exchange Server.
You can also use the /CPF: and /XML: commands to create a parameter file that contains
all of the command line options you provided. This parameter file can then be used to
provide the options for installing either Backup Exec or the Remote Administrator.
▼ To create a parameter file for Backup Exec:
1. Open a Windows command prompt.
2. Change to the drive containing the Backup Exec CD.
3. Change directories to \WINNT\INSTALL\BE.
66 Administrator’s Guide
Installing Backup Exec
4. Type setup /TS: and the appropriate switches, including /CPF: and the full path
name of the parameter file. For example, type:
setup /TS: /USER:user /DOM:domain /PASS:password /SNO:serial
number /CPF:"A:\file name" -S
Installation
Backup Exec will be installed on your server and a parameter file containing the user
name, domain, password, and serial number will be saved to a floppy diskette. You
can use this parameter file to install to another computer.
▼ To use this parameter file:
1. Open a Windows command prompt.
2. Change to the drive containing the Backup Exec CD.
3. Change directories to \WINNT\INSTALL\BE.
4. Type:
SETUP /PARAMS:"A:\file name" -S
5. If you want to overwrite a parameter, specify the new parameter. For example, to
change the password, type:
SETUP /PARAMS:"A:\file name" /PASS:new password -S
Note To create an XML file containing all parameters, use the /XML: switch. The XML
file is not encrypted, which exposes parameters such as the password.
See also:
“Installing Backup Exec from the Command Line (Silent Mode)” on page 60
“Command Line Switches for Backup Exec Silent Mode Installation” on page 61
Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec 67
Registering Backup Exec Online
Registering Backup Exec Online
Launch the VERITAS Backup Exec Online Registration Wizard from either the install
program or from the Help menu.
▼ To register Backup Exec online from the Administration Console:
1. On the Help menu, click Register VERITAS Backup Exec.
2. Follow the wizard prompts.
The Online Registration Wizard guides you through submitting a registration form to
VERITAS Software Corporation and provides a survey designed to aid VERITAS in
understanding how you use the product and in better understanding your needs.
Note If your LAN uses a proxy server to connect to the Internet, the online registration
may fail with the error "Logon request was denied". To correct this error, change the
LAN settings to automatically detect the proxy settings. Refer to your web browser
documentation for details on how to change the LAN settings.
Repairing Backup Exec
If you have missing or corrupted Backup Exec files or registry keys on the local media
server, run the Backup Exec installation program and select the Repair option. The
program stops all Backup Exec services, reinstalls corrupted files and registry keys,
reinstalls tape devices (stand-alone drives and libraries), and restarts the services. The
database is not reinstalled.
Any changes made to Backup Exec program files and registry keys will be reset to the
original settings.
▼ To run the Repair option:
1. Close the Backup Exec application.
2. Click Start, point to Settings, click Control Panel, and then double-click
Add/Remove Programs.
68 Administrator’s Guide
Repairing Backup Exec
3. Do one of the following:
- For Windows NT, on the Install/Uninstall tab on the Add/Remove Programs
Properties dialog box, select VERITAS Backup Exec, and then click
Add/Remove.
Installation
- For Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003, at the Add/Remove
Programs dialog box, select VERITAS Backup Exec for Windows Servers, and
then click Change.
4. Click Next.
5. Select Local Install and Repair, and then click Next.
Note Make sure the option Remote Install is not selected.
6. Select Install.
7. Click Finish.
Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec 69
Starting and Stopping Backup Exec Services
Starting and Stopping Backup Exec Services
▼ To stop or start Backup Exec services:
1. On the Tools menu, click Backup Exec Services.
2. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Backup Exec Services Manager options
Item Description
Server Type the name of a server you want to add to the list, and then click
Add. To import a list of servers, click Import List and select the file
containing the server list.
Start all services Click this to start all Backup Exec services for the selected server.
Stop all services Click this to stop all Backup Exec services for the selected server.
Services credentials Click this to change service account information or to change startup
options.
Refresh Click this to refresh this dialog box.
Remove Server(s) Click this to remove a selected server or servers from the server list.
70 Administrator’s Guide
Uninstalling Backup Exec
Uninstalling Backup Exec
Use Microsoft’s Add/Remove Programs option to remove Backup Exec from a computer.
For additional information on Add/Remove Programs, refer to your Microsoft
Installation
documentation.
Note When using the Shared Storage Option, you must uninstall Backup Exec from the
secondary servers before uninstalling from the primary server.
▼ To uninstall Backup Exec:
1. Close the Backup Exec application.
2. Click Start, point to Settings, click Control Panel, and then double-click
Add/Remove Programs.
3. Do one of the following:
- For Windows NT, on the Install/Uninstall tab on the Add/Remove Programs
Properties dialog box, select VERITAS Backup Exec, and then click
Add/Remove.
- For Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003, at the Add/Remove
Programs dialog box, select VERITAS Backup Exec for Windows Servers, and
then click Remove.
4. When prompted to confirm the deletion of Backup Exec from your computer, click
Yes.
5. When prompted to remove Backup Exec program files or all data, click Yes; click No
to retain user-created data such as catalogs and job information.
6. If the uninstall program fails, click the View Installation Log File button for
additional information.
7. When the uninstall is completed, click Finish.
8. If prompted, reboot the computer after uninstalling Backup Exec.
Uninstalling Backup Exec also removes VERITAS tape class drivers. If you reinstall
Backup Exec and want to use VERITAS tape class drivers, you must reinstall them.
See also:
“Uninstalling Backup Exec from the Command Line” on page 66
Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec 71
Installing the Backup Exec Remote Administrator
Installing the Backup Exec Remote Administrator
The Backup Exec Remote Administrator allows you to administrate the media server from
a remote Windows server or workstation.
To remotely administrate both Backup Exec 9. 0 and 9.1 media servers, install the Remote
Administrator for both versions on the same computer but in different directories.
To support the Remote Administrator, the media server requires that the Backup Exec
system services must be running.
Note The Remote Administrator and the media server to which it is connecting must be
the same version.
▼ To install the Backup Exec Remote Administrator:
1. From the installation CD browser, choose to install VERITAS Backup Exec.
The Welcome window appears.
2. Click Next.
The Software License Agreement appears.
3. Select I accept the terms of the license agreement, and then click Next.
4. Select Local Install and Install Administration Console only, and then click Next.
A dialog box appears requesting the destination directory for your Backup Exec
program files.
5. Click Next to install the Backup Exec program files in the default directory, or click
Change to select another directory for the installation, and then click Next.
6. Click Install.
The installation copies the Backup Exec program files to the computer.
7. Click Finish.
The Remote Administrator is installed. You can begin using Backup Exec. For more
information, see “Getting Started” on page 79.
72 Administrator’s Guide
Installing the Backup Exec Remote Administrator
▼ To run the Remote Administrator:
1. Click Start.
Installation
2. Point to Programs, and then click VERITAS Backup Exec for Windows Servers.
Note If you are connecting to a remote administration console from a media server, from
the Network menu, click Connect to Local Media Server to break the connection.
Click Connect to Media Server to connect to another media server.
3. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Connect to Server dialog options
Item Description
Server Select the name of the media server from the Server drop-down
list box or type the name of the server if you are running the
Remote Administrator from a media server. The media server
should appear in the list if the Backup Exec naming services are
running on both machines.
Note Each Windows 2000 server in the domain that has Backup
Exec installed will automatically appear in the list box.
Low Speed Connection Select this option to minimize the amount of information initially
(RAS) retrieved from the media server to which you are connecting.
When this option is selected, views such as the device and media
views will not automatically be expanded when the
administration console is loaded. This reduces the time required
to connect to the remote media server. Information for each view
is updated when the view is selected.
This option is useful if you are connecting to the media server
over a modem line.
Login Information
User name Type an administrator user name for the server to which you are
connecting.
Note On Windows Server 2003 and Windows XP, you cannot log
on to the remote administration console with a user name
that has a blank password, unless you set Windows to allow
blank passwords. The error message "Logon failure: user
account restriction" displays. For more information, see
your Windows documentation.
Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec 73
Installing the Backup Exec Remote Administrator
Connect to Server dialog options (continued)
Item Description
Password Type the password.
Domain From the drop-down list, select the domain to which the user
belongs, or type the appropriate domain name if it does not
appear in the list.
Services Click this to access the Backup Exec Services Manager to stop and
start services or to set the logon credentials used to run the
services.
The status of the local services appear at the bottom of this dialog box. If you try to
connect to a server and the connection fails, this dialog box displays the services
status for the server you attempted to connect to.
4. Click OK.
The administration console will now connect to the services running on the media
server. You should now be able to operate the media server as though you were
running the administration console from there.
You may be prompted for a user name and password to browse some network shares
even if you are logged into the Remote Administrator computer under an account that is
valid for those shares. Provide a domain-qualified user name and password when
prompted (e.g., domain1\howard). This also applies to workgroup accounts (e.g.,
machinename\george).
74 Administrator’s Guide
Using VERITAS Update
Using VERITAS Update
VERITAS Update, which allows users of Backup Exec to be informed of updates,
upgrades, and new versions of Backup Exec, automatically installs with Backup Exec. If
Installation
you enable the automated option, you can configure VERITAS Update to poll the main
VERITAS web server for any available updates. You can select to have VERITAS Update
poll on a daily, weekly, or monthly interval, and can configure when the polling will start.
If updates are available, VERITAS Update alerts you of the update so you can download
and install any selected updates.
VERITAS Update cannot be used if the security setting for Internet Explorer is set to high.
▼ To set Internet Explorer security:
1. On the Internet Explorer Tools menu, click Internet Options, and then click the
Security tab.
2. Click the Internet icon, and then click Custom Level.
3. Set the security to medium or lower.
4. Verify that the following settings are set to Enable or Prompt
- Download signed ActiveX Controls
- Run ActiveX Controls and plug-ins Script
- ActiveX Controls marked safe for scripting
- Active scripting
▼ To configure VERITAS Update:
1. On the Tools menu, click VERITAS Update.
2. On the VERITAS Update Welcome screen, click Configure.
3. Click Notify me when new updates are available.
Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec 75
Upgrading from Previous Versions of Backup Exec
4. Select the date and time for Backup Exec to start polling for updates.
5. Select the Frequency for polling to occur. Options are:
- Daily. If you selected Daily as the polling Frequency, Backup Exec polls every
day at the time you selected.
- Weekly. If you selected Weekly as the polling Frequency, Backup Exec polls every
week on the same day of the week and at the same time you selected.
- Monthly. If you selected Monthly as the polling Frequency, Backup Exec polls
every month on the same date and at the same time you selected.
6. Enter Local Task Credentials.
7. Click Apply.
Upgrading from Previous Versions of Backup Exec
This current version of Backup Exec for Windows Servers replaces any previous versions;
no separate migration or upgrade utility is necessary. Most settings and all data from
previous versions of Backup Exec (for example, when the TSM option adds registry
settings) are kept. At the end of the installation, the upgrade process is summarized. Only
Backup Exec version 8.0 and later can be migrated to this release.
When upgrading, only the Backup Exec for Windows Servers options for which you have
provided serial numbers are upgraded. Components that are already selected in the
Backup Exec Install Options dialog box in the install program must remain selected so
that all licensed components are upgraded. It is recommended that you add all previous
version serial numbers before installing the new version of Backup Exec so that these
options are automatically upgraded.
Note Evaluation versions of Backup Exec for Windows Servers will replace any current
installation. You cannot have separate installations of different versions on the same
server.
76 Administrator’s Guide
Upgrading Backup Exec Options on Remote Computers
Upgrading Backup Exec Options on Remote Computers
In order to upgrade options installed on remote computers, you must reinstall them. The
following options are push-installed, and will not be upgraded until they are reinstalled:
Installation
◆ Backup Exec Remote Agent for Windows Servers. For more information, see
“Installing the Remote Agent to Remote Windows Servers” on page 845.
◆ Backup Exec NetWare Agent. For more information, see “Installing the Remote Agent
for NetWare Servers” on page 1355 and “Installing Backup Exec Remote Agents and
Options on Remote Servers” on page 58.
◆ Backup Exec Agent for Lotus Domino. For more information, see “Installing the Lotus
Domino Agent on the Media Server” on page 1311.
◆ Backup Exec Advanced Open File Option. For more information, see “Installing the
Advanced Open File Option” on page 981.
To reinstall these options, repeat the installation steps for each option.
Chapter 2, Installing Backup Exec 77
Upgrading Backup Exec Options on Remote Computers
78 Administrator’s Guide
Getting Started 3
In Getting Started, you’ll find:
Getting Started
◆ A checklist that will help you prepare for the First Time Startup Wizard.
◆ Details on the Backup Exec Assistant, Administration Console, and the Information
Desk.
◆ Details of default options set when Backup Exec is installed.
◆ Layouts and descriptions of Backup Exec menus.
Before Starting Backup Exec
For best results before starting Backup Exec, do the following:
❏ Make sure your storage devices are connected and configured properly.
❏ Decide if your backup will be to a tape device or a disk device. You will be able to
configure both during the First Time Startup Wizard.
- If you’re backing up to a tape device, verify that the device is supported. You can
install drivers for the devices during the First Time Startup Wizard.
- If you’re backing up to a disk device using the Backup-to-Disk feature, decide
where you can create a backup folder. You should create it on a disk that won’t be
included in the backup jobs and that has enough free space to contain the backup
job. For more information, see “Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files” on
page 149.
❏ Understand how Backup Exec provides overwrite protection for your media. For
more information, see “Media Overwrite Protection” on page 191.
❏ Understand the default media set and its infinite overwrite protection period. For
more information, see “Media Overwrite Protection Levels” on page 196.
79
Starting Backup Exec
❏ Learn about creating new media sets with weekly, monthly, or quarterly retention
periods. For more information, see “Default Media Set” on page 195.
❏ Decide what Windows credential you want your Backup Exec logon account to use
when browsing and making backup selections. You can use an existing account, or
create a new one. You’ll be prompted for a default Backup Exec logon account during
the First Time Startup Wizard. For more information, see “Configuring Logon
Accounts” on page 363.
Starting Backup Exec
❖ To start the Backup Exec Administration Console, click Start, point to Programs, and
then click VERITAS Backup Exec for Windows Servers.
If you selected the option to add an icon to your desktop when you installed Backup
Exec, you can also double-click the icon to start Backup Exec.
See also:
“Using the Administration Console” on page 82
“Using Backup Exec Dialog Boxes” on page 85
First Time Startup Wizard
The first time you run Backup Exec, the First Time Startup Wizard appears. The First Time
Startup Wizard is a collection of wizards that help you set up the important features of
Backup Exec, including media sets, overwrite protection settings, devices, and logon
accounts. You must complete the applicable sections of this wizard as it guides you in
preparing Backup Exec for operations. To begin the wizard, click Next on the Welcome
page. The following wizards are part of the First Time Startup Wizard:
◆ Media Management with Media Sets. To learn more about managing media through
media sets, read “Media Overwrite Protection” on page 191.
◆ Preferred Overwrite Media Type. Review the circumstances and order in which Backup
Exec searches for overwritable media in “Media Overwrite Options” on page 198.
◆ Overwrite Protection Level. The media overwrite protection levels are global settings
that designate groups of media as overwritable or write-protected. For more
information, see “Media Overwrite Protection Levels” on page 196.
80 Administrator’s Guide
First Time Startup Wizard
◆ Detected Hardware. The Device Configuration wizard allows you to verify that all of
the storage devices attached to your system appear, and to verify that robotic libraries
and storage devices are properly configured.
If you do not see one or more of your attached storage devices in the Backup Devices
window, click the Configure Devices button. This will guide you through installing
the appropriate drivers for the storage hardware connected to your system.
- Detected Backup-to-Disk Folders. Click the Add Backup-to-Disk Folder button to
set up folders on your hard drive to target for backup jobs. For more information,
see “Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files” on page 149.
The backup folders you add here will be included in the All Drives drive pool,
Getting Started
which is Backup Exec’s default target for backup jobs. Backups submitted to the
All Drives drive pool may be processed on an attached media device or to one of
the backup folders on your hard disk.
- Drive Configuration. Verify that Backup Exec has configured all of your drives
correctly. If all of your drives do not display on the list, follow the instructions in
the wizard to install the VERITAS device drivers.
◆ Configure IDR Options. If you installed the Intelligent Disaster Recovery Option, you’ll
be prompted to configure IDR. For details, read “Getting Started with IDR” on
page 885.
◆ Logon Accounts. Use the Logon Account Wizard to set up Backup Exec logon accounts
to access resources such as servers, shares, and databases. For details, read about
logon accounts in “Configuring Logon Accounts” on page 363.
After you use the First Time Startup Wizard, you can access some of the wizards that
make up the First Time Wizard individually. To access the wizards individually, from the
Tools menu, select Wizards, and then select the wizard you want to use.
Chapter 3, Getting Started 81
Using the Administration Console
Using the Administration Console
Backup Exec’s Administration Console has been updated with this release to incorporate
new features and to make it easier for you to take advantage of Backup Exec’s features
and capabilities.
Note If you are using Backup Exec Web Administrative Console (BEWAC), the
Administration Console displays differently. For more information, see “Navigating
in BEWAC” on page 806.
Administration Console
Menu bar
Navigation bar
Columns
Task pane
Results pane
Preview pane
Selection pane
Status bar
The main Administration Console screen includes the following components:
◆ Menu bar. Backup Exec’s menu bar appears across the top of your screen. To display a
menu, click the menu name. Backup Exec operations can be launched by clicking
options from a menu. Some options may be unavailable until an item is selected from
the console screen. For example, Rename cannot be selected from the Edit menu
unless you have first selected an item to be renamed from either the Devices or Media
views.
82 Administrator’s Guide
Using the Administration Console
◆ Navigation bar. The navigation bar appears under the menu bar and allows you to
quickly create a backup or restore job or to navigate to Backup Exec’s seven views.
Click Backup or Restore to create a job. Change views by clicking the name of the
view you want. The seven views that can be accessed through the navigation bar
include:
- Overview. Use this view to access the Information Desk, view a summary of the
system you are logged on to, or launch and configure the connection settings for
ExecView.
- Job Setup. Use this view to perform tasks for new backup, restore, and media
rotation jobs, as well as to launch some utility jobs.
Getting Started
- Job Monitor. Use this view to monitor jobs and job history. Through this view, you
can also access the Outlook-like job calendar.
Note If you are using BEWAC, the Outlook-like calendar is not available.
- Alerts. Use this to view and respond to alerts, view alert history, apply alert filters,
and set up notification recipients to receive e-mail or pager communications when
alerts occur.
Note If you are using BEWAC, the Alerts view is not available. You can access alerts
through the Status area. For more information, see “Viewing, Clearing, and
Responding to Alerts” on page 808.
- Reports. Use this to view, print, save, and schedule reports about your media
server, its operations, and its device and media usage.
- Devices. Use this view to create drive pools, cascaded drive pools, and
backup-to-disk folders, and to perform device operations and access device
properties pages.
- Media. Use this view to manage your media, create media sets, and create media
locations.
◆ Task pane. The task pane displays on the left side of the Administration Console by
default, but can be hidden by selecting View, and then selecting Task Pane. Through
the task pane, you can initiate actions such as creating a new backup job or
responding to an alert. The contents of the task pane are dynamic, changing according
to the view selected from the navigation bar. Some options may be unavailable until
an item is selected from the console screen or a prerequisite task is performed. For
example, you cannot select Rename from the Devices task pane unless you have first
selected an item that can be renamed, such as a user-created drive pool.
◆ Selection pane. The Selection pane is where you select items to work with. For example,
it is where you select files to back up or restore.
Chapter 3, Getting Started 83
Using the Administration Console
◆ Results pane. The Results pane is the large pane on the right side of the screen that
usually contains a list or tree view of items that correspond to items that are selected
in the Selection pane. For example, if you select a Backup-to-Disk folder in the
Selection pane, the Backup-to-Disk files that are contained in the folder display in the
Results pane. This pane may be divided to display a preview pane.
◆ Preview pane. The preview pane displays on the bottom right of the Administration
Console. It displays information about the item selected in the list or tree view. This
pane can be hidden by selecting View, and then selecting Preview Pane.
Note If you are using BEWAC, the Preview pane is not available.
◆ Status bar. The status bar appears on the bottom of the Administration Console and
provides information about the media server, jobs running or scheduled to run on the
server, alerts, and services running.
◆ Columns. You can change the location of columns by dragging and dropping them. In
addition, you can change the order of the entries in a column by clicking the column
heading. For example, names of reports display in alphabetical order by default. To
display report names in reverse alphabetical order, click the Name column heading on
the Reports view.
84 Administrator’s Guide
Using the Administration Console
Using Backup Exec Dialog Boxes
When an option is selected from a menu, a shortcut menu, or the task pane, a dialog box
usually displays.
Dialog box
Nodes
Getting Started
Subnodes
Properties
pane
Most of Backup Exec’s dialog boxes contain a Properties pane on the left side. Options
that correspond to the selected subnode display on the right side of the dialog box.
Using the Overview View
The Overview view includes the Information Desk and the System Summary. From the
Overview view you also can configure ExecView connection settings. When Backup Exec
is started for the first time, the Administration Console’s Information Desk appears.
The Information Desk has links to the list of new features in this release, the technical
support web site, the supported device list, device configuration information, default
options for Backup Exec, and tasks such as backing up data and monitoring jobs. Links are
also provided to the ReadMe, the online Administrator’s Guide, the wizards, and the
VERITAS company web site.
Chapter 3, Getting Started 85
Using the Administration Console
▼ To view the Information Desk:
❖ On the navigation bar, click Overview, and then under Views on the task pane, click
Information Desk.
Information Desk
The System Summary briefly details Backup Exec activity for the last 24, 48, or 72 hours,
such as the number of jobs that were run, the number of jobs that failed, the amount of
data backed up, and the number of media used.
You can also see the number and type of active alerts, the number of scratch media
available in the storage devices, a list of upcoming jobs, and the number of jobs that are
currently running.
86 Administrator’s Guide
Using the Administration Console
▼ To view the System Summary:
❖ On the navigation bar, click Overview, and then under Views on the task pane, click
System Summary.
System Summary
Getting Started
Chapter 3, Getting Started 87
Frequently Asked Questions
Using the Backup Exec Assistant
The Backup Exec Assistant provides easy access to commonly used features, such as
Backup Exec’s wizards, the job monitor, and job setup. If you want the Backup Exec
Assistant to display each time Backup Exec is started, on the Tools menu, select Backup
Exec Assistant, and then select the Always show me this at startup checkbox.
The Backup Exec Assistant is not available in BEWAC.
Backup Exec Assistant
Frequently Asked Questions
How do I run a backup job?
There are several ways to run a backup, depending on your backup needs and level of
experience with Backup Exec.
◆ If you are new to Backup Exec, you can use the Backup Wizard, which helps guide
you through the setup of a backup job.
◆ If you are an experienced Backup Exec user:
- On the navigation bar, click Backup to set up the options for a backup job.
- On the navigation bar, click Job Setup to create a template to use for multiple
backup jobs.
88 Administrator’s Guide
Frequently Asked Questions
◆ To quickly create a backup job to back up the media server, click the one-button
backup link on the Information Desk.
◆ Use Windows Explorer to create a backup job.
For details about the various ways to create a backup job, see “Creating a Backup Job” on
page 241.
Where can I find the wizards?
◆ On the Information Desk. On the navigation bar, click Overview, then under View on
the task pane, click Information Desk.
Getting Started
◆ On the Tools menu, click Backup Exec Assistant, or further down the Tools menu,
click Wizards.
Where can I find the Readme file?
◆ On the Information Desk. On the navigation bar, click Overview, then under View on
the task pane, click Information Desk. Under Documentation, click View ReadMe
file.
◆ In the directory where Backup Exec was installed.
◆ On the Help menu, click View ReadMe File.
Where can I find the online documentation for Backup Exec?
◆ On the Information Desk. On the navigation bar, click Overview, then under View on
the task pane, click Information Desk. Under Documentation, click View VERITAS
Backup Exec Administrator’s Guide.
◆ On the Help menu, click Topics to see the online help. Or on the Help menu, click
View VERITAS Backup Exec Administrator’s Guide to view an online version of the
System Administration Guide in the Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF).
How do I get in touch with Technical Support?
◆ From the Information Desk. On the navigation bar, click Overview, then under View
on the task pane, click Information Desk. Under Technical Support, click VERITAS
Backup Exec support.
Chapter 3, Getting Started 89
Backup Exec Defaults
Backup Exec Defaults
When you start Backup Exec for the first time, defaults are already set. You can adjust the
defaults to meet the needs of your environment. Default settings are available for various
types of jobs, such as backup, restore, and test run. You also can set defaults for catalogs,
media management, bar code rules, and database maintenance.
The defaults that will probably affect you the most are the backup job defaults. You will
probably want to change many of these defaults after devising a media rotation strategy
and creating additional media sets and drive pools. In the short term though, you can run
Backup Exec and backup and restore jobs safely by using only the defaults set during
installation.
See also:
“Setting Default Backup Options” on page 320
“Setting Restore Defaults” on page 457
“Setting Test Run Default Options” on page 318
“Setting Default Pre/Post Commands” on page 328
“Configuring Default Job Log Options” on page 400
“Specifying the Default Backup Network” on page 334
“Setting Advanced Open File Option as the Default Setting for All Backup Jobs” on
page 989
“Setting Default Backup and Restore Options for SQL 2000” on page 1035
“Setting Default Backup and Restore Options for SQL 7.0” on page 1079
“Setting Default Backup and Restore Options for Exchange 2000 and 2003” on
page 1127
“Setting Default Backup and Restore Options for Exchange 5.5” on page 1161
“Configuring Default Lotus Domino Options” on page 1314
“Default Settings for the Remote Agent for NetWare Servers” on page 1365
“Configuring Default Schedule Options” on page 379
“Changing Default Preferences” on page 91
“Setting Catalog Defaults” on page 415
“Setting Default Media Options” on page 209
“Bar Code Labeling in Mixed Media Libraries” on page 205
“Configuring Database Maintenance” on page 405
90 Administrator’s Guide
Backup Exec Defaults
Changing Default Preferences
You can set defaults for the way you prefer Backup Exec to display various screens,
indicators, and alerts.
▼ To set default preferences:
1. On the Tools menu, click Options.
2. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click Preferences.
Getting Started
3. Select the appropriate options as follows:.
Options - Set Application Defaults - Preferences
Item Description
Show splash screen at Select this option to display the splash screen when you start
startup Backup Exec. If this option is cleared, the Backup Exec
Administration Console is the first thing to display on startup.
Inventory all drives on Select this option to have Backup Exec inventory all of the
Backup Exec services media in the storage devices when Backup Exec’s services are
startup starting. Depending on the number of storage devices attached
to your system, this process may take a few minutes. If you are
using a robotic library, all of the robotic library’s slots are
inventoried.
Enable backup from Select this option to create and submit backup jobs from
Windows Explorer Windows Explorer. For more information, see “Using Backup
Exec’s Windows Explorer Interface” on page 293. If this option
is cleared, you will not be able to submit backups using the
Backup Exec Windows Explorer interface.
Display the job Select this option to have Backup Exec display a summary of
summary dialog before the backup job options you selected before submitting the job
creating a backup job to the job queue.
Chapter 3, Getting Started 91
Backup Exec Defaults
Options - Set Application Defaults - Preferences (continued)
Item Description
Display progress Select this option to display the percent completed number
indicators for backup while a backup job is processing. These indicators appear in
jobs (requires additional the Job Activity tab, and they allow you to monitor the
time to pre-scan progress of the job. Backups might take a little longer to
devices) complete when this option is selected because the target
resources must be scanned to determine the amount of data to
be backed up.
Note Due to the time required to scan the target resources,
selecting this option when backing up remote resources
is not recommended.
Alerts
Automatically display Select this option to have alerts automatically appear on the
new alerts desktop when they are sent. If you do not choose this option,
you are required to view and respond to alerts through the
Alerts view.
Play sound after Select this option to have Backup Exec send an audible tone
receiving alert when an alert is generated. Information about alerts can be
found in the Alerts view.
92 Administrator’s Guide
Backup Exec Defaults
Changing General Job Defaults
You can set the default priority, device, and media set to use for each job created.
▼ To change general job defaults:
1. On the Tools menu, click Options.
2. On the Properties pane, under Job Defaults, click General.
3. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Getting Started
Options-Set General Application Defaults
Item Description
Job priority Select the default priority that you want to assign to all jobs. The
choices are Highest, High, Medium, Low, and Lowest. You can
change this default for each job individually.
Device Select the device that you want to be used as the default device for
jobs. You can change this default for each job individually.
Media set Select the media set that you want to be used as the default media
set for jobs. You can change this default for each job individually.
Chapter 3, Getting Started 93
Backup Exec Defaults
94 Administrator’s Guide
Managing Devices 4
Device management in Backup Exec simplifies how you organize and allocate the storage
devices recognized by Backup Exec, including:
◆ Tape drives or robotic libraries physically attached to a media server.
◆ Virtual devices called Backup-to-Disk Folders created through Backup Exec’s
Backup-to-Disk feature.
◆ Shared devices used in a SAN environment.
◆ Removable storage devices shared by applications through the use of Microsoft’s
Removable Storage Feature.
Managing
Devices
For a list of supported devices, see http://support.veritas.com.
With Backup Exec, you can maximize your hardware investment by organizing your
drives in one or both of the following methods:
◆ Drive pools. Drives are grouped so that jobs assigned to the drive pool are run on the
first available drive. Setting up drive pools offers the following benefits:
- Automatic job rescheduling. If a drive fails while a job is running on it, that job is
rescheduled and placed on hold. Other scheduled jobs are rerouted to working
devices in the drive pool.
- Concurrent processing. Drives in the drive pool run different jobs at the same time,
allowing maximum hardware efficiency.
- Dynamic load balancing. Jobs are more evenly distributed between all of the drives
included in the drive pool when running simultaneous jobs.
◆ Cascaded drive pools. Drives of the same type are linked together so that large backup
jobs that exceed the capacity of the media in one drive automatically continue on the
media in the next drive that is defined in the pool. The cascaded drives appear
logically as one device.
Or, you can use the storage devices as they are configured by Backup Exec at installation,
without making any changes. The default drive pool, All Drives (Server Name) is the
default destination device when you create a backup job. By default, the All Drives drive
95
Viewing Devices
pool contains all locally-attached drives, or if you are using the SAN Shared Storage
Option, both locally-attached and shared storage devices appear in All Drives (Server
Name).
In addition to drive pools and cascaded drive pools, Backup Exec provides other device
management capabilities. You can:
◆ Identify and monitor the current status of all storage devices.
◆ Change physical tape devices without rebooting the Backup Exec server.
◆ Monitor device usage statistics and track hardware errors. Backup Exec keeps track of
the device’s age, hours of use, mounts, number of bytes processed (written and read),
errors, when the device was last cleaned, and so on.
◆ Manage the physical drives attached to the media server and perform operations on
these devices and the media contained in them.
Note Most of the benefits derived from Backup Exec’s device management functionality
are realized when using more than one storage device. However, users with only
one drive can still take full advantage of Backup Exec’s device monitoring to help
make sure their drives are working properly.
See also:
“VERITAS Backup Exec - SAN Shared Storage Option” on page 939
Viewing Devices
When Backup Exec is installed, all storage devices connected to the media server are
automatically recognized as either robotic libraries or stand-alone drives.
Note Support for a single robotic library drive is included with Backup Exec for Windows
Servers. Licenses for additional robotic library drives are available for purchase.
If you group one or more robotic library slots into partitions, the partition drive pools
appear in the Devices view under the Drive Pools icon. For information about
partitioning robotic library slots, see “Creating Robotic Library Partitions” on page 146.
Click Devices on the navigation bar to see how devices are organized logically in drive
pools, and how drives are arranged physically on servers. All devices that are displayed
under All Devices are available, including drive pools, stand-alone drives, robotic
libraries, backup-to-disk folders, and cascaded drive pools. If the Shared Storage Option is
installed, you can also view available secondary storage devices on the storage area
network.
96 Administrator’s Guide
Viewing Devices
Devices view
Managing
Devices
All logical groupings of the physical drives are displayed under Drive Pools and
Cascaded Drive Pools. Cascaded drive pools are displayed under servers because they
only consist of drives from that server; they effectively act as a single device under that
server.
The default drive pool All Drives (Server Name) contains the server’s locally attached
drives as well as any Backup-to-Disk Folders created. Backup-to-Disk Folders are
destination devices for backups that are directed to your hard disk. The data from these
backups is saved on disk as backup files. If you are using the SAN Shared Storage Option,
each server on the SAN will have an All Drives (Server Name) node that contains both
local and shared devices available to the server. At installation, all storage devices are
automatically assigned to All Drives (Server Name).
See also:
“Viewing Media Information” on page 98
“Viewing Drive Pool Properties” on page 111
“Viewing Properties of a Cascaded Drive Pool” on page 117
“Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics” on page 122
“About Devices in the Shared Storage Environment” on page 943
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 97
Viewing Devices
Viewing Media Information
If you select a drive or select Slots from the Devices view, information for the media
contained in the drive or slot appears in the right pane. This information also appears
when All Media is selected from the Media view.
Information appearing includes:
◆ Slot number. Number of the slot. This field only appears if Slots has been selected.
◆ Bar Code. Label obtained from a bar code reader. This field only appears if Slots has
been selected. Bar code information only appears if the robotic library has a bar code
reader and a bar code label is on the media.
◆ Media Label. Name of the media label. The name can be:
- Assigned automatically by Backup Exec.
- Assigned or changed by the administrator.
- A pre-assigned bar code label.
◆ Media Description. By default, displays the original media label if the media is
imported media. If the media description has been edited, the new description
appears. Otherwise, this field is blank.
◆ Allocated Date. Date and time that the media was allocated to a media set as a result of
an overwrite operation.
◆ Media Set. Name of the media set in which the media is assigned.
◆ Overwrite Protected Until. Date and time on which the media’s overwrite protection
ends. Until that date and time, the media cannot be overwritten.
◆ Appendable Until. Date and time until which the media can be appended.
◆ Available Capacity. The amount of expected raw capacity on the media that remains
unused. Some tape devices support the ability to read the amount of remaining
capacity of the media that is currently loaded in the device. If a tape device supports
reading of the remaining capacity amount, then Available capacity is derived from
the remaining capacity amount. Otherwise, Available capacity is calculated by
subtracting Bytes written from Total capacity. Because Free space is reported in terms
of unused raw capacity, review Bytes written and Compression ratio to better
estimate if there is enough free space to accommodate a specific job.
◆ Total Capacity. The amount of expected total raw capacity of the media. Some tape
devices support the ability to read the amount of Total capacity of the media that is
currently loaded in the device. If a tape device supports reading of the total capacity
amount, then Total capacity is derived from the total capacity amount. Otherwise,
Total capacity is estimated based on past usage of the media.
98 Administrator’s Guide
Configuring Devices
◆ Bytes Written. The amount of data that has been written into blocks on the media.
Bytes written may differ from Used capacity due to the effects of data compression
and media flaws. Data compression will tend to increase Bytes written when
compared to Used capacity. Media flaws will decrease Bytes written when compared
to Used capacity.
◆ Compression Ratio. The ratio of Bytes written to Used capacity. Compression ratio will
show the overall effect that data compression and media flaws are having on the
amount of data that is being stored on the media.
See also:
“VERITAS Backup Exec - Library Expansion Option” on page 1175
“About Devices in the Shared Storage Environment” on page 943
Configuring Devices
Backup Exec provides two wizards for configuring and adding storage devices to your
media server:
Managing
◆ The Device Configuration Wizard. This wizard, which appears when Backup Exec is first
Devices
started, allows you to verify that all of the storage devices attached to your system
appear, and to ensure that robotic libraries and storage devices are properly
configured. You can also use the Device Configuration Wizard to configure Backup
Folders on your hard disk. On the Tools menu, point to Wizards, and then select
Device Configuration Wizard to run this wizard at any time.
◆ The Hot-swappable Device Wizard. This wizard allows you to replace or add storage
devices without having to reboot the media server.
If you are using a robotic library, make sure the robotic library hardware is configured
properly.
See also:
“First Time Startup Wizard” on page 80
“Hot Swap for Storage Devices” on page 100
“Setting Up Robotic Library Hardware” on page 1175
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 99
Configuring Devices
Hot Swap for Storage Devices
You can replace or add a hot-swappable tape drive on a Backup Exec media server
without having to reboot the server, provided the media server is not a Windows NT 4.0
server. The Hot-swappable Device Wizard guides you through the process.
After you start the Hot-swappable Device Wizard and close the Backup Exec
Administration console, the Hot-Swappable Device Wizard waits until any jobs that were
processing are completed. The wizard pauses the Backup Exec media server and stops the
Backup Exec services. You can then add or replace any storage devices. The wizard detects
the new or replaced device, and adds information about the device to the Backup Exec
database. The wizard is then completed, and you can reopen the Backup Exec console.
The new storage device is displayed in the Devices view, and usage statistics for the
drives begin accumulating. You may want to add the new drive to a drive pool or
cascaded drive pool.
The replaced storage device is displayed in the Devices view with a status of Offline. To
remove the storage device from Backup Exec, you must disable it and then delete it from
the Devices view.
Note Only tape drives are supported for hot swapping and adding. The tape drives must
be hot-swap capable. See the owner’s manual for your tape drive for more details.
▼ To start the Hot-swappable Device Wizard:
1. On Tools menu, point to Wizards, and then click Hot-swappable Device Wizard.
2. Follow the on-screen prompts.
Pausing, Resuming, and Renaming Devices
You can pause and resume the media server and all of its storage devices, including
robotic library drives, stand-alone drives, and backup-to-disk folders. You can also
rename the media server’s storage devices as well as any attached robotic libraries.
▼ To pause or resume the media server:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Click the server icon.
100 Administrator’s Guide
Configuring Devices
3. Under Drive Tasks in the task pane, select Paused.
A check mark appears next to the Paused option if the media server is currently
paused.
If the media server was not already paused, it is now paused. If the media server was
already paused, it is now resumed.
▼ To pause or resume a robotic library or drive:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Click the robotic library drive or stand-alone drive.
3. Under Drive Tasks in the task pane, select Paused.
A check mark appears next to the Paused option if the drive is currently paused.
If the drive was not already paused, it is now paused. If the drive was already paused,
it is now resumed.
▼ To rename a robotic library or drive:
Managing
Devices
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Click the robotic library or drive that you want to rename.
3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Rename.
4. On the Rename dialog box, type the new name, and then click OK.
See also:
“Renaming a Backup Folder” on page 154
“Pausing and Resuming a Backup Folder” on page 157
“Renaming a Drive Pool” on page 110
“Renaming a Cascaded Drive Pool” on page 117
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 101
Using Drive Pools
Using Drive Pools
A drive pool is a grouping of drives for Backup Exec operations. Drives can belong to more
than one drive pool, unless a drive is in a cascaded drive pool. Drive pools can contain
different types of drives, including specific drives in multi-drive robotic libraries.
In a drive pool, Backup Exec selects the oldest recyclable media in all of the drives in the
drive pool to use first. If more than one media meeting the requirements is found, Backup
Exec then searches the drives in a drive pool according to drive priority and uses the
oldest recyclable media in the drive that has the highest priority.
When you submit a backup job to a drive pool, the job is automatically sent to the first
available storage device in that drive pool. As other jobs are created and started, they can
run concurrently on other storage devices in the drive pool. By dynamically allocating
drives as jobs are submitted, Backup Exec processes jobs quickly and efficiently.
Drive pools also provide automatic job rescheduling. For example, if a drive pool contains
four stand-alone devices and the first device fails because of a hardware error, the job that
was running on the failed device is resubmitted and placed on hold, and the other jobs are
automatically routed to the working devices in the drive pool.
You can assign priorities to drives in a drive pool so that a specific drive is used before
other drives in the drive pool. The priority assigned to a drive in one drive pool is
unrelated to that drive’s priority in any other drive pool. For example, if Drive 1 is placed
in both Drive Pool A and Drive Pool B, you can assign different priorities to it in each
drive pool. Drive 1 can have a high priority in Drive Pool A and a low priority in Drive
Pool B.
You can also send backup jobs to specific drives in a drive pool. However, if that drive is
busy, the job must wait until the drive becomes available. When a specific drive is
assigned, the job cannot be automatically routed to the next available drive.
All Drives (Server Name) is the default drive pool, created when Backup Exec is installed.
All devices recognized by Backup Exec at startup are automatically assigned to All Drives
(Server Name). You can create other drive pools to meet your particular requirements, and
assign and reassign storage devices to these pools. For example, you may want to separate
high-performance drives from lower performance drives in a separate drive pool in order
to send high-priority jobs to the fast drive pool for quicker completion.
See also:
“Using Cascaded Drive Pools” on page 112
102 Administrator’s Guide
Using Drive Pools
Creating Drive Pools
You can place any stand-alone drives, and any drives in single or multiple drive robotic
libraries, into a drive pool.
Drives that are in a cascaded drive pool are not available to be placed in another drive
pool unless they are deleted from the cascaded drive pool first.
▼ To create a drive pool:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Click Drive Pools.
3. Under Drive Pool Tasks in the task pane, select New drive pool.
New Drive Pool dialog box
Managing
Devices
4. Select the appropriate options as follows:
New Drive Pool fields
Item Description
Drive Pool Name Type the name of the new drive pool that you want to create.
Select the drives to be Select the drives you want to include in the new drive pool.
included in this Drive
Pool
5. Click OK.
See also:
“Using Cascaded Drive Pools” on page 112
“Creating a Cascaded Drive Pool” on page 113
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 103
Using Drive Pools
Adding Drives to a Drive Pool
You can add a drive to an existing drive pool, unless the drive is in a cascaded drive pool.
Drives that are in a cascaded drive pool will be automatically deleted from the cascaded
drive pool if they are placed in another drive pool.
▼ To add a drive to a drive pool:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Select the drive pool.
3. Under Drive Pool Tasks in the task pane, select Add device.
Add Drives to Drive Pool dialog box
4. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Add Drives to Drive Pool options
Item Description
Drive Pool Name Displays the name of the drive pool to which you want to add
drives.
Select the drives to be Select the drives you want to include in the drive pool.
included in this Drive
Pool
5. Click OK.
104 Administrator’s Guide
Using Drive Pools
Setting Priorities for Drives in a Drive Pool
You can set a priority that determines the order in which the drives in a drive pool are
used. The default priority is 10 so all drives have the same priority initially. The drive to
which you assign the lowest number is the first drive to be used in the drive pool; for
example, a drive with a priority of 1 is used before a drive with a priority of 5. You can set
a priority of 1 to 99.
Note Overwrite and append periods for media take precedence over drive priority.
The Priority option is only displayed when viewing drive properties under a drive pool
icon. Drives displayed under the Stand-alone Drives icon or Robotic Libraries icon do
not display a Priority option because the drive may belong to multiple drive pools and
have a different priority in each drive pool.
▼ To set drive priority in a drive pool:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Under Drive Pools, select the drive pool containing the drive for which you want to
Managing
Devices
set a priority.
3. Select the drive.
4. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Properties.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 105
Using Drive Pools
5. Click Configuration.
Configuration tab
6. In Priority, Type a number from 1 to 99, with 1 designating this drive as the first drive
to be used in the drive pool.
7. Click OK.
See also:
“Viewing Drive Configuration Properties” on page 125
106 Administrator’s Guide
Using Drive Pools
Deleting Drives from a Drive Pool
You can delete a drive from a drive pool. The drive will still be in the Backup Exec device
database and will still be available for use in other drive pools. It is not necessary to delete
drives from a drive pool before you delete that pool; the drives are automatically removed
when the pool is deleted.
▼ To delete a drive from a drive pool:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Under Drive Pools, select the drive pool from which you want to delete a drive.
3. Select the drive you want to remove from the drive pool.
Make sure you select a drive under Drive Pools and not under the server icon; if you
delete a drive under the server icon, the drive is deleted from the database, not just
from the drive pool.
4. Under Drive Pool Tasks in the task pane, select Remove device.
Managing
Devices
Delete Drive From Drive Pool dialog box
5. To remove the displayed drive from a drive pool, click Yes.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 107
Using Drive Pools
Deleting Drive Pools
It is not necessary to delete drives from a drive pool before you delete that pool; the drives
are automatically removed when the pool is deleted.
You cannot delete the All Drives drive pool, but you can delete all of the drives in it.
If there are scheduled jobs assigned to the deleted drive pool, you are prompted to
redirect them to another drive pool.
▼ To delete a drive pool:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Under Drive Pools, select the drive pool you want to delete.
3. Under General Tasks on the task pane, select Delete.
Delete Drive Pool dialog box
4. Click Yes or Yes to All to delete the drive pool or pools that are displayed.
5. If there are scheduled jobs assigned to the deleted drive pool, you are prompted to
redirect the jobs to another drive pool or stand-alone device.
See also:
“Deleting Drives from a Drive Pool” on page 107
“Retargeting Jobs from a Deleted Drive Pool or Media Set” on page 109
108 Administrator’s Guide
Using Drive Pools
Retargeting Jobs from a Deleted Drive Pool or Media Set
If a drive pool or media set is deleted, and there are scheduled jobs assigned to that drive
pool or media set, you are prompted to redirect the jobs to another drive pool or
stand-alone device, or to another media set.
▼ To redirect a scheduled job:
1. When prompted to redirect the jobs, click Yes.
Retarget Job dialog box
The job to be redirected is displayed in the Retarget Job dialog box. If there are
scheduled jobs assigned to the deleted drive pool or media set, you are prompted to
redirect the jobs to another drive pool or media set.
Managing
Devices
2. Click the <Down arrow> to see more drive pools, and then select the new drive pool,
standalone drive, or media set to which you want to redirect the scheduled jobs.
3. Click Yes or Yes to All to redirect the job or jobs that are displayed to the new drive
pool, drive, or media set.
Note If you choose not to retarget a job, the job will fail. To later target the job to another
device, you will need to manually edit the job.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 109
Using Drive Pools
Renaming a Drive Pool
The default All Drives drive pool cannot be renamed, but you can rename any
user-created drive pool using either the Rename option or the drive pool’s Properties
dialog box.
▼ To rename a drive pool:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Under Drive Pools, select the drive pool you want to rename.
3. Under General Tasks, select Rename.
4. On the Rename dialog box, type the new name to assign to this drive pool, and then
click OK.
The drive pool is listed with the new name.
See also:
“Viewing Drive Pool Properties” on page 111
110 Administrator’s Guide
Using Drive Pools
Viewing Drive Pool Properties
Use Properties to view properties for a drive pool, or to rename the drive pool.
▼ To view properties for a drive pool:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Under Drive Pools in the tree view, select the drive pool.
3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Properties.
Drive Pool Properties dialog box
Managing
Devices
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 111
Using Cascaded Drive Pools
The Drive Pool Properties dialog box provides the following information:
Drive Pool properties
Item Description
Name Displays the name of the drive pool. Rename the drive pool by
typing a new name in this field.
Creation date The date and time that this drive pool was created.
Full name Displays the drive pool name.
4. After viewing the drive pool properties, click OK.
Using Cascaded Drive Pools
You can cascade (link) multiple stand-alone drives together to create one logical drive. By
cascading the drives, backup jobs can automatically “roll” to the media in the next drive
when the media is filled. Although multiple drives are linked to form the cascaded drive
pool, only the name of the cascaded drive pool is listed as the destination device when a
backup job is created.
Drives in a cascaded drive pool are not available for concurrent operations. Only one
drive is used at a time. The next drive in the cascaded drive pool is used only when a
backup job fills the current media, or when the next job requires a different media (such as
an overwrite job).
Use cascaded drive pools to run unattended backup jobs, or to make sure a large backup
job will complete without operator intervention. You may also want to use cascaded drive
pools if you want data from a job or group of jobs to reside on the same tape family.
See also:
“Using Drive Pools” on page 102
112 Administrator’s Guide
Using Cascaded Drive Pools
Requirements for Using Cascaded Drive Pools
In order to cascade drives, the drives must be the same drive type, such as DLT 32K. To
determine the drive type, look in the drive’s property page. For more information, see
“Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics” on page 122.
Caution If a drive that does not support hardware compression is added to a cascaded
drive pool, the hardware compression option on all other drives in that pool is
automatically disabled. You can enable the hardware compression option on the
other drives again, but the pool will then have mixed compression, which could
make restore operations difficult.
Creating a Cascaded Drive Pool
When you select drives for a cascaded drive pool, only drives of the same drive type are
displayed for selection.
Note Overwrite and append periods for media take precedence over drive priority.
Managing
Devices
▼ To create a cascaded drive pool:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Select Cascaded Drive Pools.
3. Under Drive Pool Tasks in the task pane, select New drive pool.
New Cascaded Drive Pool dialog box
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 113
Using Cascaded Drive Pools
4. Select the appropriate options as follows:
New Cascaded Drive Pool options
Item Description
Drive Pool Name Type the name of the new cascaded drive pool that you want to
create.
Drive Type Select the type of drive you want to use in this cascaded drive pool.
After you select a drive type, only drives of that same type are
displayed in the selection list.
Select the drives to be Add the drives you want to include in the new cascaded drive pool
included in the by selecting the drive.
Cascaded Drive Pool. Any drives moved to a cascaded drive pool will be removed from
any drive pools they are currently in.
5. Click OK.
The new cascaded drive pool is displayed in the Cascaded Drive Pool list in the
Devices view.
See also:
“Deleting Drives from a Cascaded Drive Pool” on page 115
“Deleting a Cascaded Drive Pool” on page 116
Adding Drives to a Cascaded Drive Pool
You can add a drive to an existing cascaded drive pool provided the drive is of the same
type as the drives already in the pool and provided that the drive is not in another
cascaded drive pool. Drives that are part of a normal drive pool will be removed from the
other pool when added to a cascaded drive pool. Also, drives added to a cascaded drive
pool will be removed from other drive pools.
▼ To add a drive to a cascaded drive pool:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Select the cascaded drive pool to which you want to add a drive.
3. Under Drive Pool Tasks in the task pane, select Add device.
114 Administrator’s Guide
Using Cascaded Drive Pools
4. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Add Drives to Cascaded Drive Pool fields
Item Description
Drive Pool Name Displays the name of the drive pool to which you want to add
drives.
Select the drives to be Select the drives you want to include in the drive pool.
included in this Drive
Pool
5. Click OK.
Deleting Drives from a Cascaded Drive Pool
Use Delete to remove a drive from a cascaded drive pool, or drag the drive you want to
delete from the cascaded drive pool to the Stand-alone Drives icon. If the move is allowed,
Managing
the mouse arrow icon displays a plus sign (+) in a box. The drive will still be in the Backup
Devices
Exec device database and will still be available for use in other drive pools. It is not
necessary to delete drives from a cascaded drive pool before you delete that pool; the
drives are automatically removed when the cascaded drive pool is deleted.
The following instructions describe the menu-driven method.
▼ To delete a drive from a cascaded drive pool:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Select the cascaded drive pool from which you want to delete a drive.
3. Select the drive you want to delete from the cascaded drive pool.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 115
Using Cascaded Drive Pools
4. Under Drive Pool Tasks in the task pane, select Remove device.
Delete Drive From Cascaded Drive Pool dialog box
The name of the drive you want to remove from the cascaded drive pool is displayed.
5. Click Yes to remove this drive from the cascaded drive pool.
See also:
“Deleting a Cascaded Drive Pool” on page 116
“Erasing Media” on page 174
Deleting a Cascaded Drive Pool
It is not necessary to delete drives from a cascaded drive pool before you delete that pool;
the drives are automatically removed from the pool when the pool is deleted.
If there are scheduled jobs assigned to the deleted cascaded drive pool, you are prompted
to redirect them to another device or drive pool.
▼ To delete a cascaded drive pool:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Under Cascaded Drive Pools, select the drive pool you want to delete.
3. Click Delete on the shortcut menu.
The name of the cascaded drive pool you selected to delete appears.
4. Click Yes.
5. If there are scheduled jobs assigned to the deleted drive pool, you are prompted to
redirect the jobs to another drive pool or stand-alone device.
See also:
“Retargeting Jobs from a Deleted Drive Pool or Media Set” on page 109
116 Administrator’s Guide
Using Cascaded Drive Pools
Renaming a Cascaded Drive Pool
You can rename a cascaded drive pool using either the Rename option or by typing a new
name on the cascaded drive pool’s Properties dialog box.
▼ To rename a cascaded drive pool:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Under Cascaded Drive Pools, select the drive pool you want to rename.
3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Rename.
4. On the Rename dialog box, type the new name for the cascaded drive pool, and click
OK.
Viewing Properties of a Cascaded Drive Pool
Use Properties to view properties for a cascaded drive pool, or to rename the cascaded
Managing
drive pool.
Devices
▼ To view properties of a cascaded drive pool:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Under Cascaded Drive Pools, select the drive pool for which you want to view
properties.
3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Properties.
The Cascaded Drive Pool Properties dialog box provides the following information:
Cascaded Drive Pool properties
Item Description
Name Displays the name of the drive pool. Rename the drive pool by
typing a new name in this field.
Creation Date Displays the date and time that this drive pool was created.
Full Name Displays the drive pool name.
4. After viewing the properties of the cascaded drive pool, click OK.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 117
Viewing Server Properties and Running Server Diagnostics
Viewing Server Properties and Running Server Diagnostics
Use Properties to view information about your media server, including the version of
Backup Exec installed, and system information. From the properties’ System tab, you can
also run BE Diagnostics, a Backup Exec diagnostic utility. This utility creates a file
(bediag_(machine_name).txt) that includes useful configuration information for the server.
For more information on using BE Diagnostics, see “Using Backup Exec’s Diagnostic
Utility BEDIAG” on page 572. Technical services can use the results of BE Diagnostics to
troubleshoot problems.
Note You can also run BE Diagnostics for a remote server (see “Running Diagnostics on
Remote Server” on page 575).
▼ To view server properties:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Select the server from the tree view.
3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Properties.
Server tab
118 Administrator’s Guide
Viewing Server Properties and Running Server Diagnostics
The Server Properties Server tab provides the following information:
Server tab
Item Description
Name The name of the media server.
Status The status of the media server. An active media server’s status
displays “Running”.
Version Backup Exec version and revision information.
Description The type of server.
Serial # The serial number under which Backup Exec is installed. “Eval
Edition” is displayed if a serial number was not provided during
Backup Exec’s installation.
Server time
Managing
Devices
Start date and time The date and time Backup Exec was initially installed and launched
on this media server.
Current date and time The current date and time.
Statistics
Number of devices The number of storage devices connected to this media server. In
systems with multi-drive robotic libraries attached, each drive in the
robotic library represents a separate device.
Number of active jobs The number of jobs currently in progress on this media server.
Total number of alerts The total number of alerts generated on this media server since the
since server startup Backup Exec services were last started.
Total number of jobs The total number of jobs executed on this media server since the
completed since Backup Exec services were last started.
server startup
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 119
Viewing Server Properties and Running Server Diagnostics
4. Click System to view additional information about the media server.
System tab
The Server Properties System tab provides the following information:
System tab for media server Properties dialog box
Item Description
Operating system
Type The type of operating system currently running on this media
server.
Version The version of the operating system.
Build The build number of the operating system.
Processor
Type The type of processor installed in this media server.
Level The processor level on this server.
Number of processors The number of processors on this server.
120 Administrator’s Guide
Viewing Server Properties and Running Server Diagnostics
System tab for media server Properties dialog box (continued)
Item Description
Memory
Physical The amount of hardware RAM installed in the media server.
Page size The size of a single Windows NT virtual memory page.
Virtual remaining The amount of virtual memory remaining on the system.
Page file The size of the Windows NT virtual memory paging file.
Run diagnostics Note If you call Technical Support with a problem, they may request
that you run Diagnostics and provide them with the results.
Technical Support can use the results of this utility to pinpoint
your problem and quickly solve it.
Click to run the Diagnostics utility to a file
(bediag(machine_name).txt) that includes useful configuration
information for the server such as:
Managing
Devices
Account groups, account privileges, and environment settings.
Backup Exec Software version and registry information, Backup
Exec Agent listing, Windows NT version information, SCSI
hardware configuration, SQL Server information, Driver services
information, and NT Services information.
File Server information, supported shared directories, and
Windows sockets information.
5. After viewing Properties for the media server, click OK.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 121
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics
Backup Exec provides details on each drive connected to a media server and the first
robotic library drive.
Note Support for a single robotic library drive for use with Backup Exec is provided
when you purchase Backup Exec. To enable support for additional robotic library
drives, you must purchase the Library Expansion Option.
Most of the details presented in the drive properties tabbed pages are for information
only.
▼ To view a drive’s properties:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Expand the server icon, click Stand-alone Drives, or if the drive is attached to a
robotic library, click Robotic Libraries.
3. Select the drive you want to view properties for.
4. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Properties.
See also:
“Viewing General Drive Properties” on page 123
“Viewing Drive Configuration Properties” on page 125
“Viewing Drive SCSI Information Properties” on page 131
“Viewing Drive Statistics Properties” on page 132
“Viewing Drive Cleaning Properties” on page 134
122 Administrator’s Guide
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics
Viewing General Drive Properties
The Drive Properties General tab provides information about the drive. Most of this
information is for viewing only; however, you can rename your drive from this tabbed
page by typing the new name in the Name field.
General drive properties
Managing
Devices
The General tab for drive properties provides the following information:
General drive properties
Item Description
Name The name of the drive. You can also rename the device by typing a
new name in this field.
Vendor The name of the vendor of the drive.
Product ID The product ID from the SCSI Inquiry string.
Firmware version The version of the firmware used in the device.
Drive type The media and memory specifications of the device.
Media type The type of media used in the drive.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 123
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics
General drive properties (continued)
Item Description
Date in service The date this device was first detected by this installation of Backup
Exec.
Full name Displays the drive name and server name.
Serial number The serial number of the drive.
See also:
“Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics” on page 122
“Viewing Backup Folder Properties” on page 158
124 Administrator’s Guide
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics
Viewing Drive Configuration Properties
The Drive Properties Configuration tab allows you to:
◆ Enable or disable a device.
◆ Enable or disable hardware compression (if compression is supported by the drive).
◆ Pause and resume the drive.
◆ Change the preferred block size, buffer size, buffer count, and high water count.
Caution Preferred Configuration settings are used to tune the performance of backup
and restore operations.
Changing Preferred Configuration settings is not generally recommended and
may have a negative effect on your backup and system performance. Any
changes should be thoroughly tested to make sure system performance does
not deteriorate before being put into general use.
Configuration drive properties
Managing
Devices
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 125
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics
The Configuration tab for drive properties provides the following information:
Drive configuration properties
Item Description
Enable device for Backup Select this check box in order for Backup Exec to use this device.
Exec Clear this check box to disable the device, and allow it to be available
for other applications. If the box is clear, the device is disabled, and
cannot be used by Backup Exec.
After changing the option, click OK.
Pause device Select this check box to pause the device, and then click OK. To
resume the device, clear the check box and click OK.
Device offline If the device is offline, this message is displayed. No operations are
allowed on the device until it is online again. When the device is
online, no message is displayed.
The device is displayed as offline if:
The device was turned off after Backup Exec was started.
The device was being used by another application (such as a
Windows backup utility) when Backup Exec was started.
The device is removed from the computer.
A tape drive failure occurred.
A tape is stuck in the drive.
The firmware of the drive was updated; Backup Exec will behave
as if the drive with its old name or identity no longer exists.
To put the device online, try the following:
Check to make sure the device has power and that cables are
properly attached. Turn the device on and reboot the server, or
stop and restart the Backup Exec services.
Stop the utility that is using the device, and then reboot the
server, or stop and restart the Backup Exec services.
To restart the Backup Exec services:
For Windows NT 4.0, go to Settings, select Control Panel, and
then select Services.
For Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, go
to Computer Management, select System Tools, select Services,
and then select Applications.
If the drive firmware has changed, delete the drive and restart
Backup Exec services. After the drive appears with its new
firmware identity, retarget all jobs that were using the old drive
name to the new drive name.
126 Administrator’s Guide
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics
Drive configuration properties (continued)
Item Description
Enable compression If this option is available, this device is capable of supporting
hardware compression.
Select this check box to enable hardware compression.
If a job is configured to use hardware compression, but is run on a
drive on which hardware compression is disabled (even though it is
supported), hardware compression is considered unavailable and is
not used.
If a drive that does not support hardware compression is added to a
cascaded drive pool, the hardware compression option on all other
drives in that pool is automatically disabled. You can enable the
hardware compression option on the other drives again, but the pool
will then have mixed compression, and could make restore
operations difficult.
Priority The Priority field is only available when the drive belongs to a drive
pool and is selected for viewing under the drive pool icon. Drive
properties displayed under the Robotic Libraries or Stand-alone
Managing
Devices
Drives icon do not display the Priority field. For more information,
see “Setting Priorities for Drives in a Drive Pool” on page 105.
Set a priority for a drive that determines the order in which the
drives in a drive pool are used. In the Priority box, type a number
from 1 to 99, with 1 designating this drive as the first drive to be used
in the drive pool, or click the arrows to select a value.
The default priority is 10 so all drives have the same priority initially.
The drive to which you assign the lowest number is the first drive to
be used in the drive pool; for example, a drive with a priority of 1 is
used before a drive with a priority of 5.
Note Overwrite and append periods for media take precedence over
drive priority.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 127
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics
Drive configuration properties (continued)
Item Description
Preferred configuration
Note Preferred Configuration settings are used to tune the performance of backup and restore
operations.
Changing Preferred Configuration settings is not generally recommended and may have a
negative effect on your backup and system performance. Any changes should be thoroughly
tested to make sure system performance does not deteriorate before being put into general
use.
Block size (per device) The default is the preferred size of the blocks of data written to new
media in this device.
You can change the block size by selecting another size from the
scroll list, and then clicking OK.
Some devices (for example, DLT drives) provide better performance
when larger block sizes are used. The preferred block size can range
from 512 bytes to 64 kilobytes.
Backup Exec does not ensure that the requested block size is in fact
supported by that drive. You should check the drive specifications to
make sure that the block size is supported. If the drive does not
support a block size, it will default to its standard block size.
If the drive does not support block size configuration, this option is
unavailable.
Buffer size (per device) The default is the preferred amount of data sent to the drive on each
read or write request. The buffer size must be an even multiple of the
block size.
You can change the buffer size by selecting another size from the
scroll list, and then clicking OK. Depending on the amount of
memory in your system, increasing this value may improve drive
performance. Each type of drive requires a different buffer size to
achieve maximum throughput.
Buffer count The default is the preferred number of buffers allocated for this
device.
You can change the buffer count by selecting another count from the
scroll list, and then clicking OK.
Depending on the amount of memory in your system, increasing this
value may improve drive performance. Each type of drive requires a
different number of buffers to achieve maximum throughput.
If you change the buffer count, you may need to adjust the high
water count accordingly.
128 Administrator’s Guide
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics
Drive configuration properties (continued)
Item Description
High water count The default is the preferred number of buffers to be filled before data
is first sent to the drive, and any time after that if the drive
underruns.
You can change the high water count by selecting another count
from the scroll list, and then clicking OK.
The high water count cannot exceed the buffer count. A value of 0
disables the use of high water logic; that is, each buffer is sent to the
drive as it is filled.
The default setting provides satisfactory performance in most
instances; in some configurations, throughput performance may be
increased when other values are specified in this field. If you increase
or decrease the buffer count, the high water count should be adjusted
accordingly. If a drive has a high water count default of 0, it should
be left at 0.
Default Settings Click this button to return all the Preferred Configuration settings to
their defaults, and then click OK.
Managing
Devices
Read single block mode Select this check box to have this device read only one block of data
at a time. If this check box is selected, the drive will read a single
block of data at a time, regardless of the size of the buffer block.
VERITAS recommends selecting this option if the drive is a shared
storage device.
Write single block mode Select this check box to have this device write only one block of data
at a time. Selecting this check box provides greater control over the
handling of data write errors.
VERITAS recommends selecting this option if the drive is a shared
storage device.
Read SCSI pass-through Select this check box to have this device read data without going
mode through a Microsoft tape device API. Selecting this check box allows
the data to pass directly through the device driver and allows more
detailed information in the event device errors occur.
VERITAS recommends selecting this option if the drive is a shared
storage device.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 129
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics
Drive configuration properties (continued)
Item Description
Write SCSI pass-through Select this check box to have this device write data without going
mode through the Microsoft tape device API. Selecting this check box
allows data to pass directly through the device driver and allows
more detailed information in the event device errors occur.
VERITAS recommends selecting this option if the drive is a shared
storage device.
See also:
“Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics” on page 122
130 Administrator’s Guide
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics
Viewing Drive SCSI Information Properties
Drive Properties SCSI Information tab
Managing
Devices
The Drive Properties SCSI Information tab provides the following information about the
Small Computer System Interface (SCSI):
Drive SCSI properties
Item Description
Inquiry The device information read from the device firmware.
Port The identifying number of the port on the server to which the device
is attached.
Bus The identifying number of the bus to which the device is attached.
Target ID The unique SCSI ID number (physical unit number).
LUN The Logical Unit Number of the device.
See also:
“Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics” on page 122
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 131
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics
Viewing Drive Statistics Properties
The Drive Properties Statistics tab provides the date the drive was last mounted, drive
totals such as the total number of bytes written and read, and drive errors. Error rates are
affected by media, head cleaning, and head wear.
The documentation included with your device should list the acceptable limits for hard
and soft errors; if not, check with the hardware manufacturer.
Drive Properties Statistics tab
The Statistics tab provides the following information:
Drive statistics properties
Item Description
Last mount date Last date that media was mounted by this device.
Drive totals
Total Bytes written Number of bytes that have been written by this device.
Total Bytes read Number of bytes that have been read by this device.
Total mounts Number of times media has been mounted by this device.
132 Administrator’s Guide
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics
Drive statistics properties (continued)
Item Description
Total seeks The total number of seek operations (performed when a specific
piece of information is being located) that have been performed by
this device.
Total Hours in use The total number of hours that this drive has been in use (performing
read, write, mount, and seek operations).
Drive errors
Seek errors The number of errors encountered while trying to locate data.
Soft read errors The number of recoverable read errors encountered. If you receive
soft errors, it may indicate the beginning of a problem. If you receive
excessive errors for your environment, check the device and perform
maintenance on it, and check the media for damage.
Hard read errors The number of unrecoverable read errors encountered. If you receive
Managing
hard errors, check the device and perform maintenance on it, and
Devices
check the media for damage.
Soft write errors The number of recoverable write errors encountered. If you receive
soft errors, it may indicate the beginning of a problem. If you receive
excessive errors for your environment, check the device and perform
maintenance on it, and check the media for damage.
Hard write errors The number of unrecoverable write errors encountered. If you
receive hard errors, check the device and perform maintenance on it,
and check the media for damage.
See also:
“Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics” on page 122
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 133
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics
Viewing Drive Cleaning Properties
The Drive Properties Cleaning tab provides statistics on totals and errors since the last
cleaning. The documentation included with your device should list the acceptable limits
for hard and soft errors; if not, check with the hardware manufacturer.
For robotic library drives, the statistics that appear on the Drive Properties Cleaning tab
are automatically updated when a cleaning job successfully completes. (Cleaning jobs can
only be created for a robotic library drive.) If you want to maintain accurate cleaning
statistics for your stand-alone drives, click Reset Cleaning Statistics after the drive has
been manually cleaned.
Drive Properties Cleaning tab
The Cleaning tab provides the following information:
Drive cleaning properties
Item Description
Last cleaning date The last time a cleaning operation was performed on the drive.
Hours since last cleaning The number of hours that the drive has been in use since the last
cleaning.
Reset Cleaning Statistics Click this to reset all cleaning statistics to zero (stand-alone drives
only).
134 Administrator’s Guide
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics
Drive cleaning properties (continued)
Item Description
Totals since last cleaning
Bytes written Number of bytes that have been written by this device since the last
cleaning.
Bytes read Number of bytes that have been read by this device since the last
cleaning.
Total mounts Number of times media has been mounted by this device since the
last cleaning.
Total seeks The total number of seek operations (performed when a specific
piece of information is being located) that have been performed by
this device since the last cleaning.
Hours in use The total number of hours that this drive has been in use (performing
read, write, mount, and seek operations) since the last cleaning.
Managing
Devices
Errors since last cleaning
Seek errors The number of errors encountered since the last cleaning while
trying to locate data.
Soft read errors The number of recoverable read errors encountered since the last
cleaning. If you receive soft errors, it may indicate the beginning of a
problem. If you receive excessive errors for your environment, check
the device and perform maintenance on it, and check the media for
damage.
Hard read errors The number of unrecoverable read errors encountered since the last
cleaning. If you receive hard errors, check the device and perform
maintenance on it, and check the media for damage.
Soft write errors The number of recoverable write errors encountered since the last
cleaning. If you receive soft errors, it may indicate the beginning of a
problem. If you receive excessive errors for your environment, check
the device and perform maintenance on it, and check the media for
damage.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 135
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics
Drive cleaning properties (continued)
Item Description
Hard write errors The number of unrecoverable write errors encountered since the last
cleaning. If you receive hard errors, check the device and perform
maintenance on it, and check the media for damage.
See also:
“Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics” on page 122
Viewing and Specifying a Drive’s Media Types
Through the Media Types tab of a drive’s Properties dialog box, you can view all known
media types that can be placed in the drive and specify whether these media types can be
used for Read or Write operations.
Drive Properties - Media Type tab
136 Administrator’s Guide
Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics
The Media Types tab provides the following information:
Media type options for a drive
Item Description
Media Type Type of media, such as 4mm, and any defined category of this media
type, such as CLN for cleaning tape. Media types that have numbers
appearing in brackets (for example, 4mm [6]) can be used to define
specific bar code rules.
Read Displays Yes if this media type can be read by the drive; otherwise,
displays No.
Write Displays Yes if this media type can be written to by the drive;
otherwise, displays No.
Backup Exec’s ADAMM database maintains a list of media types, such as 4MM, and then
further defines the subcategories or specifics of a media type. For example, a 4MM media
type can include 4MM DDS-1 with a length of 60m and the storage capacity of 1.3 GB.
Managing
Another 4MM tape might also be a 4MM DDS-1 but have a length of 90m and a storage
Devices
capacity of 2.0 GB.
By default, the Media Types tab for a drive lists all known media type categories and
allows all media types to be used for both read and write operations. If a number appears
in brackets behind the media type, that media entry is available for use when creating a
bar code rule. You can specify that the drive be limited to performing read and write
operations on specific media types. For example, if your drive’s documentation states that
the drive cannot perform write operations to a 4MM DDS-4 tape, you can select that
media type from this dialog box, clear the Write check box, and then click OK. This
information is then incorporated in the ADAMM database, allowing Backup Exec to
exclude this media type when searching for media to be used for an operation (such as a
backup job) requiring the writing of data to the media.
See also:
“Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics” on page 122
“Bar Code Labeling in Mixed Media Libraries” on page 205
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 137
Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec
Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec
Note Support for a single robotic library drive for use with Backup Exec is provided
when you purchase Backup Exec. To enable support for additional robotic library
drives, you must purchase the Library Expansion Option.
Backup Exec’s Advanced Device and Media Management (ADAMM) feature provides
powerful functionality for robotic libraries. With typical robotic library modules, you
divide slots in the robotic library into defined groups, and then target backups to those
groups. This arrangement works fine as long as there is enough media in the group to
process the jobs targeted there. Problems occur when the data exceeds the available media
in the group, because operations cannot continue until media is physically added. This
situation can take place even though slots in the robotic library assigned to other groups
contain usable media.
Backup Exec’s Device and Media Management feature solves the problems associated
with typical robotic library modules. Rather than targeting a backup job to a specific
group of slots with a finite number of media, Backup Exec accesses all of the media in the
robotic library and uses media that belongs to the job’s targeted media set. If the backup
job exceeds the capacity of one piece of media, Backup Exec searches all media contained
in the robotic library, finds a suitable media, and uses it for the job.
For example:
An operator has a robotic library with six slots. She puts in six blank tapes and targets
backup jobs to various media sets within the robotic library. Depending on whether
the backups are overwrite or append jobs, Backup Exec automatically allocates
available tapes in the robotic library. If a job exceeds the capacity of one tape and
another overwritable tape is available in the robotic library, the job will automatically
continue on that tape. When Backup Exec runs out of tapes, it prompts the operator to
add more Scratch media.
In a robotic library, Backup Exec selects the oldest recyclable media in the library to use
first. If more than one media meeting the requirements is found, Backup Exec then selects
the media in the lowest-numbered slot, that is, media in slot 2 would be chosen over
equivalent media in slot 4.
If a job requiring overwritable media is targeted to a robotic library and no overwritable
media is available, the job is skipped and the next job targeted to the robotic library is
queued. When overwritable media becomes available either by the addition of media to
the robotic library or the overwrite protection period expiring for a media currently in the
robotic library, the skipped job will run.
See also:
“VERITAS Backup Exec - Library Expansion Option” on page 1175
138 Administrator’s Guide
Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec
Configuring a Robotic Library
Before installing Backup Exec, make sure the SCSI addresses of the robotic library and the
storage device are configured properly.
If you have not already enabled robotic library support, rerun the installation program
and select Enable Robotic Library Support found in the list of install components. Enable
Robotic Library Support provides support for a single-drive robotic library or for the first
drive in a multi-drive robotic library. For support for each additional single-drive robotic
library, or for each additional drive in a multi-drive robotic library, you must purchase
and install a Library Expansion Option.
After enabling robotic library support, check your robotic library’s configuration in the
Device Configuration Wizard. This wizard appears automatically the first time Backup
Exec is started, or it can be launched from the Tools menu by selecting Wizards, and then
selecting Device Configuration Wizard.
Make sure that each device in the robotic library is properly associated with the robotic
library. If a robotic library storage device appears in the device list as a stand-alone device,
you can correct the association by clicking and dragging the drive over the robotic library
entry. If the robotic arm is not shown, run the installation program and select the Enable
Robotic Library Support option.
Managing
Devices
If your robotic library uses a zero-based slot configuration, be sure the Slot Base field on
the Configuration tab of the robot’s Properties dialog box displays 0.
After completing the configuration of your robotic library, you should perform an
Inventory operation to update Backup Exec’s media database.
During startup, Backup Exec expects the storage devices in the robotic library to be empty.
If there is media in the device, Backup Exec tries to return the media to its original
magazine slot. If, for any reason, it cannot return the media to the slot, an error message
appears requesting that the media be ejected from the storage device.
See also:
“Setting Up Robotic Library Hardware” on page 1175
“Installing Backup Exec” on page 48
“First Time Startup Wizard” on page 80
“Setting Up Cleaning Jobs for Robotic Library Drives” on page 184
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 139
Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec
Viewing Properties of a Robotic Library
Through the robotic library’s Properties dialog box, you can rename a robotic library,
enable or disable the device for Backup Exec, specify the slot base numbering, and view
information about the library.
▼ To view properties of a robotic library:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Expand the server icon in the tree view, and then click Robotic Libraries.
3. Select the robotic library.
4. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Properties.
See also:
“Viewing General Robotic Library Properties” on page 141
“Viewing Robotic Library Configuration Properties” on page 142
“Viewing SCSI Information for a Robotic Library” on page 144
“Viewing Status Information for a Robotic Library” on page 145
140 Administrator’s Guide
Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec
Viewing General Robotic Library Properties
While most of the information appearing on the General tab for a robotic library’s
properties dialog box is for viewing only, you can use this dialog to rename your robotic
library.
General robotic library properties
Managing
Devices
The General tab provides the following information:
General properties options for robotic library
Item Description
Name The name of the robotic library. You can rename the device by typing a
new name in this field.
Vendor The name of the vendor of the robotic library.
Product ID The product ID from the SCSI Inquiry string.
Firmware version The version of the firmware used in the device.
Robotic Library type The manufacturer and model number of the robotic library.
Date in service The date this device was first detected by Backup Exec.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 141
Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec
General properties options for robotic library
Item Description
Full name Displays the robotic library name and server name; for example, robotic
library name(server name).
Serial number Serial number of the robotic library.
See also:
“Viewing Properties of a Robotic Library” on page 140
Viewing Robotic Library Configuration Properties
Through the Configuration tab of a Robotic Library’s Properties dialog box, you can
enable or disable the robotic library for use by Backup Exec, enable startup initialization
for the robotic library, enable bar code rules, enable Removable Storage, and specify slot
base numbering.
Robotic library configuration properties
142 Administrator’s Guide
Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec
The Configuration tab provides the following information:
Configuration properties options for robotic library
Item Description
Enable device for Select this check box to have Backup Exec use this device. Clear this
Backup Exec check box to disable the device, and allow it to be available for other
applications. If the check box is clear, the device is disabled, and cannot
be used by Backup Exec.
Enable startup Select this option to have Backup Exec initialize the robotic library
initialization when Backup Exec is started. Depending upon the robotic library,
initialization can include reading all bar code labels on media.
Enable bar code rules Select this check box to enable bar code rules (see “Bar Code Labeling in
Mixed Media Libraries” on page 205).
Enable Removable Select this option if you want to allow Removable Storage to share the
Storage (RSM) devices in robotic libraries between two or more applications. If the
device is enabled in Removable Storage, Backup Exec uses Removable
Managing
Devices
Storage for device and media operations; if the device is disabled in
Removable Storage, Backup Exec controls the device directly.
For more information about using Removable Storage with Backup
Exec’s Advanced Device and Media Management feature, see “Using
Microsoft’s Removable Storage Feature with Backup Exec” on page 167
Slot base Depicts the starting slot. Some robotic libraries have slots starting at "0";
others start at "1". If your robotic library uses a zero-based slot
configuration you can reassign how the slots are displayed by typing
the appropriate number in the Slot Base field.
See also:
“Viewing Properties of a Robotic Library” on page 140
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 143
Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec
Viewing SCSI Information for a Robotic Library
Robotic library SCSI information
The SCSI Information tab of a robotic library’s Properties dialog box displays the
following information:
SCSI Information for a robotic library
Item Description
Inquiry The device information read from the device firmware.
Port The identifying number of the port on the server to which the device is
attached.
Bus The identifying number of the bus to which the device is attached.
Target ID The unique SCSI ID number (physical unit number).
LUN The Logical Unit Number of the device.
See also:
“Viewing Properties of a Robotic Library” on page 140
144 Administrator’s Guide
Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec
Viewing Status Information for a Robotic Library
Robotic library status properties
Managing
Devices
The Status tab of a robotic library’s Properties dialog box provides the following
information:
Status information for a robotic library
Item Description
Slot count Number of slots in the robotic library.
Drive element count Number of drive elements contained in the robotic library.
Total mounts Number of times media has been mounted by this device.
Mount errors Number of errors encountered while mounting media in a drive.
See also:
“Viewing Properties of a Robotic Library” on page 140
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 145
Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec
Creating Robotic Library Partitions
You can group one or more robotic library slots into partitions. Partitioning robotic library
slots provides more control over which media is used for backup jobs. When you set up
robotic library partitions, Backup Exec creates a drive pool for each partition. Jobs
targeted to a partition drive pool run on the media located in the partition’s slots. For
example, if you set up a partition that contains slots 1 and 2 and you want to run a weekly
backup only on the media in these slots, you would submit the job to the partition drive
pool containing slots 1 and 2.
The partition drive pools appear in the Devices view under the Drive Pools icon. If the
robotic library is partitioned, Backup Exec searches for the oldest recyclable media in the
targeted partition only. If more than one media meeting the requirements is found,
Backup Exec then selects the media in the lowest-numbered slot, that is, media in slot 2
would be chosen over equivalent media in slot 4.
In order to fully benefit from Backup Exec’s partition management feature, VERITAS
recommends that you create a partitioning scheme that best matches the manner in which
you want to control your backups. For example, some administrators may feel that
network backups are best managed by allowing access to partitions based on users and
groups, while others may want to base their partitions on operation types (Backup, Tape
Rotation, Archive, etc.).
▼ To create partitions:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Expand the server icon, and then click Robotic Libraries.
3. Select the robotic library containing the slots that you want to partition.
4. Under Robotic Library Tasks in the task pane, select Configure partitions.
146 Administrator’s Guide
Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec
5. Select the robotic library slots to include in each partition by clicking the slots on
which each new partition should begin. A partition divider listing the range of slots
included in the partition is inserted wherever you click.
For example, if you want to create two, 5-slot partitions on a robotic library with 10
slots, click Slot 1 and Slot 6. In this example, Slots 1-5 will be included in the first
partition and Slots 6-10 will be included in the second.
Partitions can include any number of robotic library slots; however, the first partition
cannot be moved or deleted when other partitions exist.
Note Depending upon your robotic library configuration, the first slot could be
numbered 1 or 0. If your robotic library uses a zero-based slot configuration and
you assign the first partition to begin with slot 1, the Partition Utility will actually
use slot 0 as the first slot for partition 1 and adjust the starting slot accordingly for
all other partitions.
Configure Partitions dialog box
Partition
Divider
Managing
Devices
6. While defining your partitions, use the following buttons to help you make selections:
Configure Partitions dialog box
Item Description
Remove Partition Remove the selected partition. The slots contained in the partition
you are removing are added to the partition preceding it.
Move Up Move the selected partition divider up to increase the number of
slots in the partition. (The number of slots in the preceding
partition is decreased.)
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 147
Using Robotic Libraries with Backup Exec
Configure Partitions dialog box
Item Description
Move Down Move the selected partition divider down to decrease the number
of slots in the partition. (The number of slots in the preceding
partition is increased.)
Remove All Remove all partition settings.
7. Click OK after completing the configuration of your partitions.
8. Click Yes to accept the partitions.
The partition drive pools appear under Robotic Libraries for the robotic library on which
they were created. All partition drive pools for a robotic library have the same name and
display the slot ranges for the partition in parentheses within the name.
After defining the partitions, you can submit jobs to those partitions’ drive pools. The
partition drive pools appear in the list of devices along with other devices available to the
media server. Click the target partition drive pool and run the job as you would any other
Backup Exec job.
Redefining Robotic Library Partitions
You can reassign slots to different partitions or even create or delete partitions from a
partition drive pool by repeating the steps for creating partitions and providing different
beginning slot parameters. Suppose, for example, your current setup is a 6-slot robotic
library with two partitions (partition 1 = slots 1-3 and partition 2 = slots 4-6). If you want
to have three partitions with slots 1-2 in partition 1, slots 3-5 in partition 2, and slot 6 in
partition 3, you would select slots 1, 3, and 6.
Because the first two partition drive pools maintain the same identity, even though the
slots have been reassigned, jobs submitted to those partition drive pools will not have to
be retargeted.
However, if you change from three partitions to two partitions, any jobs submitted to the
third partition must be retargeted since that third partition no longer exists. Also, if you
create a new partition that completely contains two or more of the old partitions, jobs
submitted to the old partition must be retargeted.
148 Administrator’s Guide
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files
For example, if a robotic library that had been partitioned with partition 1 containing slots
1-2, partition 2 containing slots 3-4, and partition 3 containing slots 5-10 is repartitioned so
that partition 1 contains slots 1-4, partition 2 contains slots 5-6, and partition 3 contains
slots 7-10. Any jobs targeted to the old partition 2 (slots 3-4) will need to be retargeted.
Note If a job is targeted to a particular robotic library drive (or a drive pool that is not a
partition drive pool), the job defaults to the first partition in the robotic library.
See also:
“Creating Robotic Library Partitions” on page 146
“Retargeting Jobs from a Deleted Drive Pool or Media Set” on page 109
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files
Backup Exec includes a feature called Backup-to-Disk, which allows you to back up data
to a folder on a hard disk instead of to a tape device. Backup-to-Disk provides a faster
method of backing up and restoring files, which is useful when you have a short amount
of time to back up or restore data. You can use it as part of a two-stage backup process
Managing
Devices
where you back up data to disk first and then transfer the data to a tape when more time is
available.
Before you can start using Backup-to-Disk, you need to create a backup folder, which is a
virtual device that Backup Exec treats as any real tape device. Backup folders can be part
of drive pools, but not cascaded drive pools. When you create a new backup folder,
Backup Exec automatically assigns a name and a path to it, but you can change both. You
can create as many backup folders as you need.
When you back up to disk, Backup Exec places the data in a backup file in the backup
folder you specify. Backup files are virtual media where backed up data is stored. Backup
files are like any other type of media, so you can inventory, catalog, erase, and restore
them.
Since Backup Exec recognizes the backup folders as devices, you can view them by
selecting Devices on the navigation bar. You can view the backup files from both the
Devices view and the Media view in Backup Exec. In Windows Explorer, the backup
folders display in the path you specified when you added the folders, and the backup files
display with a.bkf file extension. Each backup folder also contains a changer.cfg file
and a folder.cfg file, which store information about the backup files.
Note You should not delete or edit the changer.cfg or folder.cfg files.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 149
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files
If you use Backup Exec’s Intelligent Disaster Recovery (IDR) option, you must use remote
IDR to recover computers that include backup-to-disk files. The backup folders must be
available to the Backup Exec server you are using to restore the data.
See also:
“Viewing Devices” on page 96
Adding a Backup Folder
Before you can start using the Backup-to-Disk feature, you must create at least one backup
folder. When you create a new backup folder, it is recommended that you create it on a
different physical disk than the disk you want to back up.
You can create either a backup-to-disk folder or a removable backup-to-disk folder.
You can create a backup-to-disk folder in any location where you can write a file, such as:
◆ NTFS partitions (local or remote)
◆ Network Attached Storage (NAS) devices
◆ DFS shares
◆ FAT/FAT32 partitions (local or remote)
◆ VERITAS Volume Manager partitions
◆ RAID drives with any configuration
◆ Mapped drives
◆ NFS volumes
You can create removable backup-to-disk folders on any removable device, provided the
device appears as a drive letter and is formatted with a file system. Removable devices
can include:
◆ CDR-RW
◆ DVD-RW
◆ ZIP
◆ JAZZ
◆ Removable hard disk
For CDR-RW and DVD-RW, third-party software must be used to format the media with a
file system before it can be used with Backup Exec.
You can use the following steps to manually add a new backup folder. You also can use
the Device Configuration Wizard to create a new backup folder.
150 Administrator’s Guide
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files
▼ To add a backup folder:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Select Backup-to-Disk Folder.
3. Under Backup-to-Disk Tasks in the task pane, select New folder.
Note If a Backup-to-Disk Warning appears, read it and then verify that the disk where
you want to create the backup folder has sufficient free space. If you do not want to
see this message every time you add a new folder, select Do not display this
message again. Then, click OK.
The Add New Backup-to-Disk Folder dialog box appears.
Add New Backup-to-Disk Folder dialog box
Managing
Devices
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 151
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files
4. Select the appropriate options as follows:
New Backup-to-Disk Folder options
Item Description
Name Type a name for this folder.
Note Backup folder names must not exceed 243 characters.
Path or Drive Enter the location where the folder is to reside. Path is required if the
option Backup-to-Disk folder is selected. Drive is specified if the
Removable Backup-to-Disk folder option is selected.
Note If you do not know the exact path, click the button next to the
Path field to select the correct path.
Backup-to-Disk folder Select this option if the folder is to exist on a device that has
non-removable media. This type of folder supports concurrent
operations from one or more media servers.
You can create a backup folder in any location where you can write a
file, such as:
NTFS partitions (local or remote)
Network Attached Storage (NAS) devices
DFS shares
FAT/FAT32 partitions (local or remote)
VERITAS Volume Manager partitions
RAID drives with any configuration
Mapped drives
NFS volumes
Note Backup Exec does not determine if the device is a
non-removable device; however, VERITAS recommends that
you do not select this option if you want to use removable
media, such as a zip drive.
152 Administrator’s Guide
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files
New Backup-to-Disk Folder options
Item Description
Removable Select this option if the folder is to exist on a device that has
Backup-to-Disk folder removable media. This type of folder supports spanning of backup
sets from one piece of media to another, but does not support
concurrent operations. This type of folder should not be shared
between media servers. When creating this type of folder, you must
specify only a device, not a path.
You can create removable backup-to-disk folders on any removable
device, provided the device appears as a drive letter and is
formatted with a file system. Removable devices can include:
CDR-RW
DVD-R
DVD-RW
ZIP
JAZZ
Removable hard disk
Managing
For CDR-RW, DVD-R, and DVD-RW, third-party software must be
Devices
used to format the media with a file system before it can be used
with Backup Exec.
Set Default Path Click this button if you want to set a default path for all future
backup folders. Then, type or select the default path.
5. Click OK.
The folder appears on the Devices tab below the Backup-to-Disk Folders icon and the All
Drives icon. It also appears in Windows Explorer as a folder. You can back up data to this
folder now.
See also:
“Viewing Devices” on page 96
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 153
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files
Renaming a Backup Folder
When you use the Backup Exec Rename option to rename a backup folder, the name
changes in Backup Exec, but not on the disk. If you also want to change the name of the
Windows folder in Windows Explorer, use the Windows Rename option.
▼ To change the name of a backup folder:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Under Backup-to-Disk Folders, click either Fixed Backup-to-Disk Folders or
Removable Backup-to-Disk Folders.
3. Select the backup folder you want to rename.
4. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Rename.
5. On the Rename dialog box, type the new backup folder name, and then click OK.
Note Backup folder names must not exceed 243 characters.
6. If you want to rename the Windows folder in Windows Explorer, use the Windows
Rename option.
Changing the Path of a Backup Folder
If you want to change the path of a backup folder, you cannot just move it from one place
to another. First, you create a new backup folder. Then you move the backup files from the
original backup folder to the new backup folder.
▼ To change the path of a backup folder:
1. Add a new backup folder with a name and path that is different than the original
backup folder.
2. In Windows Explorer, copy and paste the backup files from the original backup folder
to the new backup folder.
3. On the Backup Exec navigation bar, click Devices.
4. Right-click the new backup folder, and then click Refresh on the shortcut menu, or
select the new backup folder and press <F5>.
154 Administrator’s Guide
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files
5. Click the new backup folder and verify that the backup files appear in the right pane.
6. To rename the new backup folder to match the name of the original backup folder,
delete the original backup folder and then rename the new folder.
See also:
“Adding a Backup Folder” on page 150
“Renaming a Backup Folder” on page 154.
“Deleting a Backup File” on page 162
Deleting a Backup Folder
When you use the Backup Exec Delete option to delete a backup folder, the backup folder
is removed from Backup Exec, but the backup folder and the files in it remain on the disk
so you can recreate them later. If you also want to delete the folder from the disk, use the
Windows Delete option. However, you cannot recreate the backup folder or files after you
delete them from the disk.
Managing
▼
Devices
To delete a backup folder:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Under Backup-to-Disk Folders, click either Fixed Backup-to-Disk Folders or
Removable Backup-to-Disk Folders.
3. Select the backup folder you want to remove.
4. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Delete.
5. Click Yes.
The backup folder is removed from Backup Exec, but the files and the folder still exist
on the disk. You can still recreate the backup folder at a later date if necessary. If you
do not want to delete the folder from the disk, you have completed this procedure.
6. If you want to delete the folder from the disk, use Windows Explorer to navigate to
the folder.
Caution If you delete the folder from the disk you cannot recreate it later. You lose all the
files from the folder.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 155
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files
7. Select the folder you want to delete, and then under General Tasks in the task bar,
select Delete.
8. Click Yes.
The folder is removed from the disk. You cannot recreate the folder or the files.
Recreating a Backup Folder and Its Contents
If you have deleted a backup folder from Backup Exec, but have not deleted it from the
disk, you can recreate the backup folder and the files in it. You must know the name and
path of the original backup folder in order to recreate it. If you deleted a backup folder
from the disk, you cannot recreate it.
▼ To recreate a backup folder and the files in it:
1. Add a new folder to Backup Exec using the same name and path as the deleted folder.
2. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
3. Expand either Fixed Backup-to-Disk Folders or Removable Backup-to-Disk
Folders.
4. Select the new folder.
5. Under Media Tasks in the task pane, select Inventory and create and run an
inventory job.
When the inventory is complete, the files display on the results pane.
See also:
“Adding a Backup Folder” on page 150
“Inventorying Media in Devices” on page 171
156 Administrator’s Guide
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files
Pausing and Resuming a Backup Folder
When you pause a backup folder, backup jobs do not run on it. If a backup job is already
running on a backup folder when you pause it, the job will complete, but any subsequent
backup jobs will not run until the folder is resumed.
If a backup job fails and the backup folder goes offline, you must pause and resume the
folder after you correct the problem.
▼ To pause or resume a backup folder:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Expand the icon for the workstation where the backup folder is located.
3. Under Backup-to-Disk Folders, click either Fixed Backup-to-Disk Folders or
Removable Backup-to-Disk Folders.
4. Select the backup folder you want to pause or resume.
A check mark appears next to the Pause option if the backup folder is currently
Managing
Devices
paused.
5. Under Backup-to-Disk Tasks in the task pane, select Pause.
If the folder was not already paused, it is now paused. If the folder was already
paused, it is now resumed.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 157
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files
Viewing Backup Folder Properties
Use Properties to view information about the backup folder, and in some cases, to change
configuration information for the backup folder. Information that can be changed through
the Properties dialog box includes the folder’s name, file management settings, disk space
settings, device settings, and concurrent operations settings.
▼ To view or change the properties of a backup folder:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Expand the icon for the workstation where the backup folder is located.
3. Under Backup-to-Disk Folders, click either Fixed Backup-to-Disk Folders or
Removable Backup-to-Disk Folders.
4. Select the folder you want to view.
5. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Properties.
General properties of backup folder
158 Administrator’s Guide
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files
General properties of the backup folder include:
General Backup Folder Properties dialog box
Item Description
Name Name of the backup folder. You can type a new folder name here.
Path The path to the folder. You cannot change the path here.
Enable device for Select this check box to have Backup Exec use this device. Clear this
Backup Exec check box to disable the device, and allow it to be available for other
applications. If the check box is clear, the device is disabled, and
cannot be used by Backup Exec. After changing the option, click
OK.
Priority The Priority field is only available when the backup folder belongs
to a drive pool and is selected for viewing under the drive pool icon.
Backup folder properties displayed under the Backup-to-Disk
Folders and Removable Backup-to-Disk icons do not display the
Priority field. For more information, see “Setting Priorities for
Managing
Devices
Drives in a Drive Pool” on page 105.
Set a priority for a backup folder that determines the order in which
the devices in a drive pool are used. In the Priority box, type a
number from 1 to 99, with 1 designating this device as the first
device to be used in the drive pool, or click the arrows to select a
value.
The default priority is 10 so all devices have the same priority
initially. The device to which you assign the lowest number is the
first device to be used in the drive pool; for example, a device with a
priority of 1 is used before a device with a priority of 5.
Note Overwrite and append periods for media take precedence
over drive priority.
Pause device Select this check box to pause the device, and then click OK. To
resume the device, clear the box and click OK.
Folder Type Displays either Backup -to-Disk Folder or Removable
Backup-to-Disk Folder, depending on which type of device this
folder exists. This option cannot be changed.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 159
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files
6. Click Advanced to view or change configuration information.
Advanced properties of book folder
7. Select from the following options:
Advanced book folder property options
Item Description
Backup-to-Disk file management
Maximum size for Type the maximum size for each backup-to-disk file contained in
Backup-to-Disk files this folder and then select either MB or GB as the unit of size. The
file size can be as small as 1 MB or as large as 4096 GB. The default is
1 GB.
Maximum number of Type the maximum number of backup sets to be written to each
backup sets per backup-to-disk file in this folder. The maximum number can range
Backup-to-Disk file from 1 to 8192. The default is 100.
160 Administrator’s Guide
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files
Advanced book folder property options
Item Description
Disk Space Settings
Disk space reserve Type the minimum number of megabytes or gigabytes of disk space
that can remain before the backup-to-disk folder stops accepting
jobs. If the backup-to-disk folder is a removable storage folder, the
jobs will span to new media after the reserved disk space reaches
this minimum.
Device settings
Auto detect settings Clear this check box if you have a storage device for which you can
set buffer reads or writes. Otherwise, when this option is selected
Backup Exec will detect the preferred settings for your device.
Buffered reads Select this check box if you do not want Backup Exec to auto-detect
device settings and you know that your device allows buffered
reads which is, the reading of large blocks of data.
Managing
Devices
Buffered writes Select this check box if you do not want Backup Exec to auto-detect
device settings and you know that your device allows buffered
writes, which is the writing of large blocks of data.
Concurrent Operations
Allow x concurrent This option only appears if the backup-to-disk folder is a
operations for this non-removable folder. Type the number of concurrent operations
Backup-to-Disk Folder that can be performed on this folder. This number can range from 1
for this server. to 16.
8. Click OK.
Renaming a Backup File
When you rename a backup file, the name changes in Backup Exec and also on disk. The
media label also changes.
▼ To rename a backup file:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Double-click the icon for the workstation where the backup folder is located.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 161
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files
3. Double-click Backup-to-Disk Folders.
4. Click the folder that contains the file you want to rename.
5. On the results pane, select the file you want to rename.
6. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Rename.
7. Type a new name for the file, and then click OK.
Deleting a Backup File
You must move backup files to the Retired Media set before you can delete them. When
you delete a backup file from the Media tab in Backup Exec, it is deleted from Backup
Exec but the Windows folder and files still exist in Windows Explorer. You can recreate the
deleted backup files if you have not used Windows Explorer to delete them from the disk.
▼ To delete a backup file:
1. On the navigation bar, click Media.
2. Click the media set that contains the backup file.
3. Use the Windows drag-and-drop feature to move the backup file into the Retired
Media set.
4. On the results pane, select the backup file you want to delete.
5. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Delete.
6. Click Yes, or if you selected multiple backup files, click Yes to All.
The backup file is deleted from Backup Exec, but not from the disk. To delete the
backup file from the disk, continue to step 7. If you do not want to delete the backup
file from the disk, you have completed this procedure.
Caution If you perform step 7 to delete the backup file from the disk, you can no longer
restore the deleted file.
7. Using Windows Explorer, navigate to the location where the backup file is stored.
8. Right-click the backup file.
9. Click Delete, and then click Yes.
162 Administrator’s Guide
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files
Recreating a Deleted Backup File
If you deleted a backup file from Backup Exec, but did not use Windows Explorer to
delete the file from the disk, you can recreate it by running Inventory.
▼ To recreate a backup file:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Expand the icon for the workstation where the backup folder is located.
3. Under Backup-to-Disk Folders, click either Fixed Backup-to-Disk Folders or
Removable Backup-to-Disk Folders.
4. Select the folder where the backup file was located before you deleted it.
5. Under Backup-to-Disk Tasks in the task pane, select Inventory and create and run an
inventory job.
The backup file appears on the results pane when the inventory job completes.
Managing
Devices
See also:
“Inventorying Media in Devices” on page 171
Viewing and Changing Backup File Properties
The file properties that you can view include the:
◆ File name and description.
◆ Creation, allocation, and modification dates.
◆ Number of bytes written and read, total mounts and seeks, and hours in use.
◆ Types of errors encountered on the file.
In addition to viewing properties, you also can change the file name and description from
the Properties dialog box.
▼ To view or change backup file properties:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Expand the icon for the workstation where the backup folder is located.
3. Under Backup-to-Disk Folders, click either Backup-to-Disk Folders or Removable
Backup-to-Disk Devices.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 163
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files
4. Click the backup folder that contains the file you want to view or change.
5. On the results pane, select the file you want to view or change.
6. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Properties.
Backup-to-Disk File General Properties dialog box
The General properties of a backup-to-disk file include:
General properties of a backup-to-disk file
Item Description
Name Name of the backup file. You can change the name of the backup file
by entering a new file name.
Description Description of the backup file. The description displays on the
Devices tab. You can type a new description here.
164 Administrator’s Guide
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files
7. Click Management.
Backup-to-Disk File Management Properties dialog box
Managing
Devices
The Management properties of a backup-to-disk file include:
Management properties of a backup to disk file
Item Description
Creation date The date and time this backup-to-disk file was created.
Allocation date The date and time that the backup-to-disk file was allocated to a
media set.
Modification date The date and time when data was last written to the backup-to-disk
file.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 165
Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files
8. If you want to view the statistics and errors for this file, select the Statistics tab.
Backup-to-Disk File Statistics Properties dialog box
The following information appears:
Statistics properties of a backup-to-disk file
Item Description
Totals
Total Bytes Written Number of bytes that have been written to this media.
Total Bytes Read Number of bytes that have been read from this media.
Total Mounts Number of times this media has been mounted.
Total Seeks Total number of seek operations (performed when a specific piece of
information is being located) that have been performed on this
media.
Total Hours in Use Total number of hours that this media has been in use.
Errors
Seek Errors The number of errors encountered while trying to locate data.
166 Administrator’s Guide
Using Microsoft’s Removable Storage Feature with Backup Exec
Statistics properties of a backup-to-disk file (continued)
Item Description
Soft Read Errors The number of recoverable read errors encountered.
Hard Read Errors The number of unrecoverable read errors encountered.
Soft Write Errors The number of recoverable write errors encountered.
Hard Write Errors The number of unrecoverable write errors encountered.
9. After viewing properties for the backup-to-disk file, click OK.
Using Microsoft’s Removable Storage Feature with Backup
Exec
Removable Storage is a feature of Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
Managing
systems that allows applications to share removable storage devices. Removable Storage
Devices
performs requests for device access from different applications on a first in, first out basis.
It also tracks media usage for online media (media currently mounted in a robotic library)
and for offline media that has been installed previously in a robotic library. Removable
Storage does not manage single-slot tape drives.
On the media server, you can allow Removable Storage to share the devices in robotic
libraries between two or more applications, or you can allow some or all devices in robotic
libraries to be controlled and used exclusively by Backup Exec’s Advanced Device and
Media Management (ADAMM). If the device is enabled for Removable Storage through
the robotic library’s Properties (see “Viewing Robotic Library Configuration Properties”
on page 142), Backup Exec uses Removable Storage for device and media operations; if
the Enable Removable Storage is cleared, Backup Exec controls the device directly.
Note In some situations, Removable Storage does not support a robotic library, but may
still support some drives in the robotic library. When this happens, Removable
Storage disables the robotic libraries but enables the supported drives in the robotic
libraries. You should use the Removable Storage snap-in in an MMC to disable all of
the drives in the robotic library. This allows Backup Exec to control the robotic
library and all of the drives.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 167
Using Microsoft’s Removable Storage Feature with Backup Exec
If you do not need to share the devices, exclusive use by Backup Exec will allow faster
tape backups and restores. If you allow exclusive use by Backup Exec, you can still enable
or disable devices in Removable Storage while Backup Exec is running; Backup Exec will
respond by switching to other devices in the robotic libraries as appropriate.
Note You should not enable Removable Storage for devices used with the SAN Shared
Storage Option (SAN SSO). RSM does not appropriately manage devices and media
used by multiple servers.
The Removable Storage database is automatically backed up by Backup Exec, and can be
restored if necessary. For more information, see “Advanced options for restore” on
page 428.
Note The Backup Exec services account must have Administrator rights to protect the
Removable Storage database. If the account does not have Administrator rights, the
following error message is recorded in the job log: "An error occurred while
exporting the RSM Database files. The RSM Database could not be backed up."
Only Microsoft tape class drivers can be used if you plan on using Backup Exec and the
Removable Storage feature. If you want to use a third party tape class driver or a
VERITAS tape class driver, you must disable the device through Removable Storage
before installing the driver.
Using Media in Drives Managed by Removable Storage
Use the Removable Storage snap-in to manually control the movement of media into and
out of the robotic libraries managed by Removable Storage, to allocate media to one
application process or another, and to prepare new, imported, or unrecognized media for
use within the Removable Storage domain. You must use appropriate processes to move
media between applications. Media that is assigned by Removable Storage to an
application other than Backup Exec cannot be accessed by ADAMM.
Media in the Removable Storage Import and Free media pools are available for use in
Backup Exec, and can be assigned to Backup Exec using one of the following methods:
◆ In Computer Management on the local machine, under the Storage node, open
Removable Storage, and then open Media Pools. Move media from the Import or
Free media pools into a Backup Exec media pool (see your Microsoft Windows 2000
documentation or online help for details). The next time that Removable Storage is
scanned, any media that is in the Backup Exec pool is allocated to Backup Exec and
marked as "in use" by Backup Exec.
◆ Acquire available media through normal Backup Exec operations. This media is then
placed in the Removable Storage Import pool and can be accessed by Backup Exec
using the policies you established for Imported media.
168 Administrator’s Guide
Using Microsoft’s Removable Storage Feature with Backup Exec
Media that is in the Removable Storage Free media pool or that is unrecognizable by
Removable Storage is marked as unknown media within Backup Exec. You must launch an
Inventory job to mount and read the media header. The media is imported into Backup
Exec and marked as "in use" by Backup Exec. If you do not want that media used by
Backup Exec, delete it from the ADAMM database. For more information, see “Deleting
Media” on page 224.
Backup Exec cannot append to media prepared initially by Removable Storage. To be able
to use this media, you must run an overwrite operation. If media is introduced for the first
time into Removable Storage, but it was previously possessed by Backup Exec or written
to by Backup Exec during a mount operation, even on another server, then that media is
allocated to Backup Exec for exclusive use.
Using Backup Exec Exclusively with Some Devices
If you want to use Backup Exec exclusively on some devices, ensure the Enable Remote
Storage (RSM) option is cleared on the robotic library’s Configuration tab; to allow other
applications on the server to access Removable Storage to share other devices, select the
Enable Remote Storage (RSM) option (see “Viewing Robotic Library Configuration
Properties” on page 142).
Managing
Devices
VERITAS recommends enabling or disabling devices using Removable Storage only when
the device is not in use and the internal drives are empty.
Monitoring Backup Exec and Removable Storage
▼ To view the Removable Storage Work Queue:
1. Click Start and then point to Programs.
2. Point to Administrative Tools, and then click Computer Management.
3. Expand the tree view of Storage.
4. Expand Removable Storage, and then click Work Queue.
You can also track the location and status of media by viewing the media and drive objects
associated with the loader being shared with Backup Exec. The status of the media is
updated as the media is moved.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 169
Creating Utility Jobs
Removing the Backup Exec Pool from Removable Storage
If you must uninstall Backup Exec at some time, you may want to delete the Removable
Storage Backup Exec pool. Refer to your Microsoft documentation for details on how to
use the Removable Storage snap-in to delete an application media pool.
Creating Utility Jobs
Backup Exec allows creation of utility jobs to aid in managing devices and media. You can
specify a job priority and select to have a recipient notified when these jobs run. Utility
jobs, like backup and restore jobs, generate job history records and an XML job log when
they run.
Several of these jobs can be scheduled as recurring jobs. These include:
◆ Inventory robotic library or drive
◆ Erase media in a robotic library or drive
◆ Import media
◆ Export media
◆ Lock robotic library
◆ Unlock robotic library
◆ Clean drive
Utility jobs that can be created only as run-once jobs, which are jobs that are scheduled to
run now or to run once at a specified date and time, include:
◆ Label media
◆ Format media
◆ Retension media
◆ Eject media
◆ Initialize robotic library
If you have a robotic library, you can perform utility operations on the robotic library, the
robotic library drive, all slots, and individual slots.
You can perform operations on devices in Backup Exec by doing one of the following:
◆ Right-click an object to display options on the shortcut menu.
◆ Select an object, and then click an available task on the task pane.
170 Administrator’s Guide
Creating Utility Jobs
Inventorying Media in Devices
Run Inventory to mount the media in the drive and read the media label, which is then
displayed in the Devices view. If this is the first time that Backup Exec has encountered
this media, the media label is also added to the Media view.
If you change the media in the robotic library or drive, run Inventory so that the current
media in the drive is displayed in the views; otherwise, the previous media is still
displayed as being in the drive.
You should run an inventory operation when Backup Exec is launched for the first time
following a new installation or a product upgrade. When Backup Exec is exited and
restarted, it saves information pertaining to the location and contents of all of the media
from the last Backup Exec session (provided the media in the devices hasn’t changed).
With this information, Backup Exec can immediately begin processing operations when it
is restarted.
When media is changed in a robotic library, you can inventory all of the slots in the robotic
library or select the slots to be inventoried. You are not required to re-inventory slots when
adding media requested by Backup Exec. For example:
If you are performing a restore operation, and the data is contained on media that is
Managing
Devices
not currently in the robotic library, you are prompted to insert the media for the
restore operation. In this case, you are not required to re-inventory the slot where the
restore source media is placed.
When media that is not requested by Backup Exec is added or removed from the
magazine, you should perform an inventory operation on the changed slots. This updates
the media database so Backup Exec doesn’t load and unload each media in the magazine
searching for the correct media on which to process jobs. You can select specific slots to
inventory. If you swap media often you may want Backup Exec to perform an inventory
on the robotic library magazine each time Backup Exec services are started.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 171
Creating Utility Jobs
Inventorying All Drives When Backup Exec Services Start
You can set a default so that all drives are inventoried whenever Backup Exec services are
started. An inventory of all drives on startup is recommended if media is often moved
between robotic libraries, but Backup Exec may take longer to start.
▼ To have Backup Exec perform an inventory each time Backup Exec starts:
1. On the Tools menu, click Options.
2. In the Properties pane, under Job Defaults, click Preferences.
3. Click Inventory all drives on Backup Exec services startup.
4. Click OK.
Creating an Inventory Job
▼ To create an inventory job:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Expand the server icon, click Stand-alone Drives, or if the device resides in a robotic
library, click Robotic Libraries.
3. If you want to inventory a drive or slot, select the drive or slot containing the media
you want to inventory, or select Slots.
4. If you want to inventory a backup file:
a. Double-click the icon for the workstation where the backup folder is located.
b. Double-click Backup-to-Disk Folders.
c. Double-click either Fixed Backup-to-Disk Folders or Removable
Backup-to-Disk Folders.
d. Click the backup folder that contains the file you want to inventory.
e. On the results pane, select the file you want to inventory.
172 Administrator’s Guide
Creating Utility Jobs
5. Under Media Tasks in the task pane, select Inventory.
General options for inventory job
Managing
Devices
6. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Inventory Job Properties options
Item Description
Job name Type a name for the job or accept the default name.
Job priority Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
Lowest
Low
Medium
High
Highest
7. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification and select the options you want
(see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 173
Creating Utility Jobs
8. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
“Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
There may be a delay (up to several minutes for some drives) as the media is mounted and
inventoried.
The inventory operation can be monitored or canceled through the Job Monitor.
See also:
“Media Labeling” on page 202
“Inventory all drives on Backup Exec services startup” on page 91
Erasing Media
You can choose to erase media using either Quick erase or Long erase. Not all devices
support a long erase; those that do not will always perform a quick erase.
Quick erase writes an indicator at the beginning of the media that makes the data
contained on the media inaccessible. For most uses, a Quick erase is sufficient.
Long erase instructs the drive to physically erase the entire media. If you have sensitive
information on the media and you want to dispose of it, use Long erase. Running Long
erase on media can take several minutes to several hours to complete (depending on the
drive and the media capacity).
Quick and Long erase do not change the media label. To change a media label, use Label
Media or Rename prior to the Erase operation.
▼ To erase media:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Expand the server icon, click Stand-alone Drives, or if the device resides in a robotic
library, click Robotic Libraries.
3. Select the drive or slot containing the media you want to erase.
174 Administrator’s Guide
Creating Utility Jobs
4. Under Media Tasks in the task pane, select either Erase media, quick or Erase media,
long.
Note If the drive does not support a long erase, Erase media, long will not be available.
The following warning is displayed:
Caution This operation will be performed on the current media in the drive or slot. If the
media has been changed since the last inventory operation was performed, the
media label in the next dialog may not match the media in the drive or slot
selected.
5. Click OK to continue.
The media displayed was read during the last inventory operation; the display does
not change until another inventory operation occurs. Therefore, if you change media
in the slot or drive but did not run Inventory, the media label displayed may not
match the actual media in the slot or drive.
6. When prompted, click Yes to erase the media.
Managing
Devices
7. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Erase media options
Item Description
Job name Type a name for the job or accept the default name.
Job priority Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
Lowest
Low
Medium
High
Highest
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 175
Creating Utility Jobs
8. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification and select the options you want
(see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).
9. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
“Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
You can monitor the Erase operation through the Job Monitor.
You cannot cancel an Erase operation after it has started; however, you can use Cancel to
stop a queued erase operation.
Erasing Backup Files
Erasing backup files removes the data from both the backup folder and the disk, and
removes the file references from the catalog. However, the backup file remains for use
with future backup jobs. You cannot restore the data after you erase it. If you want to
remove data from Backup Exec and restore it later, delete the file from the Media view
(For more information, see “Deleting a Backup File” on page 162.) Unlike other types of
devices, when you erase a file from a backup folder you cannot choose whether to
perform a quick erase or a long erase. Backup Exec performs only a quick erase on backup
files in backup folders.
▼ To erase a backup file:
Caution You cannot restore the data that you erase. Before you erase files, be sure that
you no longer need them.
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Expand the icon for the workstation where the backup folder is located.
3. Under Backup-to-Disk Folders, click the backup folder that contains the file you
want to erase.
4. On the results pane, select the file you want to erase.
5. Under Media Tasks in the task pane, select Erase media, quick.
6. Click OK to continue.
7. Click Yes, or if more than one file was selected, click Yes to All.
176 Administrator’s Guide
Creating Utility Jobs
8. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Erase media options
Item Description
Job name Type a name for the job or accept the default name.
Job priority Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
Lowest
Low
Medium
High
Highest
9. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification and select the options you want
(see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).
Managing
Devices
10. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
“Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
Retensioning a Tape
Use Retension media to run the tape in the tape drive from beginning to end at a fast
speed so that the tape winds evenly and runs more smoothly past the tape drive heads.
Refer to the documentation that came with your tape drive to see how often this utility
should be performed.
Retensioning is primarily for Mini Cartridge and quarter-inch cartridges and is not
supported on most other types of tape drives.
▼ To retension a tape:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Expand the server icon, click Stand-alone Drives, or if the drive is attached to a
robotic library, click Robotic Libraries.
3. Select the drive or slot containing the media you want to retension.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 177
Creating Utility Jobs
4. Under Media Tasks in the task pane, select Retension media.
5. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Retension options
Item Description
Job name Type a name for the job or accept the default name.
Job priority Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
Lowest
Low
Medium
High
Highest
6. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification, and select the options you want
(see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).
7. Click Run now.
The job will be submitted as a Run now job, unless you submitted the job on hold. You
can monitor the Retension operation from the Job Monitor.
You cannot cancel a Retension operation after it has started; however, you can use Cancel
to stop a queued retension operation.
178 Administrator’s Guide
Creating Utility Jobs
Formatting Media in a Drive
Use Format media to format the media currently in the drive. Most devices do not
support formatting. If formatting is not supported, the option is not available.
If you use Format on a DC2000 tape, the formatting may take two or more hours to
complete.
Caution Formatting erases the media. All data on the media is lost.
▼ To format media in a drive:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Expand the server icon, click Stand-alone Drives, or if the drive is attached to a
robotic library, click Robotic Libraries.
3. Select the drive or slot containing the media you want to format.
4. Under Media Tasks in the task pane, select Format media.
Managing
Devices
The media label that is displayed was read during the last inventory operation. The
media label displayed does not change until another inventory operation occurs.
Therefore, if you changed media in the slot or drive but did not run Inventory, the
media label displayed may not match the actual media in the slot or drive.
5. To format the media that is displayed, click Yes.
6. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Format media options
Item Description
Job name Type a name for the job or accept the default name.
Job priority Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
Lowest
Low
Medium
High
Highest
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 179
Creating Utility Jobs
7. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification, and select the options you want
(see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).
8. Click Run now.
The job will be submitted as a Run now job, unless you submitted the job on hold. You
can monitor the Format operation from the Job Monitor.
You cannot cancel a Format operation after it has started; however, you can use Cancel to
stop a queued Format operation.
Labeling Media
Use Label media to immediately write a new media label on the media in the selected
device; this operation destroys any data on the media. To change the media label without
destroying the data on the media (until an overwrite operation occurs), use Rename.
▼ To label media:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Expand the server icon, click Stand-alone Drives, or if the drive is attached to a
robotic library, click Robotic Libraries.
3. Select the drive or slot containing the media you want to label.
4. Under Media Tasks on the task pane, select Label media.
The following warning is displayed:
Caution This operation will be performed on the current media in the drive or slot. If the
media has been changed since the last inventory operation was performed, the
media label in the next dialog may not match the media in the drive or slot
selected.
180 Administrator’s Guide
Creating Utility Jobs
5. Click OK.
New Media Label dialog box
6. Type the name you want to use as the recorded media label for this media.
Note This media will be overwritten.
7. Click OK to erase all data on the media and re-label the media.
Label Media Job Properties
Managing
Devices
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 181
Creating Utility Jobs
8. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Label media options
Item Description
Job name Type a name for the job or accept the default name.
Job priority Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
Lowest
Low
Medium
High
Highest
9. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification and select the options you want
(see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).
10. Click Run now.
11. Write this same media label on an external label fixed to the outside of the physical
media.
The job will be submitted as a Run now job, unless you submitted the job on hold. You
can monitor the Label media operation from the Job Monitor.
You cannot cancel a Label media operation after it has started; however, you can use
Cancel to stop a queued Label media operation.
See also:
“Renaming Media Labels” on page 208
182 Administrator’s Guide
Creating Utility Jobs
Ejecting Media from a Drive
Use Eject media to eject the media currently in the drive. If the media is a tape, Eject
rewinds the media before ejecting it.
Some drives do not support a software-driven media eject. If the media is a tape, the tape
is rewound and you may be instructed to manually remove the media.
▼ To eject media from a drive:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Expand the server icon, and then click Stand-alone Drives.
3. Select the drive.
4. Under Drive Tasks in the task pane, select Eject media.
5. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Managing
Eject media options
Devices
Item Description
Job name Type a name for the job or accept the default name.
Job priority Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
Lowest
Low
Medium
High
Highest
6. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification, and select the options you want
(see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).
7. Click Run Now.
The job will be submitted as a Run now job, unless you submitted the job on hold.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 183
Creating Utility Jobs
Setting Up Cleaning Jobs for Robotic Library Drives
You can submit once-only cleaning jobs for robotic library drives, or set up scheduled
cleaning jobs. This option is not available for stand-alone drives.
Before submitting a cleaning job, you must define a cleaning slot that contains the
cleaning tape.
▼ To define a cleaning slot:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Click Robotic Libraries, and then click the robotic library for which you are setting up
the cleaning.
3. Click Slots to display the library’s slots in the right pane.
4. Select the slot that contains the cleaning tape.
5. Under General Tasks in the task bar, select Properties.
6. Select the Cleaning Slot option and click OK.
Make sure that the cleaning tape is located in the slot that you defined as the cleaning
slot. After defining the cleaning slot, you can set up a cleaning job for the robotic
library drive.
▼ To set up a cleaning job:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Click Robotic Libraries, and then click the robotic library containing the drive.
3. Select the drive.
4. Under Drive Tasks in the task pane, select Clean.
184 Administrator’s Guide
Creating Utility Jobs
5. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Clean Robotic Library Drive options
Item Description
Job name Type a name for the job or accept the default name.
Job priority Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
Lowest
Low
Medium
High
Highest
6. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification and select the options you want
(see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).
Managing
Devices
7. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
“Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
You can monitor the cleaning job through the Job Monitor. You can view cleaning
statistics for the drive by right-clicking the drive and selecting Properties. For more
information, see “Viewing and Using Drive Properties and Statistics” on page 122.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 185
Creating Utility Jobs
Importing Media
Backup Exec fully supports robotic libraries with portals through its Import and Export
utility jobs. It is important to create Import and Export jobs when changing media in your
robotic library so that the Backup Exec database is updated. You can select any number of
slots to import and export.
When you use the Import utility, the slots you highlighted are checked for media. If media
is present, it is exported to the portals. After all the media has been exported, you are
prompted to insert new media into the portal so it can be imported. This process
continues until all of the requested media has been imported into the robotic library. If
your robotic library uses a media magazine, make sure no jobs are currently running and
that all media are ejected from the drive and are back in the magazine slots before
swapping the magazine.
▼ To import media in the robotic library:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Select the robotic library.
3. Click Slots.
4. On the results pane, select the slots you want to import media to.
5. Under Media Tasks in the task pane, select Import media.
6. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Import options
Item Description
Job name Type a name for the job or accept the default name.
Job priority Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
Lowest
Low
Medium
High
Highest
186 Administrator’s Guide
Creating Utility Jobs
7. If you want Backup Exec to inventory the media after the job completes, double-click
Settings, click Options and select the following:
Auto-inventory option
Item Description
Auto-inventory after Select this option to have Backup Exec automatically create an
import is completed inventory job to run after the import job completes.
8. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification and select the options you want
(see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).
9. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
“Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
You can monitor the import job through the Job Monitor.
Managing
Devices
Exporting Media
The Import media and Export media utilities allow Backup Exec to fully support robotic
libraries with portals. When you use the Export media utility on one or more robotic
library slots, the exported media is placed in the portals. If you select more media than
there are portals, the robotic library will fill as many slots as possible, then you are
prompted to remove the media from the portal. This process continues until all of the
selected media has been removed from the robotic library.
▼ To export media:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Select the robotic library.
3. Click Slots.
4. On the results pane, select the slots you want to export media from.
5. Under Media Tasks in the task pane, select Export media.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 187
Creating Utility Jobs
6. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Export media options
Item Description
Job name Type a name for the job or accept the default name.
Job priority Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
Lowest
Low
Medium
High
Highest
7. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification and select the options you want
(see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).
8. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
“Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
You can monitor the export job through the Job Monitor.
Locking the Robotic Library
▼ To create a job to lock the robotic library’s front panel:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Select the robotic library.
3. Under Robotic Library Tasks in the task pane, select Lock.
188 Administrator’s Guide
Creating Utility Jobs
4. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Lock options
Item Description
Job name Type a name for the job or accept the default name.
Job priority Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
Lowest
Low
Medium
High
Highest
5. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification and select the options you want
(see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).
Managing
Devices
6. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
“Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
You can monitor the lock job through the Job Monitor.
Unlocking the Robotic Library
▼ To create a job to unlock the robotic library’s front panel:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Select the robotic library.
3. Under Robotic Library Tasks in the task pane, select unlock.
Chapter 4, Managing Devices 189
Creating Utility Jobs
4. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Unlock options
Item Description
Job name Type a name for the job or accept the default name.
Job priority Select the priority for the job. Available options are:
Lowest
Low
Medium
High
Highest
5. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification and select the options you want
(see “Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).
6. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
“Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
You can monitor the unlock job through the Job Monitor.
190 Administrator’s Guide
Managing Media 5
With Backup Exec’s media management tools you can:
◆ Protect data from being overwritten.
◆ Set up media rotation strategies.
◆ Track the location of media.
◆ Label media automatically.
◆ Read and track media labels with bar codes.
◆ Collect and report media statistics.
On the navigation bar, click Media to view all the media used in Backup Exec, view how
the media is organized into media pools, media sets, and media vaults, and view media
properties.
Media Overwrite Protection
Management
With Backup Exec, you are not required to select media for jobs; it is done for you by the
Media
Advanced Device and Media Management (ADAMM) component. At any given time,
Backup Exec is aware of all media that is loaded into attached storage devices, media that
is offline, and media that has been placed in media vaults. Each media has a status that
allows Backup Exec to identify which media can be written to and which media is
overwrite-protected.
Your media rotation strategy must balance between your need to save useful data as long
as possible, and the fact that media are not in infinite supply. The trade-off between the
longevity of stored backup data and the cost of more media is controlled in Backup Exec
by restrictions placed on data that is written to media. A restriction is placed on how long
new jobs can be written to the media after the first job has been written (the append period),
and another restriction is placed on how long the data is preserved after it is written (the
overwrite protection period).
191
Media Overwrite Protection
These two restrictions, the append period and the overwrite protection period, combine to
form a policy that can be applied to groups of media. These policies are called media sets,
which are containers for media that have the same append period and the same overwrite
protection period. The append period and overwrite protection period are attributes of
the container.
Media Set
Append
Period 5 Days
Overwrite
Protection
Period 30 Days
The append period is the amount of time that data can be appended (added) to a media.
The append period is measured from the time the media was first allocated (assigned) to
the media set. It can be specified in hours, days, weeks, or years.
The overwrite protection period is the amount of time that media is protected from being
overwritten. It can be specified in hours, days, weeks, or years. The overwrite protection
period is measured from the time when the last append backup job completed. When the
overwrite protection period is over, the media becomes recyclable and can be overwritten.
192 Administrator’s Guide
Media Overwrite Protection
The Append Period begins when the media is allocated to a
Media Set.
APPEND_PERIOD
TIME
OVERWRITE_PROTECTION_PERIOD
The Overwrite Protection Period
begins each time data is appended
to the media.
During the Append Period, data can The media
be added to the media. Any data cannot be
already on the media is protected overwritten
against loss. by another
job during
The Append Period ends. this interval.
(However,
you could
After the Append erase the
Period expires, and media or
while the Overwrite
Protection Period is move it to a
still active, data scratch
cannot be added to pool.)
TIME
the media. Any data
already on the media
is protected against
loss.
The Protection Period expires.
Management
New
Media
data After the Overwrite Protection
Period expires, the media
becomes “Recyclable.” This
means that new data can be
written to the beginning of the
TIME
media by a new backup job
(causing loss of the original data).
Old
data
The append and overwrite protection periods that you specify apply to all the data on the
media. Therefore, each time data is appended to a media, the time remaining in the
overwrite protection period is reset and the countdown restarted.
Chapter 5, Managing Media 193
Media Overwrite Protection
Time Time Time
Append period = 5 days Append period = 5 days Append period = 5 days
in days in days in days
1 Normal Bkup 1 Normal Bkup Normal Bkup
1
2 2 Normal Bkup 1 Normal Bkup 1
2
3 3 Normal Bkup 1 2
3
4 4 Normal Bkup 1 2 3
4
5 5 Normal Bkup 1 2 3 4
5
6 6
6
7 7
7
8 8
8
9 Protection 9 Protection Protection
9
10 Period 10 Period Period
14 Days 14 Days 10 14 Days
11 11
11
12 12
12
13 13
13
14 14
14
15 15
15
16 16
16
17 The media can be overwritten at 17
this time 17
18 18 The media can be overwritten at
this time 18
Fifth Day
19 19
19
20 20
20 The media can be overwritten at
First Day Second Day this time
Because the overwrite protection period does not begin until the job completes, the
amount of time that the job takes to complete affects the amount of time until the media
can be overwritten.
For example, suppose you create a media set named Weekly with an overwrite protection
period of seven days, and an append period of 0, and you schedule a full backup job to
run each Friday at 9 p.m. When it is time for the full backup to run at 9 p.m. the following
Friday, the job cannot run because the first backup job that ran the previous Friday did not
complete until 10:10 p.m. Therefore, the overwrite protection period for the Weekly media
set still has 70 minutes remaining.
Typically, to prevent this situation, you would shorten the overwrite protection period to
take into account the amount of time a job may run. For this example, the scheduled job
recurring at 9 p.m. can run if the overwrite protection period is set to 6 days instead of 7
days.
194 Administrator’s Guide
Media Overwrite Protection
Default Media Set
When Backup Exec is installed, three important defaults associated with overwrite
protection of media are established:
◆ A media set named Media Set 1 is created.
◆ The append and overwrite protection periods for Media Set 1 are set to Infinite.
◆ All backup jobs you create are targeted to Media Set 1, unless you change the target
during the First Time Startup Wizard.
By using these defaults, you can keep all of your backup data safe from overwriting
forever (unless you erase, label, or format the media, or move it to Scratch Media). You
will eventually run out of overwritable media unless you continually introduce scratch
media into Backup Exec.
To ensure that Backup Exec has media available, you can:
◆ Create new media sets with append and overwrite protection periods set to intervals
of time that accommodate your needs (such as weekly, monthly, etc.) and then assign
jobs to these media sets. When the overwrite protection period expires, the media
become recyclable and Backup Exec can use them for other overwrite jobs.
◆ Change the append and overwrite protection periods of Media Set 1 to finite periods.
The danger with changing the overwrite protection period in Media Set 1 is that if you
continue to use Media Set 1 as the default destination media set for all backup jobs,
your data may not be protected as long as you need it to be.
The media for many jobs can be targeted to the same media set. Allocated media are media
that belong to a media set. As long as the append and overwrite protection periods are
Management
current, the media are allocated to that media set. Backup Exec automatically allocates
Media
media. When the overwrite protection period expires, the media become recyclable. The
media are still displayed as being in that media set, but with a status of recyclable. You do
not need to move recyclable media to or from a media set; Backup Exec can overwrite the
recyclable media in any media set whenever more media are needed for other jobs.
See also:
“Creating Media Sets” on page 233
“Deleting a Media Set” on page 235
“Renaming a Media Set” on page 236
“Editing and Viewing Media Set Properties” on page 236
Chapter 5, Managing Media 195
Media Overwrite Protection
Media Overwrite Protection Levels
With the media overwrite protection levels, you choose the types of media that you want to be
available for overwrite backup jobs.
Although the terms are similar, the media overwrite protection levels and the media
overwrite protection period are different. The media overwrite protection levels are global
settings that designate groups of media as overwritable, whereas the media overwrite
protection period is a time interval that changes from one media set to another.
The media overwrite protection levels are:
◆ Full. Allows you to overwrite scratch (media that contains data you are willing to
discard) and recyclable media (media with an expired overwrite protection period).
◆ Partial. Allows you to overwrite imported media, which is media that was created by
another installation of Backup Exec or some other backup product. You can also
overwrite scratch media with the Partial protection level.
◆ None. Allows you to overwrite all media, including those that have current overwrite
protection periods (allocated media).
Caution The None option is not recommended because it does not protect data from being
overwritten.
Section 1 in the figure “Media Overwrite Protection” on page 200 illustrates the Media
Overwrite Protection level.
See also:
“Setting Default Media Options” on page 209
Media Categories
Backup Exec recognizes media that is inserted into storage devices and categorizes it as:
◆ All Media. All media that has been introduced into Backup Exec. Any media that is
available for overwriting in backup operations, such as scratch or recyclable media,
displays in blue. When you click the All Media icon, the Results pane displays
properties for the media in Backup Exec. For more information, see “Viewing Media
Information” on page 98.
◆ System Media. All media that has been introduced into Backup Exec, except those
media that have been allocated to a media set. System Media includes Scratch,
Retired, and Imported Media. Scratch media displays in blue in the Media and
Devices views.
- Scratch Media. Media that do not belong to a media set and can be overwritten,
including:
196 Administrator’s Guide
Media Overwrite Protection
- New or blank media.
- Media that you have moved from another group, such as a media set or
Imported Media.
- Erased media.
- Retired Media. Media that you have taken out of service, usually because of an
excessive number of errors. After a media has been categorized as retired, it is not
selected for use in a media set by Backup Exec. It is still available for restore
operations, if it has not been damaged.
You can delete media that is in Retired Media to remove it from Backup Exec. You
may want to delete media, for example, when you have a lot of offsite media that
you do not want to recycle or if you throw away the media. If you decide to use
deleted media in Backup Exec, it is recognized as Imported Media and must be
cataloged before you can restore from it.
- Imported Media. Media created by a product other than this installation of Backup
Exec. By default, Imported media have an overwrite protection period of Infinite,
but can still be overwritten if the Media Overwrite Protection Level is set to Partial
or None. You can overwrite imported media using several methods. Data can be
restored from imported media until that media is overwritten. Other media pools
that are contained in Imported Media are:
- Backup Exec and Windows NT Backup Media. Media from another installation of
Backup Exec.
- Backup Exec Archive Media. Media that was used for archive jobs.
- Foreign Media. Media from a product other than Backup Exec.
Management
◆ Media Sets. Media sets are groups of media that have the same overwrite protection
Media
period and append period. The overwrite protection period is the length of time that
data is retained on a specific media before becoming available for overwriting. The
append period is the length of time that data can be added to a media. You can create
different media sets, each with different data overwrite protection and append
periods. When a backup job is created, you target it to a specific media set that defines
the particular data overwrite protection and append periods you want applied to the
backup job. Use media sets to set up media rotation strategies. Media sets include:
- Allocated media. Media that belong to a media set. Allocated media are always
displayed in the allocated media set, even after the data overwrite protection date
expires.
- Recyclable media. Media that are allocated to a media set, but have expired
overwrite protection periods.
You can move recyclable media to Scratch Media, or you can let it remain in the
media set list. When a backup job runs, by default Backup Exec uses scratch
media first, and then selected recyclable media that is in the targeted media set for
Chapter 5, Managing Media 197
Media Overwrite Protection
overwriting if no scratch media are available. To change this default, on the Tools
menu, click Options, and then under Settings, click Media Management.
Recyclable media, along with scratch media, display in blue in the Media and
Devices views.
Media Overwrite Options
Media overwrite options set the order in which Backup Exec searches for overwritable
media. When Backup Exec searches for overwritable media for a backup job, it searches
for either scratch media or media that has an expired overwrite protection period. You are
prompted to select the type of media that you want Backup Exec to use first:
◆ Overwrite scratch media before overwriting recyclable media contained in the
targeted media set.
If you choose to overwrite scratch media before recyclable media, more media may be
required for the same number of jobs, but the recyclable media may be preserved
longer for possible recovery.
◆ Overwrite recyclable media contained in the targeted media set before overwriting
scratch media.
If you choose to overwrite recyclable media before scratch media, you will re-use the
same media more frequently than if you choose to overwrite scratch media before
recyclable media.
Note In a drive pool, Backup Exec selects the oldest recyclable media in all of the drives
in the drive pool to use first. In a robotic library, Backup Exec selects the oldest
recyclable media in the library to use first. If the robotic library is partitioned,
Backup Exec searches for the oldest recyclable media in the targeted partition only.
Caution It is recommended that you physically write-protect media containing critical
data by using the write-protect tab on the media cartridge to protect against
unintentional move or erase operations, or expired overwrite protection
periods.
See also:
“Setting Default Media Options” on page 209
198 Administrator’s Guide
Media Overwrite Protection
How Backup Exec Searches for Overwritable Media
The following table describes the order in which Backup Exec searches for media to use
for an overwrite job, depending on the combination of the overwrite protection level and
the media overwrite option you select.
How Backup Exec searches for overwritable media
Overwrite protection level and overwrite Media is overwritten in this order:
option:
Full + Overwrite scratch media first 1. Scratch media
Note This combination provides the most 2. Recyclable media in the targeted media set
protection against overwriting media. 3. Recyclable media in any media set
Full + Overwrite recyclable media first 1. Recyclable media in the targeted media set
2. Scratch media
3. Recyclable media in any media set
Partial + Overwrite scratch media first 1. Scratch media
2. Recyclable media in the targeted media set
3. Recyclable media in any media set
4. Imported media
Partial + Overwrite recyclable media first 1. Recyclable media in the targeted media set
2. Scratch media
Management
3. Recyclable media in any media set
Media
4. Imported media
None - No overwrite protection + overwrite 1. Scratch media
scratch media first 2. Recyclable media in the targeted media set
Caution This option is not recommended 3. Recyclable media in any media set
because it does not protect data from being
4. Imported media
overwritten.
5. Allocated media in any media set
None - No overwrite protection + overwrite 1. Recyclable media in the targeted media set
recyclable media first 2. Scratch media
Caution This option is not recommended 3. Recyclable media in any media set
because it does not protect data from being
4. Imported media
overwritten.
5. Allocated media in any media set
Chapter 5, Managing Media 199
Media Overwrite Protection
Media Overwrite Protection
1
1
1
Media Overwrite
Protection Level
2
Media Overwrite Protection
None Partial Full
Media Overwrite Options
2
Scratch Media
Recyclable Media Media Overwrite Option
(current user media sets) can reverse these, causing
the Scratch media set to be
Recyclable Media
examined second rather
Scratch Media (current user media sets)
than first.
Recyclable Media
(other media sets)
Recyclable Media Imported Media
(other media sets))
Allocated Media
Imported Media
With the Media Overwrite Options,
Allocated Media you can make Backup Exec favor
scratch media over the expired
(recyclable) media in the Media Set
of the current job (on the right side of When Backup Exec is unable to locate usable
this page), or favor the latter over media, it prompts you to provide one.
the former (on the left of this page).
The most obvious candidates for backup jobs requiring overwritable media are scratch
media and recyclable media (media with expired overwrite protection periods). These are
the first types of media for which Backup Exec searches when a backup requires media to
overwrite. The search pattern is different according to whether you have chosen Full,
Partial, or None. The media indicate that a type of media set is examined for availability.
In addition to setting overwrite protection levels, you must set overwrite options, which
set the order in which Backup Exec searches for overwritable media.
See also
“Media Overwrite Options” on page 198
200 Administrator’s Guide
Media Overwrite Protection
Media Append Options
When you set up an append backup job, you can determine how Backup Exec should
handle the job. The following append options are located on the Device and Media
section of the Backup Job Properties dialog box.
◆ Append to media, overwrite if no appendable media is available. When you are performing
an append backup operation and the backup job is set to this option, Backup Exec
searches for available media as follows:
1. Searches for appendable media in the Media set that is targeted in the backup
operation.
2. If no appendable media can be found, Backup Exec changes the backup operation
to overwrite and continues searching for overwritable media as outlined in “How
Backup Exec Searches for Overwritable Media” on page 199.
Caution If an append job fills a media, the job continues on another piece of overwritable
media. Depending on your configuration, overwritable media is selected from
Scratch Media or Recyclable Media. If the media in the drive is not
overwritable, a message prompts you to insert overwritable media.
◆ Append to media, terminate job if no appendable media is available. When you are
performing an append backup operation and the backup job is set to this option,
Backup Exec searches for available media as follows:
1. Searches for appendable media in the media set targeted in the backup operation.
2. If no appendable media is found, the backup operation is terminated.
Management
See also:
Media
“Creating a Backup Job” on page 241
Overwriting Allocated or Imported Media
Backup Exec protects allocated and imported media from being overwritten when full or
partial overwrite protection is used. However, if necessary, you can allow allocated and
imported media to be overwritten by Backup Exec before the data overwrite protection
period expires, and without setting the media overwrite protection level to None. Several
methods are available:
◆ Move the media to Scratch Media. The media is overwritten when it is selected for an
overwrite job.
◆ Erase the media. Erased media is automatically recognized as scratch media and will be
overwritten immediately.
Chapter 5, Managing Media 201
Media Labeling
◆ Label the media. The Label Media operation immediately writes a new media label on
the media, which destroys any data contained on the media.
◆ Format the media. Formatting destroys any data contained on the media.
◆ Change the overwrite protection period for the media set so that it is expired. Select the media
set, and then under General Tasks, click Properties.
See also:
“Deleting Media” on page 224
“Editing and Viewing Media Set Properties” on page 236
“Media Overwrite Options” on page 198
Removing Damaged Media
Media that meets or exceeds the discard thresholds determined by the media
manufacturer should be moved to Retired Media. Based on a measurement of soft errors
generated by the storage device firmware, media that exceeds acceptable levels of these
errors are reported to Backup Exec as potential candidates to be discarded.
To decide which media to retire, run a Media Sets report to see the total number of errors
for media, or view the properties for a specific media.
Move any media with an unacceptable level of errors to Retired Media so that you are
protected against using defective media before critical backup operations begin. After you
mark media as retired, it will not be used by Backup Exec for future backup jobs. The
media is still available to be restored from if it is not damaged.
Media can only be deleted from Backup Exec when it is part of the Retired Media set.
See also:
“Deleting Media” on page 224
“Viewing Media Statistical Properties” on page 229
“Media Set Report” on page 541
Media Labeling
Media used in Backup Exec is identified by its media label. When new, blank, or unlabeled
media is used during a backup operation, Backup Exec automatically labels the media.
This label consists of a prefix that identifies the cartridge type, and an incrementing
number. For example, if the media is a 4mm tape, then the prefix would be 4M, followed
by 000001. The next media label generated for an unlabeled 4mm tape would be
4M000002, and so on.
202 Administrator’s Guide
Media Labeling
You can allow the media label to be assigned automatically by Backup Exec, or you can
specify a label prefix and number to be assigned for a type of media. For example, you can
specify that all 4mm media that are entered for the first time into this installation of
Backup Exec are labeled with a prefix of ACCT, and with numbering starting from 1000.
You can specify another media type to be labeled with a prefix of FIN, and with
numbering starting at 10,000. Customizing labels in this manner can help you recognize
and organize media.
Another type of media label used by Backup Exec is the media ID, which is a unique label
assigned by Backup Exec to individual media used in Backup Exec. The media ID is used
internally by Backup Exec in order to keep statistics on each media. Because the media
label or bar code label for media can be changed, Backup Exec must use the media ID,
which cannot be changed or erased, to preserve continuity in record keeping for each
individual media. The media ID has no effect on the media label, or on your ability to
rename, label, or erase media.
At times, you may need to use the media ID to distinguish media that have duplicate
media labels. Duplicate labels can be automatically generated in instances when Backup
Exec is reinstalled or media from another Backup Exec installation is used. Use the media
ID to distinguish between duplicate labels. You can view the media ID in a media’s
property page.
Write the media label on an external label fixed to the outside of the physical media.
Whenever you change the media label, you should also change the external label to
match.
Three methods are available in Backup Exec to change a media label:
◆ Label Media operation. Writes a new media label on the media. This write operation
Management
destroys any data on the media. This option is available on the Devices view.
Media
◆ Rename operation. Changes the name of the media in the display, but does not write the
new label to the media until an overwrite operation occurs. The data on the media is
viable until the media is overwritten.
◆ Edit the label in the media’s property page. Editing the label changes the name of the
media in the display, but does not write the new label to the media until an overwrite
operation occurs. The data on the media is viable until the media is overwritten.
See also:
“Setting Default Media Options” on page 209
“Labeling Media” on page 180
“Bar Code Labeling” on page 204
“Renaming Media Labels” on page 208
“Viewing General Media Properties” on page 226
Chapter 5, Managing Media 203
Media Labeling
Imported Media Labeling
Backup Exec does not automatically relabel imported media. The imported media’s
existing label is read and displayed in the Media view, in one of the Imported Media sets.
Additionally, the imported media’s original media label is displayed under the heading
Media Description in the Results pane of the Media view. You can edit the media
description in the media’s property page to make it a more descriptive label.
If the media overwrite protection level is set to Partial or None, the imported media may
be selected for a job and be overwritten. The imported media is automatically labeled
when it is overwritten during a job.
If you want to label a specific imported media while maintaining full media overwrite
protection for other imported media, erase the specific media and then label it.
See also:
“Viewing General Media Properties” on page 226
Bar Code Labeling
If there is a bar code label on the physical cartridge, and the cartridge is in a robotic library
that has a bar code reader, the bar code label automatically becomes the media label.
You can change the media label in Backup Exec, but as long as the media has a bar code
label that can be read, the bar code label takes precedence over the media label. To use the
media label you entered using Backup Exec, you must remove the physical bar code label
from the media cartridge, or use the media in a device without a bar code reader.
Example
Robotic Library 1 has bar code support. During a backup operation, Backup Exec
requests a new or overwritable media for the operation. A new media with the bar
code label 'ABCD' is inserted in the robotic library magazine and the bar code reader
scans the bar code ID on the media label. Backup Exec selects this media for the
operation and detects that a bar code label has been assigned to the media. Backup
Exec automatically uses the bar code label and continues the operation.
When you change magazines or insert new media in a magazine, bar code readers allow
you to quickly update slot information by right-clicking the slot (or slots) and selecting
Scan.
See also:
“Media Labeling” on page 202
204 Administrator’s Guide
Media Labeling
Bar Code Labeling in Mixed Media Libraries
If you are using a robotic library that uses different types of drives and you have bar code
support for that library, you can set up Backup Exec to identify which media type can be
used in which drive type. You set up a bar code label with a prefix or a suffix that
corresponds to a certain type of media. When Backup Exec reads that bar code label, it
locates the type of media that corresponds to the prefix or suffix and then mounts the
media into a drive that accepts that type of media. You can add both a prefix and a suffix
or just one of them.
After setting up bar code rules, you must set up two more items in order for the bar code
rules to work. You must enable the bar code rules for the robotic library by selecting the
bar code rules option on the Configuration tab in the robotic library’s properties. In
addition to setting the bar code rules for each type of media you use, for each drive in
your mixed media library you should indicate what type of media can be used and
whether that media can be used for read or write operations. To set this up, see “Viewing
and Specifying a Drive’s Media Types” on page 136.
▼ To set up a bar code label rule:
1. On the Tools menu, click Options.
2. In the Properties pane, under Settings, click Bar Code Rules.
Management
Media
Chapter 5, Managing Media 205
Media Labeling
Bar Code Rules
3. Click Add.
Add Bar Code Rule
206 Administrator’s Guide
Media Labeling
4. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Add Bar Code Rule dialog box
Item Description
Select a Media Select the media for which you want to add a bar code rule.
Type
Vendor Type the name of this library’s manufacturer. You can find the name of
the library manufacturer on the library’s property page. This is an
optional field. By typing a vendor name here, you restrict the bar code
rule to that vendor’s libraries. If you are creating a general bar code rule
that applies to libraries from different vendors, do not type anything in
this field. This field is not case-sensitive.
Barcode Prefix Type a code to be placed before the bar code. This code represents a
media type. The code can be up to 16 characters, and any combination of
letters and numbers. This field is not case-sensitive.
Barcode Suffix Type a code to be placed after the bar code. This code represents a media
type. The code can be up to 16 characters, and any combination of letters
and numbers. This field is not case-sensitive.
5. Click OK to save the bar code label rule for the media.
6. Verify that bar code rules are enabled for the robotic library. The bar code rules do not
go into effect until you enable them for the robotic library. For more information, see
Management
“Viewing Robotic Library Configuration Properties” on page 142.
Media
▼ To change a bar code rule:
1. On the Tools menu, click Options.
2. In the Properties pane, under Settings, click Bar Code Rules.
3. Click Modify.
4. Change the options as needed.
5. Click OK to save the changes.
6. Click OK.
Chapter 5, Managing Media 207
Media Labeling
▼ To delete a bar code rule:
1. On the Tools menu, click Options.
2. In the Properties Pane, under Settings, click Bar Code Rules.
3. Select a bar code rule to delete.
4. Click Delete.
5. Click Yes to verify that you want to delete the rule.
6. Click OK.
Renaming Media Labels
Use Rename to assign a new label to media. The new label is not actually written to the
media until an overwrite operation occurs. All data on the media is preserved until the
next overwrite job. However, the new media label is stored in the database, and is
displayed for that media. To write a new media label to the media immediately, use Label
Media on the media’s property page. The media’s contents will be erased.
If you rename a media, and then use it in another installation of Backup Exec, that media
is treated as imported media, and the media’s original media label is displayed; the
renamed label is not transferred to other installations of Backup Exec.
▼ To rename a media label:
1. Do one of the following:
- If the media is in a drive, then from the navigation bar, click Devices, and then
click that drive to display the media.
- If you don’t know where the media is, from the navigation bar, click Media, and
then click All Media to display all media.
2. Select the media you want to rename.
3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Rename.
208 Administrator’s Guide
Setting Default Media Options
Rename Media Label dialog box
4. In Name, type a new media label.
5. Click OK.
6. Write this media label on an external label fixed to the outside of the physical media.
See also:
“Viewing General Media Properties” on page 226
Setting Default Media Options
This procedure explains how to set options for the media overwrite protection levels, the
media overwrite options, the default media labeling, and the default location for
Backup-to-Disk Folders.
▼ To set media options:
1. On the Tools menu, click Options.
Management
2. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click Media Management.
Media
Chapter 5, Managing Media 209
Setting Default Media Options
Media Options - Set Application Defaults
3. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Media Options - Set Application Defaults
Item Description
Media overwrite protection level
Full - protect allocated Select this option to protect media in media sets and imported
and imported media media from being overwritten.
This is the safest option to choose because the media being
protected cannot be overwritten until:
The overwrite protection period for the media expires.
You move media that belongs to an active media set to
Scratch Media.
You erase, format, or label the media.
You move media from Imported Media to Scratch Media.
210 Administrator’s Guide
Setting Default Media Options
Media Options - Set Application Defaults (continued)
Item Description
Partial - protect only Select this option to allow imported and scratch media to be
allocated media overwritten. Media in a media set that has an overwrite
protection period that has not expired (allocated media),
cannot be overwritten.
This option is recommended if you have media from an earlier
version of Backup Exec or another product (imported media)
that you want to reuse.
Prompt before Select this option to be prompted before Backup Exec
overwriting imported overwrites imported media when Partial has been selected.
media
None Select this option to disable the media overwrite protection
Caution This option is feature. With this option, you are responsible for making sure
not recommended that the media in your storage devices are not accidentally
because it does not overwritten.
protect data from For example, when an overwrite job is submitted to a drive,
being overwritten. and the media overwrite protection level is set to None, the
media in that drive is overwritten.
Prompt before If you selected None (no overwrite protection), it is highly
overwriting allocated or recommended that you select this option to be prompted
imported media before overwriting allocated or imported media.
Management
Media
Chapter 5, Managing Media 211
Setting Default Media Options
Media Options - Set Application Defaults (continued)
Item Description
Media overwrite options
Overwrite scratch media Select this option to have Backup Exec overwrite scratch
before overwriting media first when an overwrite job occurs.
recyclable media If no scratch media are found in any of the storage devices,
contained in the Backup Exec overwrites recyclable media in the targeted
targeted media set media set.
If no recyclable media are found, Backup Exec automatically
searches for other media to overwrite. The media that is
overwritten depends on the level of overwrite protection that
you set (Full, Partial, or None). See “How Backup Exec
searches for overwritable media” on page 199.
If you select this option, more media may be required for the
same number of jobs than if you choose to overwrite
recyclable media first.
Because this option affects the order in which Backup Exec
overwrites media, choosing to overwrite scratch media first
may allow the recyclable media to be preserved longer for
possible recovery.
Overwrite recyclable Select this option to have Backup Exec overwrite recyclable
media contained in the media in the targeted media set when an overwrite job occurs.
targeted media set If no recyclable media are found in any of the storage devices,
before overwriting Backup Exec overwrites scratch media.
scratch media
If no recyclable or scratch media are found, Backup Exec
automatically searches for media to overwrite. The media that
is overwritten depends on the level of overwrite protection
that you set (Full, Partial, or None). See “How Backup Exec
searches for overwritable media” on page 199.
If you choose to overwrite recyclable media in the targeted
media set first, you will re-use the same media more
frequently than if you choose to overwrite scratch media first.
Media label configuration
Media type Select the type of media for which you want to create default
labels. For example, if you select 4mm, then all 4mm-type
media that are entered for the first time into this installation of
Backup Exec are assigned a label according to what you
specify in the following fields.
212 Administrator’s Guide
Setting Default Media Options
Media Options - Set Application Defaults (continued)
Item Description
Prefix Displays the current default prefix for the selected cartridge
type. To specify a new prefix on the label, type from one to
eight alpha-numeric characters.
Next value Displays the next number that will be included in the label of
the next media that matches the selected cartridge type when
that media is entered for the first time into this installation of
Backup Exec. This number is incremented by one each time a
media that matches the selected cartridge type is entered into
this installation of Backup Exec.
For example, if Cartridge type is set to 4mm, and Next value is
set to 1, the first time a 4mm media is entered into this
installation of Backup Exec, its label will include the number 1.
The label on the next 4mm media entered will include the
number 2.
To enter a new value, type from one to eight numeric
characters. This number must not exceed the number specified
in the Digits field.
Digits Displays the length of Next value, including placeholder
zeroes. This field defines the minimum size of the numeric
portion of the label.
For example, if Next value is set to 1, and Digits is set to 6,
then the Next value for the media label is 000001, 000002,
Management
000003, and so on.
Media
If the Next value exceeds the entry in the Digits field, the extra
digit is added. Using the previous example, if label numbering
continued until 999,999, the next label would be 1,000,000 even
though the value specified in Digits is 6.
Rolling over the label numbering to 1,000,000 and 1,000,001
rather than 000,000 and 000,001 prevents the duplication of
labels.
The number entered in the Digits field must be in the range of
three to eight.
Chapter 5, Managing Media 213
Setting Default Media Options
Media Options - Set Application Defaults (continued)
Item Description
Backup-to-Disk default Type the default path for new backup folders. This default
folder location path appears in the New Backup-to-Disk Folder dialog box
where you add a new backup folder. For more information,
see “Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files” on page 149.
When making selections for backups you are targeting to a
backup folder, avoid including that backup folder in the
selections for the job. For example, if you create a new backup
folder in c:\Backup Folders and then select the entire c:\
volume for backup, make sure you exclude c:\Backup Folders
from the selection list.
When adding backup folders, make sure there is sufficient
space on the disk for the data you are backing up. Backups
that exceed the size of available disk space will fail.
4. Click OK.
See also:
“Media Overwrite Options” on page 198
“Media Append Options” on page 201
“Media Labeling” on page 202
214 Administrator’s Guide
Media Location
Media Location
Backup Exec helps you track the location of your media. There are three categories
available for tracking media:
◆ Online location. The online location lists media that reside in a storage device, robotic
library slot, or Backup-to-Disk folder. The online location is defined by Backup Exec,
so you cannot delete or rename it. In addition, you cannot add media to the online
location.
Note If you move media from an online location, its overwrite protection period and
append period remain in effect.
◆ Offline location. The offline location displays all media that are onsite but are not in
drives or slots, or media vaults. Media are automatically moved to this location if you
use Backup Exec to remove media from a device or slot. You can add media to the
offline location from another media location. To move offline media back to online,
you must run an inventory of the devices or slot, or you must catalog the media. You
cannot delete or rename the offline location.
◆ User-defined media vault. A media vault is a logical representation of the actual physical
location of media. You can create user-defined media vaults to keep track of where
media is physically stored, such as a special media room, a scratch bin, or an offsite
location. For example, you could create a media vault where media to be sent offsite
are moved. Then print the Media Vault Contents report, which lists the media
contained in that vault, to accompany the physical media to their offsite storage. You
can create as many user-defined media vaults as necessary.
Management
See also:
Media
“Finding Media in a Location or Vault” on page 216
“Renaming a User-defined Media Vault” on page 217
“Adding Media to the Offline Location or a User-Defined Vault” on page 217
“Moving Media by Dragging and Dropping” on page 218
“Deleting a User-defined Media Vault” on page 219
“Media Vault Contents Report” on page 542
Chapter 5, Managing Media 215
Media Location
Creating User-defined Media Vaults
Create media vaults to track media stored in specific sites.
▼ To create a user-defined media vault:
1. On the navigation bar, click Media.
2. Under Media Location Tasks on the task pane, click New media vault.
3. Type the name and a description of the new vault.
4. Click OK.
Finding Media in a Location or Vault
If you know the media label for a piece of media, but don’t know where it is located, you
can search for it using the label.
▼ To find media:
1. On the navigation bar, click Media.
2. On the Media selections pane, click Media Location.
3. Under Media Location Tasks on the task pane, click Find media.
4. Type the name from the media label of the media you want to find.
5. Click OK.
Backup Exec highlights the location of the media and displays its properties in the
preview pane.
Note If you are using BEWAC, the preview pane is not available.
216 Administrator’s Guide
Media Location
Renaming a User-defined Media Vault
You can rename a user-defined media vault at any time. You cannot rename the
system-defined online and offline media vaults.
▼ To rename a user-defined media vault:
1. On the navigation bar, click Media.
2. On the Media selections pane, click the media vault you want to rename.
3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Rename.
4. Type the new name.
5. Click OK.
Adding Media to the Offline Location or a User-Defined Vault
You can add media to the offline location or a user-defined vault. You cannot add media to
the online vault. When you add media to a different location or vault, Backup Exec
removes the media from the original location or vault.
▼ To add media to the offline location or a user-defined media vault:
1. On the navigation bar, click Media.
Management
Media
2. In the Media selections pane, select the media location or vault to which you want to
add media.
3. Under Media Location Tasks in the task pane, click Add media to selected vault.
4. Type the media label or scan the bar code label for the media you want to add to this
vault.
5. Click Add.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all the media you want to add.
7. Click OK.
Chapter 5, Managing Media 217
Media Location
Moving Media by Dragging and Dropping
When you are working with media in a location, you cannot move it using the media
move operation that you use when you are working with media in media sets, imported
media, or other media areas. To move media from a location, you drag and drop it from
one location to another location. The following table lists the drag-and-drop rules for
media locations and vaults:
Note If you move media from an online location, its overwrite protection period and append
period remain in effect.
Media Location and Vault Drag-and-Drop Rules
From/To Online Offline User-defined Media All Media
Location Location Vaults Pools/Sets
Online location No Yes, with a Yes, with a No No
warning that warning that
the media is the media is
not physically not physically
moved from moved from
the online the online
location. location.
Offline No No Yes No No
location
User-defined No Yes Yes No No
vault
Media No Yes, with a Yes, with a Yes No
Pools/Sets warning warning
All Media No Yes, with a Yes, with a Yes No
warning that warning that
the media is the media is
not physically not physically
moved from moved from
the online the online
location. location.
218 Administrator’s Guide
Media Location
▼ To move media from a location or vault:
1. On the navigation bar, click Media.
2. On the Media selections pane, click the vault containing the media.
3. Select the media from the Results pane, and drag it to the new location.
Deleting a User-defined Media Vault
You can delete an empty user-defined media vault. If there is any media in the vault, you
must move it before you can delete the vault. You cannot delete the online or offline
locations.
▼ To delete a user-defined vault:
1. On the navigation bar, click Media.
2. On the Media selection pane, select the media vault you want to delete.
3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Delete.
4. Click Yes to delete, or, if you are deleting multiple vaults, click Yes to All to delete
without prompting for each vault.
Management
Media
Chapter 5, Managing Media 219
Media Rotation Strategies
Media Rotation Strategies
There are many media rotation strategies you can use to protect your data. They differ
mostly by the number of media required and by the amount of time the media is kept
before it is rotated back into the schedule. Three of the most commonly used media
rotation strategies are:
◆ Son. Uses the same media each day to run a full backup. See “Son Media Rotation
Strategy” on page 220.
◆ Father/Son. Uses multiple media, includes a combination of weekly full and daily
differential or incremental backups for a two-week schedule, and provides backups
for offsite storage. See “Father/Son Media Rotation Strategy” on page 221.
◆ Grandfather. Uses multiple media, includes a combination of weekly and monthly full
and daily differential or incremental backups, and provides backups for offsite
storage. See “Grandfather Media Rotation Strategy” on page 222.
Son Media Rotation Strategy
Number of media required: 1 (minimum)
Overwrite protection period: last backup
The Son strategy involves performing a full backup every day. Although the Son strategy
is simple to administrate, backing up with a single media is not an effective method of
backup. This is because magnetic media eventually wears out after many uses and the
data you can restore only spans back to your last backup.
Son Backup Strategy
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri
Media 1 Media 1 Media 1 Media 1 Media 1
Week 1
Full Backup
220 Administrator’s Guide
Media Rotation Strategies
Father/Son Media Rotation Strategy
Number of media required: 6 (minimum)
Overwrite protection period: Two weeks
The Father/Son media rotation strategy uses a combination of full and differential or
incremental backups for a two-week schedule.
In the Father/Son scenario, four media are used Monday through Thursday for
differential or incremental backups. The other two media containing full backups are
rotated out and stored offsite every Friday.
Father/Son Backup Strategy
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri
Media 1 Media 2 Media 3 Media 4 Media 5
Week 1
Media 1 Media 2 Media 3 Media 4 Media 6
Week 2
Full Backup Incremental or Differential
Backup
Management
Note When this backup strategy is first implemented, you must start with a full backup.
Media
The Father/Son strategy is easy to administrate and allows you to keep data longer than
the Son strategy, but it is not suitable for the stringent data protection needs of most
network environments.
Chapter 5, Managing Media 221
Media Rotation Strategies
Grandfather Media Rotation Strategy
Number of media required: 19 (minimum)
Overwrite protection period: One year
The Grandfather method is one of the most common media rotation strategies. It is simple
to administrate and comprehensive enough to allow easy location of files when they need
to be restored.
In the Grandfather scenario, four media are used Monday through Thursday for
incremental or differential backups; another three media are used every Friday for full
backups. The remaining 12 media are used for monthly full backups and are kept offsite.
Grandfather Backup Strategy
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri
Mon 1 Tue 2 Wed 3 Thu 4 Fri 5
Week 1
Mon 1 Tue 2 Wed 3 Thu 4 Fri 6
Week 2
Mon 1 Tue 2 Wed 3 Thu 4 Fri 7
Week 3
Mon 1 Tue 2 Wed 3 Thu 4 Monthly
Week 4
Incremental or
Full Backup Differential
Backup
The Grandfather strategy is recommended because it offers a good media number to
storage life ratio (19 media/1 year). It is also easy to modify if you want to incorporate
more media. For example, you could perform a full backup on the last Saturday of the
month to archive permanently.
222 Administrator’s Guide
Media Rotation Strategies
Running the Media Rotation Wizard
Backup Exec’s Media Rotation wizard guides you through setting up a media rotation job.
This job is based on a modified Grandfather/Father/Son strategy. After running the
wizard, the following jobs are set up to protect the data that you select:
◆ A full backup job to start the media rotation job.
◆ A scheduled full backup job that runs at least once a week.
◆ A scheduled differential or incremental backup job that runs on the days that the full
backups do not occur.
▼ To run the Media Rotation wizard:
1. From the Tools menu, point to Wizards, and then select Media Rotation Wizard.
Note You also can find the Media Rotation wizard on the Job Setup screen. On the
navigation bar, click Job Setup. Under Backup Strategy Tasks on the task pane,
click Set up media rotation.
2. Follow the on-screen prompts.
See also:
“Backing Up Data” on page 239
“Media Rotation Strategies” on page 220
“Media Sets” on page 232
Management
Media
Chapter 5, Managing Media 223
Media Operations
Media Operations
You can perform several types of operations on media. You can delete media from the
Retired Media set, move media to a different media set, or create a new catalog for a piece
of media. In addition, you can view properties for the media, including the general,
management, statistical, and cleaning properties.
See also:
“Deleting Media” on page 224
“Moving Media” on page 225
“Cataloging Media in a Drive” on page 413
“Viewing General Media Properties” on page 226
“Viewing Media Management Properties” on page 228
“Viewing Media Statistical Properties” on page 229
“Viewing Media Cleaning Properties” on page 231
Deleting Media
You may want to delete media when:
◆ You have a lot of offsite media that you do not want to recycle.
◆ You throw away damaged or old media.
Media can only be deleted from Backup Exec when it is part of the Retired Media set.
When deleted media is reused in Backup Exec, it is recognized as imported media. Before
you can restore from the media it must be cataloged.
Note Deleting media from Backup Exec is not the same as erasing media.
▼ To delete media:
1. On the navigation bar, click Media.
2. If the media is not already in Retired Media, you must move it there.
To look at the contents of Retired Media, expand the server icon, then expand System
Media, then expand Retired Media.
To move media to Retired Media, drag the media to the Retired Media icon.
3. Select the media you want to delete.
224 Administrator’s Guide
Media Operations
4. Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Delete.
If Delete is unavailable, the media is not in Retired Media. You must move the media
to Retired Media before Delete is available.
5. Click Yes or Yes to All to delete the media that are displayed.
See also:
“Removing Damaged Media” on page 202
Moving Media
You may want to move media when:
◆ Media is reported as generating too many errors and needs to be retired.
◆ You no longer want to keep the data on imported media and want to reuse the media.
When you move media to a media set, the media takes the append and overwrite
protection period properties of the media set to which it was moved.
Note Moving scratch or imported media to a media set is not recommended.
▼ To move media:
1. On the navigation bar, click Media.
Management
2. Expand All Media to display a list of media, and then select the media you want to
move.
Media
3. You can drag the media to a media set, or under Media Tasks on the task pane, click
Move.
Move Media dialog box
4. Click the Down arrow next to the Move this media to field to display the media set to
which you want to move this media, and then click OK.
Chapter 5, Managing Media 225
Media Operations
Viewing General Media Properties
▼ To view media properties:
1. On the navigation bar, click Media.
2. Expand the All Media icon, and then select the media that you want to view.
3. Under General Tasks on the task pane, click Properties.
The General Media Properties tab provides the following information:
General Media Properties tab
Item Description
Media Label Media label that was assigned automatically by Backup Exec,
or that was assigned or changed by the administrator, or that
was a pre-assigned bar code label.
You can edit the media label, which is limited to 32 characters.
Editing the label changes the name of the media in the display,
but does not write the new label to the media until an
overwrite operation occurs. When you edit a media label, try
to make it a concise identifier that will remain constant even
when the media is reused. You should write this media label
on a label fixed to the outside of the physical media.
Duplicate labels can be automatically generated. For example,
reinstalling Backup Exec or bringing media from another
Backup Exec installation could cause duplication in labels.
Duplicate labels are allowed, but not recommended.
Note If a bar code is available, and a bar code-equipped
device is used, then the media label automatically
defaults to that bar code.
Media Description By default, displays the original media label if the media is
imported media.
You can edit the media description, which is limited to 128
characters, to make it a more descriptive label.
Media Type Media type and subtype (if available). Click the button next to
the field to change the media type or subtype.
226 Administrator’s Guide
Media Operations
General Media Properties tab (continued)
Item Description
Used Capacity The amount of raw capacity on the media that has been used.
Used Capacity is calculated by subtracting Available Capacity
from Total Capacity.
Used Capacity may or may not equal Bytes Written.
Available Capacity The amount of expected raw capacity on the media that
remains unused. Some tape devices support the ability to read
the amount of remaining capacity of the media that is
currently loaded in the device. If a tape device supports
reading of the remaining capacity amount, then Available
Capacity is derived from the remaining capacity amount.
Otherwise, Available Capacity is calculated by subtracting
Bytes Written from Total Capacity.
Because Free Space is reported in terms of unused raw
capacity, review Bytes Written and Compression Ratio to
better estimate if there is enough free space to accommodate a
specific job.
Total Capacity The amount of expected total raw capacity of the media. Some
tape devices support the ability to read the amount of total
capacity of the media that is currently loaded in the device. If a
tape device supports reading of the total capacity amount,
then Total Capacity is derived from the total capacity amount.
Otherwise, Total Capacity is estimated based on past usage of
Management
the media.
Media
Bytes Written The amount of data that has been written into blocks on the
media. Bytes Written may differ from Used Capacity due to
the effects of data compression and media flaws. Data
compression will tend to increase Bytes Written when
compared to Used Capacity. Media flaws will decrease Bytes
Written when compared to Used Capacity.
Compression Ratio The ratio of Bytes Written to Used Capacity. Compression
(Bytes Written/Used ratio will show the overall effect that data compression and
Capacity) media flaws are having on the amount of data that is being
stored on the media.
Chapter 5, Managing Media 227
Media Operations
General Media Properties tab (continued)
Item Description
Media ID Internal identification number assigned by Backup Exec. You
cannot change this number.
See also:
“Media Labeling” on page 202
“Creating a Test Run Job” on page 314
“Viewing Media Information” on page 98
“Viewing Media Statistical Properties” on page 229
“Viewing Media Cleaning Properties” on page 231
Viewing Media Management Properties
▼ To view media management properties:
1. On the navigation bar, click Media.
2. Expand the All Media icon, and then select the media that you want to view.
3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Properties.
4. Select the Management tab.
The Media Management Properties tab provides the following information:
Media Management Properties tab
Item Description
Creation date Date and time when the media was first entered into Backup Exec.
Allocation date Date and time when the media was added to a media set as a result
of an overwrite operation.
Modification date Date and time when data was last written to the media.
228 Administrator’s Guide
Media Operations
Note In BEWAC, the server’s date and time format are used instead of the client’s date
and time format.
5. Click OK.
See also:
“Viewing General Media Properties” on page 226
“Viewing Media Cleaning Properties” on page 231
Viewing Media Statistical Properties
▼ To view media statistical properties:
1. On the navigation bar, click Media.
2. Expand the All Media icon, and then select the media that you want to view.
3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Properties.
4. Select the Statistics tab.
The Media Statistic Properties tab provides the following information:
Media Statistic Properties tab
Management
Item Description
Media
Totals
Total bytes written Number of bytes that have been written to this media.
Total bytes read Number of bytes that have been read from this media.
Total mounts Number of times this media has been mounted.
Total seeks The total number of seek operations (performed when a specific
piece of information is being located) that have been performed on
this media.
Total hours in use The total number of hours that this media has been in use.
Chapter 5, Managing Media 229
Media Operations
Media Statistic Properties tab (continued)
Item Description
Errors
Seek errors The number of errors encountered while trying to locate data.
Soft read errors The number of recoverable read errors encountered. If you receive
soft errors, it may indicate the beginning of a problem. If you receive
excessive errors for your environment, check the media for damage.
Hard read errors The number of unrecoverable read errors encountered. If you
receive hard errors, check the media for damage.
Soft write errors The number of recoverable write errors encountered. If you receive
soft errors, it may indicate the beginning of a problem. If you receive
excessive errors for your environment, check the media for damage.
Hard write errors The number of unrecoverable write errors encountered. If you
receive hard errors, check the media for damage.
5. Click OK.
See also:
“Editing and Viewing Media Set Properties” on page 236
“Creating Media Sets” on page 233
230 Administrator’s Guide
Media Operations
Viewing Media Cleaning Properties
You can view media cleaning properties only for cleaning media.
▼ To view media cleaning properties:
1. On the navigation bar, click Media.
2. Expand the All Media icon, and then select the media that you want to view.
3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Properties.
4. Select the Cleaning tab.
The Media Cleaning Properties tab provides the following information:
Media Cleaning Properties tab
Item Description
Number of cleanings Displays the number of cleanings performed so far by this cleaning
media.
Maximum number of Type the maximum number of times you want to use this media for
cleanings cleaning. If the media contains Media Auxiliary Memory, the
maximum number of cleanings displays automatically.
Management
5. Click OK.
Media
Chapter 5, Managing Media 231
Media Sets
Media Sets
A media set is a container for media. When you create a new media set, you must set an
append period and an overwrite protection period for the set. When media is placed into
the media set, that media takes on the attributes of the media set. Media sets can contain
allocated media and recyclable media.
When you create a backup job, you must identify a media set that will receive the backed
up files. You can create media sets manually or using the Media Set Wizard.
See also:
“Media Overwrite Protection” on page 191
“Creating Media Sets” on page 233
“Deleting a Media Set” on page 235
“Renaming a Media Set” on page 236
“Editing and Viewing Media Set Properties” on page 236
Running the Media Set Wizard
The Media Set Wizard guides you through the process of creating a new media set. It
explains the choices you can make. The Media Set Wizard is helpful if you are new to
Backup Exec or are unfamiliar with the concepts and terminology of media sets. Before
you run this wizard you should understand media overwrite protection and append
periods. For an overview of these terms, see “Media Overwrite Protection” on page 191. If
you do not need a wizard to set up a new media set, see “Creating Media Sets” on
page 233.
▼ To run the Media Set Wizard:
1. On the Tools menu, point to Wizards.
2. Click Media Set Wizard.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen.
If you set the media overwrite protection level to Full, you must have blank media
ready and online before the first backup job runs. If you plan to use imported media,
you must inventory it first.
232 Administrator’s Guide
Media Sets
Creating Media Sets
▼ To create a media set:
1. On the navigation bar, click Media.
2. Under Media Set Tasks in the task pane, click New Media Set.
3. Select the appropriate options as follows:
New Media Set General tab
Item Description
Name Type a name for the new media set.
Creation date Date and time when the media set was created. Backup Exec
sets the date and time automatically. You cannot change them.
Management
Media
Chapter 5, Managing Media 233
Media Sets
New Media Set General tab (continued)
Item Description
Media set periods
Overwrite protection Enter the length of time in hours, days, weeks, or years to
period retain the data on the media before the media can be
overwritten (unless the media is erased, formatted, labeled,
moved to Scratch Media, or if the Media Overwrite Protection
Level is set to None).
The overwrite protection period begins when the backup job is
completed. If there is an append period, the overwrite
protection period begins again each time an append job
completes. Because the overwrite protection period does not
begin until the job completes, the amount of time that the job
takes to complete affects the amount of time until the media
can be overwritten. You may shorten the overwrite protection
period to take into account the amount of time a job may run.
For example, setting the overwrite protection period for seven
days and the append period for four days ensures that data
will not be overwritten for at least seven days, and that data
can be appended to the media for the next four days. The last
data appended to this media is retained for at least seven days.
Because of the method Backup Exec uses to compute time, the
unit of time that you enter may be converted. For example, if
you enter 14 days, the next time you view this property, it may
be displayed as two weeks.
The default is Infinite - Don’t Allow Overwrite, which
protects the media from being overwritten for 1,000 years,
unless the media is erased, formatted, labeled, moved to
Scratch Media, or if the media overwrite protection level is set
to None.
Append period Enter the length of time in hours, days, or weeks, that data can
be added to media. Because of the method Backup Exec uses
to compute time, the unit of time that you enter may be
converted. For example, if you enter 14 days, the next time you
view this property, it may be displayed as two weeks.
The append period starts when the first backup job is written
to this media.
The default is Infinite - Allow Append, which allows data to
be appended until the media capacity is reached.
4. Click OK.
234 Administrator’s Guide
Media Sets
Deleting a Media Set
Use Delete to remove a media set from the Media Sets category. If you delete a media set
to which scheduled jobs are targeted, you are prompted to retarget the jobs to another
media set.
You cannot delete a media set that contains media. You must move the media to another
media set first.
Caution Make sure that the media set to which you move the media has the appropriate
overwrite protection and append periods.
▼ To delete a media set:
1. On the navigation bar, click Media.
2. In the Media selection pane, under Media Sets, select the media set that you want to
delete.
3. Under General Tasks on the task pane, click Delete.
4. Click Yes to delete the media set, or if you selected multiple media sets to delete, click
Yes to All to delete all the selected media sets without further prompting.
5. If there are scheduled jobs allocated to the deleted media set, you are prompted to
redirect the jobs to another media set.
Management
Retarget Jobs dialog box
Media
The media set you deleted displays.
6. In the Media Set selection box, click the Down arrow to see more options, and then
select the new media set to which you want to redirect the scheduled jobs.
7. Click Yes to redirect the displayed job to the selected media set, or if there are multiple
scheduled jobs, click Yes to All to redirect all scheduled jobs to this media set without
further prompting.
The scheduled jobs are redirected.
Chapter 5, Managing Media 235
Media Sets
Renaming a Media Set
When you rename a media set, properties for any jobs that belong to that media set will
still display the previous media set name. To update the media set name for these jobs,
select the job from the Job Setup view and then under General Tasks on the task pane,
click Properties. The media set name is updated to the new name.
▼ To rename a media set:
1. On the navigation bar, click Media.
2. In the Media selection pane, under Media Sets, select the media set you want to
rename.
3. Under General Tasks on the task pane, click Rename.
4. In the Name field, type the new name you want to assign to this media set.
5. Click OK.
Editing and Viewing Media Set Properties
You can change the overwrite protection and append periods for a media set at any time.
▼ To edit media set properties:
1. On the navigation bar, click Media.
2. In the Media selection pane, under Media Sets, select a media set.
3. Under General Tasks on the task pane, click Properties.
4. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Media Set properties
Item Description
Name Media set name.
Creation Date Date when the media set was created.
236 Administrator’s Guide
Media Sets
Media Set properties (continued)
Item Description
Media Set Periods
Overwrite protection Enter the length of time, in hours, days, weeks, or years to
period retain the data on the media before the media can be
overwritten (unless the media is erased, formatted, labeled,
moved to Scratch Media, or if the Media Overwrite Protection
Level is set to None).
The overwrite protection period is measured from the last time
data was appended to the media.
For example, setting the Overwrite protection period for seven
days and the Append period for four days ensures that data
will not be overwritten for at least seven days, and that data
can be appended to the media for the next four days. The last
data appended to this media is retained for seven days.
Because of the method Backup Exec uses to compute time, the
unit of time that you enter may be converted. For example, if
you enter 14 days, the next time you view this property, it may
be displayed as two weeks.
The default is Infinite - Don’t Allow Overwrite, which
protects the media from being overwritten for 1,000 years,
unless the media is erased, formatted, labeled, moved to
Scratch Media, or if the Media Overwrite Protection Level is
set to None.
Management
Append period Enter the length of time, in hours, days, or weeks, that data
Media
may be added to the media. Because of the method Backup
Exec uses to compute time, the unit of time that you enter may
be converted. For example, if you enter 14 days, the next time
you view this property, it may be displayed as two weeks.
The append period starts when the first backup job is written
to this media.
The default is Infinite - Allow Append which allows data to
be appended until the media capacity is reached.
5. Click OK.
Chapter 5, Managing Media 237
Media Sets
238 Administrator’s Guide
Backing Up Data 6
Backups are crucial for data protection, and Backup Exec offers you many choices for
creating backup jobs to protect your data, including:
◆ Using the Backup Wizard. Use this wizard to submit a backup job if you are a new or
inexperienced Backup Exec user. The wizard guides you through the process of
creating a backup job using most of the default options. After you become more
experienced with Backup Exec, you will probably create backups by configuring
backup job properties.
◆ Configuring backup job properties. Experienced Backup Exec users can create
customized backup jobs by selecting resources to protect and setting backup options
on the backup job properties pages accessed by either clicking the Backup button or
selecting New Job from the Job Setup task pane. Using the backup job properties
pages allows you to set some options, such as job priority and database options, that
cannot be set per job using the Backup Wizard.
◆ Creating a template. Set all the destination, settings, and schedule options you want to
use and save them as a template. You can quickly create a job using a template by
combining the template with a selection list. You can use templates for multiple jobs,
and, if changes are needed to these jobs’ settings, you can make changes to the
template rather than editing the individual jobs.
◆ Creating a selection list. Select the data you want to back up and save the selections as a
selection list. You can then choose the selection list when creating a backup job. You
can use selection lists for multiple jobs. You can also choose a selection list, and then
create a job from a template, combining the template with the chosen selection list.
Backing Up
◆ Using Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer interface. Select and back up files and folders
from Windows Explorer without having to launch the Backup Exec Administration
Data
Console.
◆ Running a one-button backup job. Select one-button backup from the Backup Exec
Assistant or the Information Desk to quickly back up the local media server.
One-button backups use the default backup settings.
239
Backup Exec allows you to set default options for backup jobs, but also gives you the
flexibility to override these options for specific jobs. You can direct all backup jobs to a
specified network segment, isolating the backup data so that other connected networks
are not affected when backup operations are performed, or you can specify a LAN for a
single job.
Backup Exec also provides the option of setting up backup jobs that take place on a
routine basis (scheduled jobs), or set up one-time backup jobs.
In addition to creating backup jobs to protect data, you can create:
◆ A test run of a scheduled backup job to determine whether or not it is likely to
complete successfully.
◆ A job that duplicates backup sets either from previously backed up data or data
scheduled to be backed up. If the backup sets are to be duplicated from a scheduled
job, the duplicate backup data job runs automatically after the backup job completes.
◆ Verify jobs to test the integrity of the media.
◆ Archive jobs to preserve storage space.
◆ Resource discovery jobs to find new resources that may need to be backed up on a
regular basis.
Before you begin backing up data, you should develop a backup strategy that includes the
method, frequency, and media rotation methods that are appropriate for your
organization. You may have different strategies for different areas of the organization.
You may also want to configure device and media management before creating backup
jobs. You can set up Backup Exec to use physical devices, such as stand-alone drives, or
virtual devices, such as backup-to-disk folders. Or, you can have Backup Exec use logical
groupings of devices, such as drive pools. Specifically, you might want to perform the
following tasks to help you manage storage hardware and media most effectively:
◆ Set up drive pools for systems with more than one storage device. For more
information, see “Creating Drive Pools” on page 103.
◆ Create media sets. For more information, see “Creating Media Sets” on page 233.
Caution To protect remote resources, you must install the Backup Exec Remote Agent
for Windows Servers on the remote computer. The Remote Agent is a system
service that runs on Windows servers and workstations and provides efficient
backup processing by locally performing tasks that, in typical backup
technologies, require extensive network interaction.
240 Administrator’s Guide
Creating a Backup Job
See also:
“Creating a Backup Job” on page 241
“Setting Default Backup Options” on page 320
“About Backup Strategies” on page 352
“VERITAS Backup Exec - Remote Agent” on page 843
Creating a Backup Job
Backing up data from a server or workstation involves the creation of a backup job in
which you specify the:
◆ Source
◆ Destination
◆ Settings
◆ Frequency
Unless you specify otherwise, the backup job will use the defaults set through the Tools
menu by selecting Options.
You can use the Backup Wizard to have Backup Exec guide you through the creation of a
backup job, but after you become familiar with Backup Exec, you will probably choose to
set your options by configuring backup job properties.
See also:
“Using the Backup Wizard” on page 242
“Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242
“Setting Default Backup Options” on page 320
“Specifying Backup Networks” on page 332
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 241
Creating a Backup Job
Using the Backup Wizard
If you are new to Backup Exec or are uncertain about how to set up a backup job, you can
use the Backup Wizard. The wizard will guide you through the process of creating a
backup job. While the wizard will prompt you to select some options, most of the backup
job settings will be based on the defaults set through the Tools menu by selecting
Options.
▼ To launch the Backup Wizard:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2. Under Backup Tasks in the task pane, select New job using wizard.
3. Follow the on-screen prompts.
You can monitor the backup job through the Job Monitor.
See also:
“Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242
“Setting Default Backup Options” on page 320
“Monitoring Jobs” on page 381
Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties
▼ To create a backup job for a server or workstation:
1. On the navigation bar, click Backup.
2. From the backup selections pane, select the data you want to back up (see “Selecting
Data to Back Up” on page 265) or choose an existing selection list from the Selection
list name field (see “Using Selection Lists” on page 274). For more information about
the Selections options, see “Selections Options for Backup Jobs” on page 245.
242 Administrator’s Guide
Creating a Backup Job
3. On the Properties pane, under Destination, click Device and Media, and complete
the options as described in “Device and Media Options for Backup Jobs and
Templates” on page 247.
4. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click General and complete the options as
described in “General Options for Backup Jobs” on page 252.
You can select additional configuration options for your backup job if, before selecting
to run or submit the job, you select additional options on the Backup Job Properties
dialog box’s Properties pane:
- If you want to set advanced options for the backup job, on the Properties pane,
under Settings, click Advanced. Then, complete the options as described in
“Advanced Options for Backup Jobs” on page 257.
- If you want to set commands to run before or after a job, on the Properties pane,
under Settings, click Pre/Post Commands and complete the options as described
in “Pre/Post Commands for Backup or Restore Jobs” on page 261.
- If you are using the Advanced Open File Option, on the Properties pane, under
Settings, select Advanced Open File and complete the options as described in
“Selecting the Advanced Open File Option for a Single Backup Job” on page 987.
- If you are backing up other platform types or database agents, such as NetWare,
Exchange, or SQL, select the platform type or database agent from the Properties
pane. Refer to the chapter or appendix for that item for instructions on completing
the options.
- If you want to change the backup network for this job, on the Properties pane,
under Settings, click Network, and then set up the backup network for this job
(see “Changing the Backup Network for a Job” on page 337).
- If you want Backup Exec to notify someone when the backup job completes, on
the Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification (see “Selecting Recipients
for Job Notification” on page 509).
5. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
Backing Up
“Scheduling Jobs” on page 374), and then click Submit.
Note If you are using Backup Exec Web Administration Console (BEWAC), click Next to Data
run the job or set the scheduling options.
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 243
Creating a Backup Job
6. If the backup job summary appears, review it, and then click OK to run the job. If you
want to turn off the job summary for future backup jobs, from the Tools menu, select
Options, and then clear Display the job summary dialog before creating a backup
job (see “Backup Exec Defaults” on page 90).
Note If you are using BEWAC, click Finish to run the job. If you are not satisfied with the
settings you selected, click Back. However, you must reset all of the settings.
BEWAC does not save the settings when you click Back.
Note If a drive loses power during a backup operation, you should restart the backup job
using a different tape. You can restore the data written to the tape up to the point of
the power loss, but you should not reuse the tape for subsequent backup
operations.
See also:
“Using the Backup Wizard” on page 242
“Selecting Data to Back Up” on page 265
“Setting Default Backup Options” on page 320
“Creating a New Backup Template” on page 283
“Creating a New Backup Job from a Template” on page 290
244 Administrator’s Guide
Creating a Backup Job
Selections Options for Backup Jobs
When the Backup Job Properties dialog box appears, Selections is chosen by default on
the Properties pane. Through the Selections options, you choose the data you want to
include in the backup job. You can also choose how the data will appear in this dialog box.
Selections options for a backup job
Options on this dialog box include:
Selections options for backup job
Item Description
Selection list name If you are creating a job using an existing selection list, select the
Backing Up
selection list you want to use (see “Using Selection Lists” on page 274).
Data
Otherwise, use the default Selection list name, which creates a new
selection list using this name.
Selection list Enter a description for the selection list.
description
Load Selections from Click this button if you want to use a previously created selection list or
Existing List merge existing selection lists (see “Using Selection Lists” on page 274).
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 245
Creating a Backup Job
Selections options for backup job (continued)
Item Description
View Format
Graphical Select this option to view selections in a directory tree view.
Show file details Select this option to display details about the files available for
selecting.
Text Select this option to view selections as a list of files and directories.
Advanced Click this button if you want to use the Advanced File Selection for
selecting files for backing up (see “Including or Excluding Files for
Backup Using Advanced File Selection” on page 269).
Include subdirectories Select this option if you want to select the contents of all the subfolders
when a directory is selected.
See also:
“Selecting Data to Back Up” on page 265
“Changing the Order for Processing Backup Selections” on page 272
“Changing Logon Accounts for Resources” on page 273
“Including or Excluding Files for Backup Using Advanced File Selection” on page 269
“Creating Selection Lists” on page 274
“Setting Up User-defined Selections” on page 282
246 Administrator’s Guide
Creating a Backup Job
Device and Media Options for Backup Jobs and Templates
You select the storage device and media set on which the backup job will run by clicking
Device and Media on the Backup Job Properties box and completing the options you
want.
Device and Media options for backup job
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 247
Creating a Backup Job
Options on this dialog box include:
Device and Media options for backup job
Item Description
Device Select a drive pool, stand-alone drive, robotic library drive, or
backup folder to be used for processing the backup.
If you select a backup folder, be sure it is not on the disk you are
backing up. For example, if you are backing up your local C:\ drive,
select a backup folder that is not on your local C:\ drive. Backup jobs
submitted to a backup folder cannot span disks unless the folder is a
removable backup-to-disk folder (see “Using Backup-to-Disk
Folders and Files” on page 149). If the size of a backup job exceeds
the amount of free space on the disk where the backup folder is
located, the job fails. Before you back up data to a disk, verify that
there is sufficient free space on the destination disk. To maximize the
amount of data that you can store on a disk, use the software
compression option.
If a backup job fails due to insufficient disk space, the backup folder
goes offline. To complete the backup job, you must create more free
space on the disk, and then pause and resume the folder. You can
create more disk space by:
Moving the backup files to another disk or backing up the files to
a tape.
Changing the location of the backup folder.
Erasing the backup files.
Overwriting the existing backup files.
If you are unable to create more free space and cannot continue the
backup job, you can restore the data that was backed up prior to the
failure.
Note Backup files are subject to the same overwrite and append
options as other media.
Make sure that appropriate media (overwritable or appendable) is in
the stand-alone drive or drive pool you select.
If the media in the drive is not overwritable or appendable, a
message is displayed requesting that you insert overwritable media.
248 Administrator’s Guide
Creating a Backup Job
Device and Media options for backup job (continued)
Item Description
Media set Select the media set for the backup (see “Editing and Viewing Media
Set Properties” on page 236). If you select Overwrite, the media in
the drive is overwritten if the media is scratch, or if its overwrite
protection period has expired. If allocated or imported media are in
the drive, they may also be overwritten depending on the Media
Overwrite Protection Level that is set. For more information, see
“Setting Default Media Options” on page 209.
If you selected one of the append options, the backup will be added
to an appendable media (if one exists).
Family name Specify a name for the new or overwritable media. This name is used
to identify the media in the Restore Selections dialog boxes.
The family name defaults to “Media created date time”. To customize
the family name, you can use any combination of the following
variables in this field:
%s - includes the media server name
%j - includes the job name
%d - includes the date the media was created
%t - includes the time the media was created
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 249
Creating a Backup Job
Device and Media options for backup job (continued)
Item Description
When this job begins
Overwrite media Select this option to place this backup on an overwritable media.
Make sure that appropriate media is in the stand-alone drive or drive
pool you select in the Device field in this dialog box.
The media in the drive is overwritten if the media is scratch or
recyclable (its overwrite protection period has expired). If allocated
or imported media are in the drive, they may also be overwritten
depending on the Media Overwrite Protection Level that is set. For
more information, see “Setting Default Media Options” on page 209.
Depending on your configuration, overwritable media is selected
from scratch media or recyclable media. For more information, see
“Media Overwrite Options” on page 198.
If the media in the drive is not overwritable, an alert appears
requesting that you insert overwritable media.
Append to media, Select this option to append this backup to the media set listed in the
overwrite if no appendable Media Set field in this dialog box. The backup set is appended if an
media is available appendable media is available in the selected media set; if not, an
overwritable media is used and added to the media set.
Note If an append job fills a media, the job continues on another
piece of overwritable media.
If the media in the drive is not overwritable, an alert appears
requesting that you insert overwritable 0media.
Append to media, Select this option to append this backup to the media set listed in the
terminate job if no Media Set field in this dialog box. The backup set is appended if an
appendable media is appendable media is available in the selected media set; if not, the
available job is terminated.
Eject media after job Select this option to have Backup Exec automatically eject the media
completes in the drive when the operation completes.
Write checksums to media Select this option if checksums are to be calculated for each data
stream written to tape, and then written in a separate stream
immediately following the data stream. If this option is not selected,
backup performance may be improved, but there will be no way to
verify the integrity of the data on the tape.
250 Administrator’s Guide
Creating a Backup Job
Device and Media options for backup job (continued)
Item Description
Retension media before Select this option to have Backup Exec run the tape in the drive from
backup beginning to end at a fast speed, which helps the tape wind evenly
and run more smoothly past the tape drive heads. Retensioning is
primarily for Mini Cartridge and quarter-inch cartridges and is not
supported on most other types of tape drives.
Media Protection
Password protect media Select this option if you are overwriting the media and you want to
protect it. When the Enter Password dialog box appears, enter a
media password. When a password-protected media is taken to
another location, such as another media server, the password is
required to catalog the tape.
Note Password protected media can be erased without requiring the
password.
Change password Click this button to change the password for the media.
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 251
Creating a Backup Job
General Options for Backup Jobs
General options for backup jobs, including the name of the job and the backup method to
be used, can be set through the Backup Job Properties dialog box. To set these options, on
the Properties pane, under Settings, click General.
General settings options for backup job
252 Administrator’s Guide
Creating a Backup Job
Options on this dialog box include:
General settings options
Item Description
Job name Enter the name for this backup job, or accept the default name that
appears. The job name must be unique.
Job priority Select the priority level for this job. If another job is scheduled to run
at the same time as this job, the priority you set determines which job
runs first. Your choices are:
Highest
High
Medium
Low
Lowest
Backup set description Type a description of the information you are backing up.
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 253
Creating a Backup Job
General settings options (continued)
Item Description
Backup method for files Select a backup method. Your choices are:
FULL - Back Up Files - Reset Archive Bit. Includes all of the
selected data on a volume and resets the archive bit to indicate
that the files have been backed up.
COPY - Back Up Files. Includes all selected data, and does not
affect any media rotation scheme because the archive bit is not
reset.
DIFFERENTIAL - Changed Files. Includes all files that have
changed (based on the archive bit) since the last full backup, and
does not affect any media rotation scheme because the archive bit
is not reset.
INCREMENTAL - Changed Files - Reset Archive Bit. Includes
only the files that have changed (based on the archive bit) since
the last full or incremental backup and resets the archive bit to
indicate that the files have been backed up.
FULL - Back Up Files - Allow incrementals and differentials
using modified time. Includes all of the selected data on a
volume and allows the use of incrementals and differentials
using the modified date and time stamp.
DIFFERENTIAL - Using modified time. Includes all files since
the last full backup, using the files’ last modified date and time
stamp. Make sure that the same script or selection list is used for
the differential backup that was used for the full backup.
INCREMENTAL - Using modified time. Includes all files that
have changed since the last full or incremental backup, using the
files’ last modified date and time stamp. Make sure that the same
script or selection list is used for the incremental backup that was
used for the full backup.
DAILY - Files that Changed Today. Backs up all files that were
created or modified today.
WORKING SET - All files last accessed in (x) days. Includes all
files that were created or modified since the last full or
incremental backup. If you select this backup method, you can
then indicate in the Files accessed in x days field that you want
to include data that has been accessed in a specific number of
days.
254 Administrator’s Guide
Creating a Backup Job
General settings options (continued)
Item Description
Backup method for files ARCHIVE - Delete files after successful copy backup. Backs up
(continued) the selected data, verifies the media, and then deletes the data
from the volume. For data to be deleted, rights to delete a file
must be granted; otherwise data will be backed up, but not
deleted.
Note Backup Exec does not delete data from Backup Exec Agent
workstations when using the archive feature.
For more information, see “Understanding Backup Methods and
Their Advantages” on page 355.
Files accessed in x days If you selected the working set backup method in the Backup
method for files field, use this field to specify the number of days for
which to include accessed files.
Note VERITAS recommends that you specify at least 30 days in
order to include the data needed to make your system
operational if you have to restore a working set backup.
Use the Windows Change Select this option if you want to use Windows’ NTFS Change
Journal if available Journal to determine which files have been modified since the last
full backup. This option can only be used with NTFS volumes and
only when the backup method selected is FULL - Back Up Files -
Allows incrementals and differentials using modified time,
DIFFERENTIAL - Using modified time or INCREMENTAL - Using
modified time.
Preserve tree on archive Select this option to retain the directory structure on the hard drive of
the files backed up in an archive job. This option is only available
when Archive is selected as the backup method.
Verify after backup Select this option to have Backup Exec automatically perform a
completes verify operation to make sure the media can be read once the backup
has been completed. Verifying all backups is recommended.
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 255
Creating a Backup Job
General settings options (continued)
Item Description
Compression type Select one of the following:
None. Select this option to copy the data to the media in its
original form (uncompressed). Using some form of data
compression can help expedite backups and preserve storage
media space.
Hardware data compression should not be used in environments
where devices that support hardware compression are used
interchangeably with devices that do not have that functionality.
For example, if a drive that does not support hardware
compression is added to a cascaded drive pool that includes
drives supporting the feature, hardware compression is
automatically disabled. You can manually re-enable hardware
compression on the drives that support it, but this results in
media inconsistency. If the drive that supports hardware
compression fails, the compressed media cannot be restored with
the non-compression drive.
Software. Select this option to use STAC™ software data
compression, which compresses the data before it is sent to the
storage device.
Hardware [if available, otherwise none]. Select this option to
use hardware data compression (if the storage device supports
it). If the drive does not feature data compression the data is
backed up uncompressed.
Hardware [if available, otherwise software]. Select this option to
use hardware data compression (if the storage device supports
it). If the drive does not feature hardware data compression,
STAC software compression is used.
See also:
“Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242
256 Administrator’s Guide
Creating a Backup Job
Advanced Options for Backup Jobs
To set Advanced options, such as open file options, for backup jobs or backup job
templates, on the Properties pane, under Settings, click Advanced.
Advanced options for backup job
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 257
Creating a Backup Job
Advanced options for backup jobs include:
Advanced options for backup job
Item Description
Enable single instance This option is only available if single instance store is being used.
backup for NTFS This option ensures that only one instance of a file for NTFS volumes
will be backed up regardless of the number of single instance store
(SIS) links that point to it.
Caution If the backup job does not run to completion, the
file data may not be included in the backup set.
Rerun the backup until it is successfully completed.
If the incremental backup method was used,
running the job again will not back up the same
files. You must run a full or copy backup to ensure
that all files are backed up completely. If the
'incremental - using modified time' backup method
was used, running the same backup job to
completion will back up the files correctly.
Back up files and Select this check box to back up the information for the junction
directories by following points and the files and directories to which they are linked. If this
junction points check box is not selected, then only the information for the junction
points is backed up; the files and directories to which they are linked
are not backed up.
Note Since Mounted Drives that do not have a drive letter assigned
to them cannot be selected, the files and directories to which
they are linked are backed up regardless of whether this option
is selected.
If this option is selected and the actual files and directories to
which the junction points are linked are also included in the
backup selections, then the files and directories are backed up
twice; once during the full file and directory backup, and again
via the junction point.
WARNING: If a junction point is linked to a location that
encompasses it, then recursion (a situation where data is backed up
repeatedly) will occur, resulting in an error and job failure. For
example, if c:\junctionpoint is linked to c:\, recursion will occur
when attempting to back up c:\junctionpoint, and the backup job
will fail.
258 Administrator’s Guide
Creating a Backup Job
Advanced options for backup job (continued)
Item Description
Back up data in Remote Select this check box to back up data that has been migrated from
Storage primary storage to secondary storage. The data is not recalled to its
original location; it is backed up directly to the backup media.
If this option is selected, you should not run a backup of your entire
system because Backup Exec has to load the data that has been
migrated to secondary storage and additional time is required for
any set that includes migrated data.
If this check box is cleared, only the placeholder that stores the
location of the data on secondary storage will be backed up, not the
data itself.
Note This option should not be selected if the device used for
secondary storage and backups contains only one drive
because Remote Storage and Backup Exec will compete for use
of the drive.
Set Remote Agent priority This option allows you to select the number of CPU cycles the media
server will use to maintain optimal server performance while
Remote Agent backups are running. The higher the priority, the more
the protected server’s CPU processing power is used during backup
operations.
Note Allocating fewer CPU cycles to a backup job may result in
slower backup performance.
This field contains the following options:
Normal Priority. Select this option to allocate the default number
of CPU cycles the protected server will use during a Remote
Agent backup.
Below Normal Priority. Select this option to allocate fewer
server CPU cycles to the backup job.
Lowest Priority. Select this option to allocate the fewest number
of CPU cycles to the backup job.
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 259
Creating a Backup Job
Advanced options for backup job (continued)
Item Description
Open file backup when Advanced Open File Option is not used
Never Select this option to have Backup Exec skip open files if they are
encountered during the backup operation. A listing of skipped files
appears in the job log for the backup.
If closed within x seconds Select this option to have Backup Exec wait the specified time
interval for files to close before skipping the open file and continuing
the backup operation.
If the file does not close during the specified interval, it is skipped. A
listing of skipped files appears in the job log for the backup.
Note If multiple files are open, Backup Exec waits the specified time
interval for each file; depending on the number of open files,
this may significantly increase the backup time.
With a lock Select this option to have Backup Exec attempt to open files that are
in use. If Backup Exec is able to open a file, the file is locked while it
is being backed up to prevent other processes from writing to it.
Backing up open files is not as effective as closing applications and
allowing the files to be backed up in a consistent state.
Without a lock Select this option to have Backup Exec attempt to open files that are
in use. If Backup Exec is able to open the file, the file is NOT locked
while it is being backed up. This allows other applications to write
data to the file during the backup operation.
WARNING: This option allows files that contain inconsistent data
and possibly corrupt data to be backed up.
Note To back up the Removable Storage database in the \Ntmsdata subdirectory, the
WMI repository in the wbem\Repository subdirectory, and the Terminal Services
database in the default \LServer subdirectory, select the <Systemroot>\System32
directory. Files that you place in the Systemroot\System32\Ntmsdata subdirectory,
the \wbem\Repository subdirectory, or the default \LServer subdirectory may not
be backed up; only system files are included in the backup. It is recommended that
you do not place user files in the Systemroot\System32 directory or subdirectories.
See also:
“Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242
“Setting Advanced Open File Option as the Default Setting for All Backup Jobs” on
page 989
260 Administrator’s Guide
Creating a Backup Job
Pre/Post Commands for Backup or Restore Jobs
To set commands to run before or after a job, on the Properties pane of the Backup Job
Properties dialog box, the Restore Job Properties dialog box, or the New Backup Job
Template dialog box, under Settings, click Pre/Post Commands.
You can run commands before or after a backup or restore job, and set conditions for
these commands:
◆ Run the backup or restore job only if the pre-job command is successful
◆ Run the post-job command only if the pre-job command is successful
◆ Run the post-job command even if the backup or restore job fails
◆ Allow Backup Exec to check the return codes (or exit codes) of the pre- and post-job
commands to determine if the commands completed successfully. An exit code of
zero returned to the operating system by the pre- or post-job command is interpreted
by Backup Exec to mean the command completed successfully. A non-zero exit code is
interpreted by Backup Exec to mean the command ended with an error.
If it is critical that the job does not run if the pre-job command fails, then configure Backup
Exec to check the return codes of the pre- and post-job commands to determine if the
pre-job command failed or completed successfully.
For example, if a pre-job command that shuts down a database before a backup is run
fails, the database could be corrupted when the backup is run. In this situation, it is critical
that the backup job does not run if the pre-job command fails.
Additionally, if Backup Exec is configured to check the return codes of the pre- and
post-job commands, and the post-job command returns a non-zero code, the job log
reports that the post-job command failed. If you also selected to run the job only if the
pre-job command is successful, and both the pre-job command and the job ran
successfully, Backup Exec will mark the job as failed if the post-job command fails.
For example, if the pre-job command runs successfully and shuts down the database and
the backup job also runs successfully, but the post-job command cannot restart the
database, Backup Exec marks the job and the post-job command as failed.
If you select the option On each server backed up, the pre- and post-commands are run
Backing Up
and completed for each server before processing begins on the next selected server.
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 261
Creating a Backup Job
Pre-job and post-job command options
Options for this dialog box include:
Pre- and post-job command options
Item Description
Pre-job and post-job commands
Pre-job command Specify a command to be run on the specified server before the
backup or restore job is run. Use local paths, and make sure the paths
exist on each server and are correct.
Note Commands that require user interaction, such as prompts, are
not supported.
Post-job command Specify a command to be run on the specified server after the backup
or restore job has run. Use local paths, and make sure the paths exist
on each server and are correct.
Note Commands that require user interaction, such as prompts, are
not supported.
262 Administrator’s Guide
Creating a Backup Job
Pre- and post-job command options (continued)
Item Description
Run job only if pre-job Select this option to run the backup or restore job only if the pre-job
command is successful command is successful. If the pre-job command fails, the job does not
run, and is marked as failed.
If it is critical that the job does not run if the pre-job command fails,
then select Allow pre- and post-job commands to be successful
only if completed with a return code of zero. If a non-zero code is
returned, it is interpreted by Backup Exec to mean that the pre-job
command did not run successfully. The job is not run and the job
status is marked as Failed.
Run post-job command Select this option to run the post-job command only if the pre-job
only if pre-job command is command is successful.
successful If it is critical that the post-job command does not run if the pre-job
command fails, then select Allow pre- and post job commands to be
successful only if completed with a return code of zero. If a
non-zero code is returned for the pre-job command, it is interpreted
by Backup Exec to mean that the pre-job command did not run
successfully. The post-job command does not run.
If you also select Run job only if pre-job command is successful,
and both the pre-job command and the job are successful, but the
post-job command returns a non-zero code, the job log reports both
the job and the post-job command as failed.
Run post-job command Select this option if it is critical to run the post-job command
even if job fails regardless of whether the job is successful or not.
If you also select Allow pre- and post job commands to be
successful only if completed with a return code of zero and the
post-job command returns a non-zero code, the job log reports the
post-job command as failed.
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 263
Creating a Backup Job
Pre- and post-job command options (continued)
Item Description
Allow pre- and post-job Select this option to allow Backup Exec to check the return codes of
commands to be the pre- and post-job commands to determine if they completed
successful only if successfully.
completed with a return An exit code of zero returned to the operating system by the pre- or
code of zero post-job command is interpreted by Backup Exec to mean that the
command completed successfully. A non-zero exit code is
interpreted by Backup Exec to mean the command ended with an
error.
After checking the return codes, Backup Exec continues processing
according to selections you made for running the pre- and post-job
commands.
If this option is not selected, the success of the pre- and post-job
commands is not determined based on the return code.
Cancel command if not Select the number of minutes Backup Exec should wait before
completed within x canceling a pre-job or post-job command that did not complete. The
minutes default time-out is 30 minutes.
Run these commands
On this media server Select this option to run the pre- and post-job commands on this
media server only.
On each server backed up Select this option to run the pre- and post-job commands one time on
each server backed up.
The pre- and post-job command selections apply to each server
independently. If you select this option, the pre- and
post-commands are run and completed for each server before
processing begins on the next selected server.
See also:
“Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242
“Setting Default Backup Options” on page 320
“Setting Default Pre/Post Commands” on page 328
264 Administrator’s Guide
Selecting Data to Back Up
Selecting Data to Back Up
When you are setting up a backup job, the first thing you do is select the data you want to
back up. You make your selections from the backup selections pane on the Backup Job
Properties dialog box.
Backup Data Selection
Server name
Local drives
Backup Exec database
System State
Network shares
Workstation agents
User-defined selections
The Local Selections include:
◆ Local Drives. Includes hard drives as well as CD-ROM drives physically residing on
the media server.
◆ Backup Exec database. Includes job, schedule, job history, notification, alerts, device,
media, and catalog indexes data for Backup Exec.
◆ Shadow Copy Components (Windows Server 2003 only). The Backup Exec Shadow
Copy Components file system uses Microsoft’s Volume Shadow Copy Service to
protect critical operating system and application service data, and third party
application and user data on Windows Server 2003 resources.
A Writer is specific code within an application that participates in the Volume Shadow
Copy Service framework to provide point-in-time, recovery-consistent operating
system and application data. Writers appear as Shadow Copy Components, which are
listed as resources in backup and restore selections. When expanded, the Backup Exec
Shadow Copy Components file system includes the following types of Writers:
Backing Up
- Service State. Critical operating system and application service data, such as
Event Logs, Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI), Removable Storage Data
Manager (RSM), etc.
- System State. Critical operating system data, such as Windows System File
Protection (System Files), COM+ Class Registration Database, Registry, Active
Directory, etc.
- User Data. SQL Server, Exchange Server, third party application and user data,
etc.
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 265
Selecting Data to Back Up
◆ System State. This collection of system-specific data is selected for backup whenever
the Local Selections icon is selected. Backing up System State is recommended;
however, you can clear the check box next to System State if you do not want to back it
up with the Local Selections. When you double-click the icon for System State, the
resources that comprise it appear to the right of it. If a resource is not installed on the
computer, then it is not listed. You cannot select or expand the System State resources
individually. They are backed up and restored only as a collection, never individually.
You can only perform a full backup on System State. However, if you select other
items at the same time, you can perform other backup methods on those items. You
can back up System State remotely on other computers if Backup Exec Remote Agent
is installed on the remote computer. For more information about System State, refer to
your Microsoft Windows 2000 or Windows Server 2003 documentation.
◆ Utility Partition. Includes the utility partitions installed on the system and available
for backup. Individual utility partition objects are named Utility Partition on Disk
Disk_Number (for example, Utility Partition on Disk 0), and cannot be expanded.
Backing up utility partitions is recommended when a full system backup is done, such
as for disaster recovery preparation. Utility partitions can be backed up individually.
If there are not utility partitions on the system, this resource is not available.
Administrative rights are required to browse and back up utility partitions.
You can only perform a full backup of utility partitions. However, if you select other
items at the same time, you can perform other backup methods on those items. You
can back up utility partitions remotely on other computers
The Remote Selections include:
◆ Network Shares. Includes Microsoft Windows systems protected by the Remote
Agent for Windows Servers.
◆ Workstation Agents. The Backup Exec Workstation Agents protect workstations
running Windows 98/Me, Macintosh, and UNIX. The Novell SMS devices appear
only when the Client (or Gateway) Services for NetWare service is enabled or Novell
NetWare Client 32 is installed. If an agent workstation is password-protected, you
must enter a password to access the agent’s published data. If some or all of the
computer’s shared directories cannot be selected, a gray check box appears next to the
agent. If this occurs, only the agent computers that Backup Exec scanned successfully
are selected for backup. Review your security and attachment rights to the computers
that are not selected. You cannot restore or archive workstation agent shares that are
published as read-only. Valid logon accounts are required to access the systems.
◆ User-defined Selections. Lists shortcuts to servers or shares that were created and
saved as user-defined selections. Use this feature to quickly access shares that have a
very long path or that are offline when you are setting up a backup job.
266 Administrator’s Guide
Selecting Data to Back Up
When you are browsing remote selections, Backup Exec requires a valid logon account to
expand the resources and devices. If the default logon account does not enable access to a
remote selection, Backup Exec prompts you to select another existing logon account or
create a new logon account that can access the selection.
There are several ways you can select data to back up. You can select an entire drive, a
folder, files, System State, network share, Backup Exec Agent volume, or user-defined
selection. You also can use the Advanced File Selection feature to include or exclude
specific files or specific types of files. Or you can set up a selection list that you can reuse
for several backups.
Note If the account to which you are logged on does not have sufficient rights, you are
required to supply another logon account that can be used to view files for backup.
To expand the view for an item, click the plus sign (+) next to it or double-click the item
name. To collapse the view, click the minus sign (-) next to an item or double-click the item
name.
To view the contents of an item, double-click the item’s icon. The item’s contents appear in
the right frame of the backup selections view. For all items (except System State), you can
traverse file levels from either side of the window by clicking folders and subfolders as
they appear.
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 267
Selecting Data to Back Up
To select data, select the check box next to the drive or directory you want to back up. The
check box and check mark displayed are described in the following.
Data selection descriptions
A slash in a shaded check box means some items below the
check box are selected, but the item itself cannot be selected.
A slash in a check box means some items below the directory or
drive level are selected.
A check mark in a check box means all items at or below the
directory or drive level are selected.
A clear check box means the item can be selected.
A shaded check box means the item cannot be selected,
but items below this item may be selectable.
See also:
“Protecting Windows Server 2003 Systems” on page 343
“Backing Up NetWare Network Volumes” on page 351
About Selecting Distributed File System (Dfs) Links for
Backup
To back up Microsoft’s Distributed File System (Dfs), select the Dfs links on the Dfs server.
Only the Dfs links themselves are backed up; the data that the links lead to is not
included.
To back up the data in the Dfs links, back up the data on the server where the data resides.
See also:
“Setting Up User-defined Selections” on page 282
“Restoring Distributed File System (Dfs) Links” on page 440
268 Administrator’s Guide
Selecting Data to Back Up
Including or Excluding Files for Backup Using Advanced File
Selection
Advanced file selection allows you to quickly select or de-select files for backup and
archive operations by specifying file attributes. With this feature you can:
◆ Include or exclude files by filename attributes. For example, you can select only files
with .txt extensions, or exclude files with .exe extensions from a backup.
◆ Select only files that fall within a specified date range. For example, you can select
files that were created or modified during the month of December.
◆ Specify files that have not been accessed in a specified number of days. For example,
you can select files that have not been accessed in 30 days from your “My
Documents” folder for an archive operation.
▼ To select files using Advanced File Selection:
1. On the navigation bar, click Backup.
2. Select the resource that contains the files you want to include or exclude from the
backup.
3. Select the path or file that contains the files you want to include or exclude.
4. Click Advanced.
Advanced File Selection dialog box
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 269
Selecting Data to Back Up
5. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Note If the data does not match all of the criteria specified in the Advanced Backup File
Selection dialog box, Backup Exec does not include or exclude it in the backup.
Advanced File Selection options
Field Description
Drives If you want to include or exclude files from a backup of a different
drive than the one you selected previously on the Backup Job
Properties dialog box, select the new drive that contains the files
you want to include or exclude.
File Selection
Path If you want to include or exclude a specific file, type the name of
the folder and/or subfolder on the selected drive that contains the
file.
You can use wildcard characters. Use a question mark (?) to
represent any single character. Use a single asterisk (*) to
represent any number of characters before the next backslash. Use
a double asterisk (**) to represent any number of characters,
irrespective of any backslashes.
For example, on your C: drive you have a My Documents folder
that contains a subfolder called Work Files. There are three Work
Files subfolders called 1999, 2000, and 2001. Each one of those
subfolders has a subfolder called Personnel. If you type the path
as \My Documents\**\Personnel, the backup will include or
exclude:
C:\My Documents\Work Files\2001\Personnel
C:\My Documents\Work Files\2000\Personnel
C:\My Documents\Work Files\1999\Personnel
In addition, every subfolder below the ** wildcard is included or
excluded. However, the only files from the subfolders that are
included or excluded are those that match the file name you type
in the File field. So in the example above, every subfolder of
C:\My Documents is included in or excluded from the backup,
and only the files that match the file name you type in the File
field are included or excluded.
After you type the path, type the file name in the File field.
270 Administrator’s Guide
Selecting Data to Back Up
Advanced File Selection options (continued)
Field Description
File Type the name of the file you want to include in or exclude from
the backup.
You can use wildcard characters. Use a question mark (?) to
represent any single character. Use a single asterisk (*) to
represent any number of characters.
For example, to include all files with the .exe extension, type *.exe.
You can use more than one asterisk if you know that a file name
has certain letters in it, but not the exact file name. For example, to
include or exclude any file that has the name Sam in it, type
*Sam*.*.
The default entry is *.*, which means every file name with every
extension is selected.
After you type the file name, indicate whether you want to
include or exclude it.
Type
Include (Default) Select this option to include the files in the job.
Exclude Select this option to exclude the files from the job.
Selection Criteria
Include subdirectories Select this option if you want to select the contents of all the
subfolders when a directory is selected.
Only modified Files Select this to include or exclude modified files in the path you
specify.
Only read-only Files Select this to include or exclude files that cannot be modified.
Files dated Select this to include or exclude the files created or modified
Backing Up
during a specific time period. Then select the beginning and
Data
ending dates.
Files not accessed in x Select this to include or exclude files that have not been accessed
days in a specified number of days. This is useful when you need to
migrate older files from your system.
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 271
Selecting Data to Back Up
6. After completing your selections, click OK.
7. Submit the operation using the same procedures as required for other backups. For
more information, see “Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties”
on page 242.
Changing the Order for Processing Backup Selections
After you make selections for a backup job, you can set up Backup Exec to process those
selections in a certain order. Please note the following about the order in which selections
can be backed up:
◆ You can order resources within a server, but you cannot alternate selections across
servers. For example, you can select C: and D: from Server A followed by selections
from Server B. However, you cannot order selections as C: from Server A and then C:
from Server B and then D: from both servers.
◆ For any given server, system state must be ordered last.
1. On the navigation bar, click Backup.
2. Select the data you want to back up.
3. On the Properties pane, under Source, click Resource Order.
4. Select an item you want to move.
5. Then, click Move Up or Move Down until the item is in the correct order. Click Make
First to move an item to the top of the list or click Make Last to move an item to the
bottom of the list.
6. Process the backup job (see “Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job
Properties” on page 242).
272 Administrator’s Guide
Selecting Data to Back Up
Changing Logon Accounts for Resources
A logon account enables Backup Exec to access resources for backup.
▼ To change a logon account for a resource:
Note For remote selections, do not change the logon account information. They rely on
the logon account used to connect to the server they reside on, and will ignore the
additional logon account you can specify. This applies to drives, Lotus, System
State, and Exchange selections (except mailboxes, which can and do use logon
accounts).
1. On the navigation bar, click Backup.
2. Select the data you want to back up.
3. On the Properties pane, under Source, click Resource Credentials.
4. Select the resource whose logon account you want to edit.
5. Click Change.
6. Select the Backup Exec logon account you want to use for this backup selection, or
click New and create a new Backup Exec logon account (see “Creating a Backup Exec
Logon Account” on page 366).
7. Click OK.
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 273
Using Selection Lists
Using Selection Lists
Selection lists provide a quick and easy way of selecting files that you back up often. After
you choose devices, directories and files, you can save the selections as a selection list that
you can use in regularly scheduled operations or once-only operations. Selection lists,
which define what is to be backed up, are also automatically created when you create a
backup. You can combine a selection list with a template and quickly create a backup job.
Backup Exec detects and notifies you about items in a selection list that are no longer on
the resource. Notification occurs as a selection list is loaded for local selections, and as any
remote server is expanded in the tree.
See also:
“Creating Selection Lists” on page 274
“Using Selection Lists to Create a Backup Job” on page 277
“Deleting Selection Lists” on page 279
“Editing Selection Lists” on page 280
“About the Excludes Selection List” on page 280
Creating Selection Lists
Backup selection lists contain selections from the Backup Job Properties - Source dialog
box. Restore and verify selection lists contain selections from the Restore Job Properties -
Source dialog box. The following steps explain the creation of a backup selection list.
▼ To create a backup selection list:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2. Under Backup Tasks in the task pane, select New selection list.
274 Administrator’s Guide
Using Selection Lists
Selections options for new selection list
3. Select the resources you want to back up from the backup selections pane. For more
information about selecting data, see “Selecting Data to Back Up” on page 265.
4. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Selections options for selection list
Item Description
Selection list name Enter the name of this selection list.
Selection list Enter a description for this selection list.
Backing Up
description
Load Selections from Click this button if you want to load an existing selection list or Data
Existing List merge multiple selection lists (see “Merging and Replacing Selection
Lists” on page 278).
View format
Graphical Select this option to view selections in a directory tree view.
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 275
Using Selection Lists
Selections options for selection list (continued)
Item Description
Show file details Select this option to display details about the files available for
selecting.
Text Select this option to view selections as a list of files and directories.
Advanced Click this button if you want to use the Advanced File Selection for
selecting files for backing up (see “Including or Excluding Files for
Backup Using Advanced File Selection” on page 269).
Include subdirectories Select this option if you want to select the contents of all the
subfolders when a directory is selected.
5. Click OK.
See also:
“Using Selection Lists” on page 274
“Using Selection Lists to Create a Backup Job” on page 277
“Deleting Selection Lists” on page 279
“Editing Selection Lists” on page 280
“About the Excludes Selection List” on page 280
276 Administrator’s Guide
Using Selection Lists
Using Selection Lists to Create a Backup Job
▼ To use selection lists to create a backup job:
1. On the navigation bar, click Backup.
2. Click Load Selections from Existing List.
Load Selections from Existing List
3. Click the check box next each selection list you want to use for this backup.
You can select multiple selection lists. A merged selection list will then be created and
used for the job. The merged selection list will be saved separately and can be used for
other jobs.
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 277
Using Selection Lists
4. Submit the operation using the same procedures required for other backup operations
(see “Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242).
You can combine selection lists with a template to quickly create a new backup job.
See also:
“Using Selection Lists” on page 274
“Creating Selection Lists” on page 274
“Deleting Selection Lists” on page 279
“Editing Selection Lists” on page 280
“About the Excludes Selection List” on page 280
“Creating a New Backup Job from a Template” on page 290
Merging and Replacing Selection Lists
You can create a new selection list by merging two or more existing lists with new
selections. Merging of selection lists can be done when creating a job (see “Using Selection
Lists to Create a Backup Job” on page 277) or by selecting the New selection list option.
You can also replace selections in the tree with other selection lists.
▼ To merge or replace selection lists:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2. Under Backup Tasks in the task pane, select New selection list.
3. To merge with an existing selection list:
a. On the New Backup Selection List dialog box, select resources to include in the
selection list.
b. Click Load Existing Selection List.
c. On the Use Selections dialog box, select the selection lists you want to merge with
the previously selected items.
d. Click Merge.
278 Administrator’s Guide
Using Selection Lists
4. To replace selections with an existing selection list:
a. Click Load Existing Selection List.
b. On the Use Selections dialog box, select the selection lists you want to replace
with the previously selected.
c. Click Replace.
5. Click OK.
6. Complete the other options on the New Backup Selection List dialog box as described
in “Selections options for selection list” on page 275.
7. Click OK.
Deleting Selection Lists
▼ To delete a selection list you are no longer using:
1. On the Edit menu, click Delete Selection List.
The Delete Selections dialog appears. The available selection lists are listed in this
window.
2. Click the selection list you want to delete, and then click Delete.
3. Click Yes to delete the Selection List; click No to cancel the delete operation.
If the selection list is being used by a job, you will not be able to delete it.
See also:
“Using Selection Lists” on page 274
“Creating Selection Lists” on page 274
Backing Up
“Using Selection Lists to Create a Backup Job” on page 277
“Editing Selection Lists” on page 280 Data
“About the Excludes Selection List” on page 280
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 279
Using Selection Lists
Editing Selection Lists
Editing a selection list affects all jobs using that selection list. If you want to only edit
selections for a specific job, edit the job rather than the selection list.
▼ To edit a selection list:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2. On the Backup Selection Lists pane, select the selection list you want to edit.
3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Properties.
4. If the selection list is being used by jobs, you will be prompted to click Yes to continue.
5. Make the changes you want to Selections, Resource Order, and Resource
Credentials.
6. Click OK.
See also:
“Using Selection Lists” on page 274
“Creating Selection Lists” on page 274
“Using Selection Lists to Create a Backup Job” on page 277
“Deleting Selection Lists” on page 279
“About the Excludes Selection List” on page 280
About the Excludes Selection List
The Excludes Selection List provides an easy way for you to specify directories and/or
files that you never want to back up. For example, you may have many temporary (*.tmp)
files residing on your local disk. By adding them to the Excludes Selection List, these files
are not backed up or archived.
You can delete the Excludes Selection List. However, if you want to create a new Excludes
Selection List, use “Excludes” as the Selection List name.
280 Administrator’s Guide
Using Selection Lists
▼ To edit the Excludes list:
1. On the Edit menu, click Edit Selection List.
Edit Selection List dialog box
The Name and Type, such as backup or restore, of each selection list appears.
2. Choose Excludes from the Selection lists.
3. Click Edit.
4. If the Excludes list has been previously edited, you can select the Selection rule you
want to edit and click Edit (see “Including or Excluding Files for Backup Using
Advanced File Selection” on page 269), or select the Selection rule you want to remove
and click Delete.
5. If this is the first time the Excludes list is being edited, click Insert (see “Including or
Excluding Files for Backup Using Advanced File Selection” on page 269).
Backing Up
Data
6. Click OK to save your changes and exit the Edit Selection List window.
See also:
“Deleting Selection Lists” on page 279
“Creating Selection Lists” on page 274
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 281
Setting Up User-defined Selections
Setting Up User-defined Selections
You can create shortcuts to shares and save them as user-defined selections. Use this
feature to quickly access shares that have a very long path or that are unavailable when
you are setting up a backup job. You can set up direct access to a share by entering its
UNC name, IP address, or machine name.
A share may be unavailable because the network resources used to locate the machine are
offline, even though the machine may still be running and available. In some cases this
happens because the machine is on the internet and accessible from within the company’s
private network, but cannot be located using just its name or normal browsing methods.
▼ To add a user-defined selection:
1. On the navigation bar, click Backup.
2. On the backup selections pane, expand Remote Selections.
3. Right-click User-defined Selections, and then click User-defined Selections.
4. In the UNC Name field, type the server name and volume name
Example: \\Production\graphics
Note TCP/IP addresses can also be provided for user-defined selections. For example:
\\10.0.0.0. However, Backup Exec does not support virtual servers via IP addresses.
You can also use the computer name.
5. Click Add.
The share appears in the Selections defined section of the dialog box. Repeat steps
4-5 to add additional user-defined selections.
6. When you are finished adding selections, click Close.
The selections that you specified can be selected for backup operations from the
User-defined Selections node.
See also:
“Using Selection Lists” on page 274
“Creating Selection Lists” on page 274
“Using Selection Lists to Create a Backup Job” on page 277
“Deleting Selection Lists” on page 279
282 Administrator’s Guide
Using Backup Job Templates
“Editing Selection Lists” on page 280
“About the Excludes Selection List” on page 280
Using Backup Job Templates
Templates are job attributes that define how and when Backup Exec processes a job.
Templates specify the device, settings, and schedule options to use, but do not include the
resource selections to be used for the backup job. Templates are useful when you want to
create new backup jobs that use the same settings. For example, you may want to define
your backup strategy (see “About Backup Strategies” on page 352) that includes the
media rotation methods. You can reflect this strategy once in your template definition,
and then reuse the template for all resources being protected by the media server.
Using templates offers another advantage when changes in the settings need to be made
to multiple jobs. Rather than editing all jobs that use the same template, you can edit the
template. Backup Exec then applies the template change to all jobs using that template
during the next job processing interval.
Creating a New Backup Template
▼ To create a new backup template:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2. Under Backup Tasks in the task pane, select New job template.
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 283
Using Backup Job Templates
Device and Media options for new template
3. Set up the Device and Media options for this template. See “Device and Media
options for backup job” on page 248 for detailed information about these options.
4. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click General and select options as described
in “General Options for Backup Job Templates” on page 285.
5. Additional options can be set by selecting on the Properties pane additional Settings
options, such as Advanced (see “Advanced Options for Backup Jobs” on page 257)
and Pre/Post Commands (see “Pre/Post Commands for Backup or Restore Jobs” on
page 261).
6. On the Properties pane, under Frequency, click Schedule to set the schedule options
for this template (see “Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
7. Click OK.
See also:
“Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242
“Using Selection Lists to Create a Backup Job” on page 277
284 Administrator’s Guide
Using Backup Job Templates
General Options for Backup Job Templates
General options for backup job templates include the template name and backup method.
These options are set on the New Backup Job Template dialog box. To set these options, on
the Properties pane, under Settings, click General.
New Backup Job Template General options
General options for backup job templates include:
General settings options for new backup job template
Item Description
Template name Type the name for this backup job template.
Backup set description Type a description of the information you are backing up.
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 285
Using Backup Job Templates
General settings options for new backup job template (continued)
Item Description
Backup method for files Select a backup method. Your choices are:
FULL - Back Up Files - Reset Archive Bit. Includes all of the
selected data on a volume and resets the archive bit to indicate
that the files have been backed up.
COPY - Back Up Files. Includes all selected data, and does not
affect any media rotation scheme because the archive bit is not
reset.
DIFFERENTIAL - Changed Files. Includes all files since the last
full backup.
INCREMENTAL - Changed Files - Reset Archive Bit. Includes
only the files that have changed since the last full or incremental
backup and resets the archive bit to indicate that the files have
been backed up.
FULL - Back Up Files - Allow incrementals and differentials
using modified time. Includes all of the selected data on a
volume and allows the use of incrementals and differentials
using the modified date and time stamp.
DIFFERENTIAL - Using modified time. Includes all files since
last full backup using the files’ last modified date and time
stamp.
INCREMENTAL - Using modified time. Includes all files since
the last full or incremental backup using the files’ last modified
date and time stamp.
DAILY - Files that Changed Today. Backs up all files with
today’s date.
WORKING SET - All files last accessed in (x) days. Includes all
files that were created or modified since the last full or
incremental backup. If you select this backup method, you can
then indicate in the Files accessed in x days field that you want
to include data that has been accessed in a specific number of
days.
ARCHIVE - Delete files after successful copy backup. Backs up
the selected data, verifies the media, and then deletes the data
from the volume. For data to be deleted, rights to delete a file
must be granted; otherwise data will be backed up, but not
deleted.
Note Backup Exec does not delete data from Backup Exec Agent
workstations when using the archive feature.
For more information, see “Understanding Backup Methods and
Their Advantages” on page 355.
286 Administrator’s Guide
Using Backup Job Templates
General settings options for new backup job template (continued)
Item Description
Files accessed in x days If you selected the working set backup method in the Backup
method for files field, use this field to specify the number of days for
which to include accessed files.
Note VERITAS recommends that you specify at least 30 days in
order to include the data needed to make your system
operational if you have to restore a working set backup.
Use the Windows Change Select this option if you want to use Windows’ NTFS Change
Journal if available Journal to determine which files have been modified since the
last full backup. This option can only be used with NTFS
volumes and only when the backup method selected is FULL
- Back Up Files - Allows incrementals and differentials
using modified time, DIFFERENTIAL - Using modified
time or INCREMENTAL - Using modified time.
Preserve tree on archive Select this option to retain the directory structure of the files backed
up in an archive job.
Verify after backup Select this option to have Backup Exec automatically perform a
completes verify operation to make sure the media can be read once the backup
has been completed. Verifying all backups is recommended.
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 287
Using Backup Job Templates
General settings options for new backup job template (continued)
Item Description
Compression type Select one of the following:
None. Select this option to copy the data to the media in its
original form (uncompressed). Using some form of data
compression can help expedite backups and preserve storage
media space.
Hardware data compression should not be used in environments
where devices that support hardware compression are used
interchangeably with devices that do not have that functionality.
For example, if a drive that does not support hardware
compression is added to a cascaded drive pool that includes
drives supporting the feature, hardware compression is
automatically disabled. You can manually re-enable hardware
compression on the drives that support it, but this results in
media inconsistency. If the drive that supports hardware
compression fails, the compressed media cannot be restored with
the non-compression drive
Software. Select this option to use STAC™ software data
compression, which compresses the data before it is sent to the
storage device.
Hardware [if available, otherwise none]. Select this option to
use hardware data compression (if the storage device supports
it). If the drive does not feature data compression the data is
backed up uncompressed.
Hardware [if available, otherwise software]. Select this option to
use hardware data compression (if the storage device supports
it). If the drive does not feature hardware data compression,
STAC software compression is used.
288 Administrator’s Guide
Using Backup Job Templates
Editing a Backup Job Template
You can quickly update the settings for all jobs that use the same template by editing the
template rather than the individual jobs.
▼ To edit a job template:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2. On the Backup Job Templates pane, select the template you want to edit.
3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, select Properties.
4. Make the changes you want, and then click OK.
See also:
“Creating a New Backup Template” on page 283
Creating a Copy of a Backup Job Template
You can make a copy of an existing backup job template. You may want to make a copy if
you want to create a new template that uses most of the properties of an existing template.
For example, if you want to create both full and differential backup jobs for resources and
all other job settings will be identical, you can create a template using the full backup
method and copy the template, you can then make changes to the copy through the
template’s Properties (see “Editing a Backup Job Template” on page 289).
▼ To make a copy of a template:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2. In the Backup Job Templates pane, select the template you want to copy.
3. Under Backup Tasks in the task pane, select Copy template.
Backing Up
Data
4. Enter the name of the new template, and then click OK.
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 289
Using Backup Job Templates
Creating a New Backup Job from a Template
Before you can create a backup job from a template, you must have a template with your
specifications for the backup job and a selection list that contains the data you want to
back up. If you do not have a template set up, see “Creating a New Backup Template” on
page 283. If you do not have a selection list set up, see “Creating Selection Lists” on
page 274. If you want to notify a person when the backup job completes, you must also
have this person set up in a recipient list.
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2. Under Backup Tasks, click New job from template.
Template options for new job from template
3. Select the template you want to use for this backup job. If you want to create a new
template for this backup job, click New. Then, refer to “Creating a New Backup
Template” on page 283.
4. On the Properties pane, under Source, click Backup Selection Lists.
5. Choose the selection list you want to use for this backup job. If you want to create a
new selection list for this backup job, click New. Then refer to “Creating Selection
Lists” on page 274.
290 Administrator’s Guide
Using Backup Job Templates
6. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click General and set general options for this
job as described in “General Options for New Job from Template” on page 291.
7. If you want Backup Exec to notify someone when the backup job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification (see “Selecting Recipients for Job
Notification” on page 509).
8. Click Run Now.
The backup job is submitted according to the schedule options you set in the profile.
General Options for New Job from Template
Most options for a backup job created from a template are set when creating the backup
job template. However, you can set some general options, such as the job name, from the
Backup Job Properties dialog box by selecting on the Properties pane, under Settings,
General.
General options for new job from template
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 291
Using Backup Job Templates
General options for a job created from a backup job template include:
General options for new job from template
Item Description
Job name Enter a unique name for the backup job.
Job priority Select the priority level for this job. If another job is scheduled to run at
the same time as this job, the priority you set determines which job runs
first. Your choices are:
Highest
High
Medium
Low
Lowest
Submit job on hold Select this option if you want to submit the job on hold.
Enable automatic Select this item if you want Backup Exec to automatically cancel the
cancellation feature backup job if it does not complete within a specific amount of time after
the scheduled start time. Then, in the Cancel job if not completed
within fields, select the amount of time you want Backup Exec to wait
before canceling the job.
Cancel job if not Indicate the number of minutes or hours you want Backup Exec to wait
completed within x before it cancels the backup job.
292 Administrator’s Guide
Using Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer Interface
Reapplying a Template to Jobs
If you edit a backup job that was created using a backup job template, you receive a
warning that editing the job will break the job’s association with the template. After
editing the job, you should then reapply the template.
▼ To reapply the template to a backup job:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2. From the Backup Job Templates pane, select the template you want to reapply.
3. Under Backup Tasks in the task pane, select Reapply Templates to Jobs.
4. A warning message displays the jobs that will be affected.
5. Click Yes.
Using Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer Interface
Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer interface allows you to select and back up files from
Windows Explorer. Backup Exec’s administration console does not have to be running to
create and submit backup jobs from Windows Explorer; however, Backup Exec services
must be running on the server.
The Windows Explorer interface can be used on the Backup Exec server and any computer
running the Backup Exec Remote Administrator (see “Installing the Backup Exec Remote
Administrator” on page 72).
Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer interface cannot be used to back up databases, such as
Microsoft SQL or Exchange server. To back up a database, use the appropriate Backup
Exec agent. For more information, see “Backup Exec Options” on page 37.
▼ To set up Backup Exec to create backups from Windows Explorer:
Backing Up
1. On the Tools menu, click Options.
2. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click Preferences.
Data
3. Select Enable backup from Windows Explorer.
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 293
Using Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer Interface
4. Click OK.
The Back up with Backup Exec option will now appear on the Windows Explorer
shortcut menu.
See also:
“Backup Exec Defaults” on page 90
“Submitting a Backup Job from Windows Explorer” on page 297
“Archiving Data” on page 300
Specifying or Changing Backup Settings for Windows
Explorer
The first time you submit a backup job using the Backup Exec Windows Explorer
interface, you must specify logon information for the media server and enter a backup
device name. The Backup Settings dialog box allows you to save the settings, which are
used for subsequent backup jobs submitted from Windows Explorer. If you do not save
the settings, you need to enter the logon information and the backup device name each
time you submit a backup job from Windows Explorer.
▼ To specify or change settings for a backup job from Windows Explorer:
1. From Windows Explorer, right-click any file or folder.
2. Select Back up with Backup Exec from the shortcut menu.
Note If you have already specified and saved backup job settings, the Backup dialog box
appears. You can change backup job settings from the Backup dialog box. For more
information, see “Submitting a Backup Job from Windows Explorer” on page 297.
294 Administrator’s Guide
Using Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer Interface
Backup Settings dialog box
3. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Backup Settings options
Name Description
Server Name Type the name of the media server on which Backup Exec is
installed.
Remote Server Login
User Name View or change the user name. The default is the name of the user
currently logged on to the machine. You can enter a different user
or administrator.
Note If you are logged on as part of a workgroup, the user
domain is your local machine name.
Backing Up
Password Type the password for the user.
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 295
Using Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer Interface
Backup Settings options (continued)
Name Description
Backup Options
Job Name View or change the job name. The utility generates a unique name
for the backup job in the format: Backup <local machine
name><numeric ID>. If the job name exceeds 25 characters, the
utility truncates the local machine name. For example:
For a backup run on a machine named ADMN-30PAYROLL, the
utility could generate the job name Backup ADMN-30P 960576233.
If you change the default job name, you must ensure it is a unique
job name.
Device Name Type the name of the backup device.
Include subdirectories in Select this option to include all subfolders within the selected
backup folders in the backup job.
Save Settings Select this option to save the backup settings as defaults for
subsequent backup jobs.
Note You must submit a backup job to save the settings in the
Registry.
Clear this option if you want to change the settings for a single
backup job but keep the defaults saved in the Registry.
Job Status View the status of a job, confirmation and error messages, and the
job ID.
4. Click Submit Job.
See also:
“Archiving Data” on page 300
296 Administrator’s Guide
Using Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer Interface
Submitting a Backup Job from Windows Explorer
After you have enabled Backup Exec to use the Windows Explorer interface and specified
the backup settings, you can submit backup jobs from Windows Explorer.
Note The first time you run a backup on a resource, you must use the Backup Exec
graphical user interface. If the first backup on a resource is from the Windows
Explorer interface, the job will fail and will continue to fail until you run a job from
Backup Exec.
▼ To submit a backup job from Windows Explorer:
1. From Windows Explorer, select the files or folders you want to back up.
2. Right-click the selected files or folders and select Back up with Backup Exec from the
shortcut menu.
Selecting Back up with Backup Exec from Windows Explorer
Backing Up
Data
Note If you have not yet saved backup job settings, the Backup Settings dialog box
appears. You must specify settings before submitting a backup job. For more
information, see “Specifying or Changing Backup Settings for Windows Explorer”
on page 294.
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 297
Using Backup Exec’s Windows Explorer Interface
Backup dialog box
3. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Backup options
Name Description
Job Name View or change the job name. The utility generates a unique name
for the backup job in the format: Backup local machine name
numeric ID. If the job name exceeds 25 characters, the utility
truncates the local machine name. For example:
For a backup run on a machine named ADMN-30PAYROLL, the
utility could generate the job name Backup ADMN-30P 960576233.
If you change the default job name, you must ensure it is a unique
job name.
Include Subdirectories in Select this option to include all subfolders within the selected
Backup folders in the backup job.
Job Status View the status of a job, confirmation and error messages, and the
job ID.
Note The backup job defaults to the options set in the Backup tab. For more information,
see “Setting Default Backup Options” on page 320.
298 Administrator’s Guide
Running a One-button Backup Job
4. Click Submit Job.
5. Click Close Dialog after the backup job has been submitted and confirmed.
Note To submit another backup job, you must close the Backup dialog box.
See also:
“Specifying or Changing Backup Settings for Windows Explorer” on page 294
“Submitting a Backup Job from Windows Explorer” on page 297
Running a One-button Backup Job
One-button backup quickly backs up the local media server using the backup defaults.
With one-button backup, you cannot select data or set options for the backup. After you
select one-button backup, the backup job is submitted immediately using your default
logon account and the default backup selections and settings.
If you want to perform a one-button backup of a system where Backup-to-Disk folders are
located, VERITAS recommends that you add the Backup-to-Disk folders to the Excludes
Selection List. If you do not exclude Backup-to-Disk folders, data is continuously added to
the folders during the one-button backup, which uses all the free drive space.
You can back up the following with one-button backup:
◆ Local drives that do not use removable media
◆ Lotus Domino resources
◆ Windows NT System State
◆ Windows NT Utility Partition
◆ Windows NT Shadow Copy Device
◆ Microsoft SQL Server databases
◆ Microsoft Sharepoint Portal Server
Backing Up
◆ Microsoft Exchange 5.5 Directory
◆ Microsoft Exchange 5.5 and 2000 Information Store Data
◆ Microsoft Exchange 2000 Key Management Service (KMS) and Site Replication
Service (SRS)
You cannot back up the following types of data with one-button backup:
◆ Microsoft SQL Server filegroup resources
◆ Microsoft Sharepoint Portal Server workspaces
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 299
Archiving Data
◆ Microsoft Exchange individual mailboxes and public folders
◆ Microsoft Exchange 2000 installable filesystem (IFS) drive (usually M:)
▼ To run a one-button backup job:
1. On the navigation bar, click Overview.
Note You can also run a one-button backup job from the Backup Exec Assistant. To
activate the Backup Exec Assistant, on the Tools menu, select Backup Exec
Assistant.
2. On the Properties pane, under Views, select Information desk.
3. On the Information Desk, under Getting Started, click Back up this media server
now with One-button backup.
Backup Exec submits the job to the job queue.
Archiving Data
With Backup Exec’s archive feature, you can free valuable disk space and reduce clutter
on your server volume by migrating stagnant directories and files from the server to
media.
If you select archive as your backup method when creating a job, Backup Exec backs up
the selected data, verifies the media, and then deletes the data from the volume.
Note For data to be deleted, rights to delete a file must be granted; otherwise data will be
backed up, but not deleted.
Backup Exec does not delete data from Backup Exec Agent workstations when using
the archive feature.
During an archive job, Backup Exec automatically performs a verify operation after the
data is backed up. If the verify operation fails, the archive job stops and you are notified. If
you get a verification failure, investigate the problem by viewing the job log, try to correct
the problem, and then retry the archive operation. After the data is backed up and
verified, Backup Exec automatically deletes the data included in the archive job. The job
log contains a list of the data that was deleted.
Note If the checkpoint restart setting is enabled for an archive backup job that is resumed
when a cluster failover occurs, the files selected for archive are not automatically
deleted from the source volume after the backup completes.
300 Administrator’s Guide
Archiving Data
Archiving Data Using Disk Grooming
The archive operation can be used to perform disk grooming, which uses Windows’ last
access date to move obsolete files from the server to media.
Note The NTFS file system supports the last access date capability as does the VFAT file
system under Windows NT. However, files accessed while the VFAT file system is
used under DOS are not selected.
▼ To perform an archive operation:
1. On the navigation bar, click Backup.
2. Click Advanced.
3. For each resource you want to archive:
a. On Drives selections, select the resource.
b. Click Files not accessed in x days. Then, type or select the number of days (up to
999) to use as the criteria for selecting files.
At this time, you may specify other criteria for data you want to include in the
operation. For example, type *.doc in the File field to groom all of your document files
not accessed in the number of days specified in the Files not accessed in x days field.
c. Click OK.
4. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click General, and then select Archive as the
backup method.
5. Complete the backup job options following the procedures described in “Creating a
Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242.
See also:
Backing Up
“Including or Excluding Files for Backup Using Advanced File Selection” on page 269
“Archive Backups” on page 359 Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 301
Using Resource Discovery to Search for New Resources
Using Resource Discovery to Search for New Resources
Backup Exec’s Resource Discovery feature allows detection of new backup resources
within a Windows domain. Using this feature, you can create and schedule a job that
searches for new server volumes or databases. You can specify which types of resources to
include in the search, and can have Backup Exec send a notification when a new resource
is discovered.
Using the discovered resources identified in the job log, you can then create a backup job
to ensure that the new resource is protected.
The Remote Agent is required to discover resources on remote computers. However,
installing a MAPI client on the media server enables Exchange resources to be discovered
on remote resources on which the Remote Agent is not installed.
On Windows Server 2003 resources, Backup Exec’s Resource Discovery feature will detect
the Shadow Copy Components; it will not detect System State.
▼ To create a resource discovery job:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2. Under Backup Strategy Tasks in the task pane, select New job to automatically
discover resources.
Target options for resource discovery job
302 Administrator’s Guide
Using Resource Discovery to Search for New Resources
3. Select the domain you want Backup Exec to search for new resources.
4. If you need to change the logon account for the domain, click Change Logon Account
and enter or select the logon credentials to access this domain.
Note If you are using BEWAC, you can only choose a pre-defined logon account. You
cannot create or edit a logon account.
5. If you want to exclude computers from the search, see “Excluding Computers from a
Resource Search” on page 306.
6. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click General and complete the options
described in “General Options for Resource Discovery Job” on page 304.
7. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click Resources and complete the options
described in “Resources Options for a Resource Discovery Job” on page 305.
8. If you want Backup Exec to notify someone when this job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification (see “Selecting Recipients for Job
Notification” on page 509).
9. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
“Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 303
Using Resource Discovery to Search for New Resources
General Options for Resource Discovery Job
General options for a resource discovery job can be set through the Resource Discover Job
dialog box. To set the options, on the Properties pane, under Settings, click General.
General settings for resource discovery job
Options on this dialog box include:
General settings options for resource discovery job
Item Description
Job name Enter the name for this job.
Job priority Select the priority level for this job. If another job is scheduled to run at
the same time as this job, the priority you set determines which job runs
first. Your choices are:
Highest
High
Medium
Low
Lowest
304 Administrator’s Guide
Using Resource Discovery to Search for New Resources
Resources Options for a Resource Discovery Job
You can specify types of resources to discover and set some notification options through
the Resources options dialog box. To set resource options, from the Resource Discovery
Job dialog box, on the Properties pane, under Settings, click Resources.
Options for this dialog box include:
Resources options for resource discovery job
Item Description
Select the types of resources to automatically discover
Network administrative Select this option if you want Backup Exec to search for new
shares administrative network shares or volumes.
Network user shares Select this option if you want Backup Exec to search for new
user-defined shares.
Microsoft SQL Select this option if you want Backup Exec to search for new Microsoft
databases SQL databases.
Microsoft Exchange Select this option if you want Backup Exec to search for new Microsoft
servers Exchange servers. Backup Exec searches for Information Store,
Exchange Directory, or Storage Groups; it does not discover individual
databases under storage groups.
Lotus Domino Select this option if you want Backup Exec to search for new Lotus
databases Domino databases.
System State/Shadow Select this option if you want Backup Exec to search for new System
Copy Components State resources or shadow copy components.
When new resources are discovered:
Backing Up
Send separate Select this option if you want Backup Exec to send separate
notification for each notifications when each new resource is found.
Data
new resource found
Send one notification Select this option if you want Backup Exec to send out a single
for all new resources notification for all new resources found.
found
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 305
Using Resource Discovery to Search for New Resources
Resources options for resource discovery job (continued)
Item Description
Include previously Select this option if you want Backup Exec to send a notification that
discovered resources includes all resources previously found during resource discovery jobs.
when sending
notification
Excluding Computers from a Resource Search
When creating a resource discovery job, you can select to exclude one or more computers
in the domain from the resource search.
▼ To exclude computers from the resource search:
1. After selecting the domains for Backup Exec to search for new resources (see “Using
Resource Discovery to Search for New Resources” on page 302), on the Properties
pane, under Target, click Exclude.
2. In the Domain field, select the domain that contains the servers you want to exclude.
3. From the list below the Domain field, select the server you want to exclude, and then
click Exclude.
To select consecutive servers, click the first item, press and hold <Shift>, and then
click the last item. To select servers that are not consecutive, press and hold <Ctrl>,
and then click each item.
Note Alternatively, you can type the name of the server in the Servers excluded field, and
then click Add. To exclude multiple servers at one time, type a space between the
name of each server.
Tip To remove a server from the list of excluded servers, select it and then click Include
to return it to the list of included servers. You can also select multiple servers
simultaneously.
4. Continue creating the resource discovery job.
306 Administrator’s Guide
Duplicating Backed Up Data
Duplicating Backed Up Data
You can create a job to duplicate backup data, selecting either to duplicate existing backup
sets or to duplicate backup sets immediately following a scheduled job.
If you select to duplicate existing backup sets, the backup sets you select from catalogs are
read from the source media and written to the selected destination, such as a drive, drive
pool, or backup folder. You can schedule when this type of job runs.
If you select to duplicate backup sets following a job, you select a scheduled backup job as
the source. That backup job runs first, and then the backup sets it created are copied to the
destination you selected for the duplicate job. To duplicate backup sets following a job, the
backup job must be scheduled to run and must not be associated with any other duplicate
jobs. You cannot schedule this job; instead, the duplicate job runs only after the related, or
linked, backup job completes.
▼ To duplicate backup data:
1. From the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2. Under Backup Tasks, select New job to duplicate backup data.
3. If you want to copy existing backup sets to another destination:
a. Select Duplicate existing backup sets, and then click OK.
b. Select the backup sets you want to copy.
4. If you want to duplicate backup sets created when a scheduled backup job runs:
a. Select Duplicate backup sets following a job, and then click OK.
b. Select the scheduled backup job to be used as the source.
5. On the Properties pane, under Destination, select Device and Media, and complete
Backing Up
these options as described in “Device and Media Options for Backup Jobs and
Templates” on page 247.
6. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click General, and complete these options as Data
described in “General Options for a Duplicate Job” on page 308.
7. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click Advanced, and complete these options
as described in “Advanced Options for a Duplicate Job” on page 310.
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 307
Duplicating Backed Up Data
8. If you want Backup Exec to notify someone when the backup job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification (see “Selecting Recipients for Job
Notification” on page 509).
9. If you are duplicating data from a scheduled backup job, click Run Now.
The duplicate job will launch immediately following the completion of the scheduled
backup job.
10. If you are duplicating data from an existing backup set, either click Run Now or
under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
“Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
General Options for a Duplicate Job
General options for duplicate job
General options for a duplicate job include:
General settings for New Duplicate Job
Item Description
Job name Type the name for this backup job.
308 Administrator’s Guide
Duplicating Backed Up Data
General settings (continued)for New Duplicate Job (continued)
Item Description
Job priority Select the priority level for this job. If another job is scheduled to run at
the same time as this job, the priority you set determines which job runs
first. Your choices are:
Highest
High
Medium
Low
Lowest
Backup set description Type a description of the information you are backing up.
Preferred source device Select the device used as the destination device for the original backup
job.
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 309
Duplicating Backed Up Data
Advanced Options for a Duplicate Job
Advanced options for a duplicate job
Advanced options that can be set for a duplicate job include:
Advanced options for duplicate job
Item Description
Verify after backup Select this option to have Backup Exec automatically perform a verify
completes operation to make sure the media can be read after the backup has been
completed. Verifying all backups is recommended.
310 Administrator’s Guide
Duplicating Backed Up Data
Advanced options for duplicate job (continued)
Item Description
Compression type Select one of the following:
None. Select this option to copy the data to the media in its original
form (uncompressed). Using some form of data compression can
help expedite backups and preserve storage media space.
Hardware data compression should not be used in environments
where devices that support hardware compression are used
interchangeably with devices that do not have that functionality.
For example, if a drive that does not support hardware compression
is added to a cascaded drive pool that includes drives supporting
the feature, hardware compression is automatically disabled. You
can manually re-enable hardware compression on the drives that
support it, but this results in media inconsistency. If the drive that
supports hardware compression fails, the compressed media cannot
be restored with the non-compression drive
Hardware [if available, otherwise none]. Select this option to use
hardware data compression (if the storage device supports it). If the
drive does not feature data compression the data is backed up
uncompressed.
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 311
Verifying a Backup
Verifying a Backup
In addition to the verification of files that is done when a backup or archive job runs, you
can submit verify jobs to test the integrity of the media.
If the Write checksums to media option is selected as a default backup option, checksums
are calculated for each data stream written to tape, and then written in a separate stream
immediately following the data stream. If this option is not selected, backup performance
may be improved, but there will be no way to verify the integrity of the data on the tape.
Performing a verify operation when there are no checksums written for the set only
verifies that the set can be read without getting a translation error.
If you perform a verify operation and files fail to verify, the media may be bad. Details
about files that failed to verify are provided in the job log, which can be viewed from the
Job Monitor.
▼ To create a verify job:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2. Under Backup Tasks in the task pane, select New job to verify backup data.
3. Select the media you want to verify.
Note The default view is the Resource view, which lists data by the device from which it
was backed up. The Media view lists the data that is contained on a piece of media.
To switch views, under View by, select the view you want to use. In addition, you
can set Backup Exec to display the selections in a graphic format or a text format. To
switch the format, select either Graphical or Text from the View format section.
4. On the Properties pane, under Destination, click Device.
5. Select the device that contains the media you want to verify.
6. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click General.
7. Select the appropriate options as follows:
General Verify dialog box
Item Description
Job Name Type a name that describes the data you are verifying.
312 Administrator’s Guide
Verifying a Backup
General Verify dialog box
Job priority Select the priority level for this job. If another job is scheduled to
run at the same time as this job, the priority you set determines
which job runs first. Your choices are:
Highest
High
Medium
Low
Lowest
8. If you want Backup Exec to notify someone when the backup job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification (see “Selecting Recipients for Job
Notification” on page 509).
9. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
“Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
After verification has completed, you can check the results in the job log.
See also:
“Setting Default Backup Options” on page 320
“Verify after backup completes” on page 310
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 313
Creating a Test Run Job
Creating a Test Run Job
The Backup Exec test run option determines if a scheduled backup will complete
successfully. When you run a test job, you can monitor the job just as you would a normal
backup job, but no data is backed up. During the test run, the tape capacity, credentials,
and media are checked. If there is an error, the job will continue to run and the error will
appear in the job log. Notification can also be sent to a designated recipient.
During a test run job, the following may cause a job to fail:
◆ The logon credentials are incorrect.
◆ Insufficient media is available.
◆ Media is not in the drive.
◆ There is no overwritable media for an overwrite job.
◆ There is no appendable media for an append job.
Test run jobs that are targeted to All Drives will fail the test if any of the devices in the All
Drives drive pool cannot handle the job. For example, if one of the devices does not have
any media.
A test run job checks media capacity available for the selected job. However, you can
check if there is enough available media for multiple test run jobs in the Test Run Results
report.
Note Before you create a test run job, VERITAS recommends that you run backup jobs to
your devices first. Backup Exec does not recognize the capacity of a backup device
until an actual backup job is targeted to the device. If you create a test run job before
any other jobs, Backup Exec cannot check that the device has sufficient capacity to
perform the backup job. After at least one backup job has been targeted to a device,
Backup Exec can determine the capacity.
▼ To create a test run of a job:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2. In the Jobs pane, select the job for which you want to create a test run.
3. Under General Tasks, click Test Run.
4. Select General options as described in “General Options for Test Run Jobs” on
page 316.
314 Administrator’s Guide
Creating a Test Run Job
5. If you want Backup Exec to notify a recipient when the backup job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification (see “Selecting Recipients for Job
Notification” on page 509).
6. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
“Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
See also:
“Viewing General Media Properties” on page 226
“Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242
“Test Run Results Report” on page 546
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 315
Creating a Test Run Job
General Options for Test Run Jobs
General settings options for test run job
General options for a test run job include:
General settings options for test run job
Item Description
Job name Type a name for the test run job.
Credentials check Select this check box to verify that the Backup Exec logon account is
correct for the resources being backed up.
Media capacity check to Select this check box to test if there is enough available capacity on the
complete individual job media to complete the job.
Note During the test run job, the number of scheduled jobs in the
queue is not checked; therefore, jobs that are scheduled before the
test run job may use the media that was available when the test
run job was performed.
Media check Select this check box to test whether the media is online and
overwritable.
316 Administrator’s Guide
Creating a Test Run Job
General settings options for test run job (continued)
Item Description
Method for determining job size
Use previous job Select this option to use past job histories to determine whether there is
history, if available enough media available to run the scheduled backup job. Checking the
previous job history is faster than performing a pre-scan.
Perform Pre-scan Select this option to enable Backup Exec to scan the scheduled backup
job to determine whether there is enough media available to run the job.
This is the most accurate method of determining media capacity and
should be selected if there is not an existing job history.
Upon any failure, place Select this option to have the scheduled job placed on hold if any
the scheduled job on failures are detected during the test run.
hold
Run at priority Select the priority level for the test job. If another job is scheduled to run
at the same time as this job, the priority you set determines which job
runs first. Your choices are:
Highest
High
Medium
Low
Lowest
See also:
“Viewing General Media Properties” on page 226
“Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242
“Test Run Results Report” on page 546
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 317
Creating a Test Run Job
Setting Test Run Default Options
▼ To set test run default options:
1. On the Tools menu, click Options.
2. On the Properties pane, under Job Defaults, click Test Run.
Test Run default options
318 Administrator’s Guide
Creating a Test Run Job
3. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Default options for test run jobs
Item Description
Check credentials Select this check box to verify that the Backup Exec logon account is
correct for the resources being backed up.
Check media capacity Select this check box to test if there is enough available capacity on
to complete job the media to complete the job.
Note During the test run job, the number of scheduled jobs in the
queue is not checked; therefore, jobs that are scheduled before
the test run job may use the media that was available when the
test run job was performed.
Check media Select this check box to test whether the media is online and
availability overwritable.
Use previous job Select this option to use past job histories to determine whether
history, if available there is enough media available to run the scheduled backup job.
Checking the previous job history is faster than performing a
pre-scan.
Perform Pre-scan Select this option to enable Backup Exec to scan the scheduled
backup job to determine whether there is enough media available to
run the job. This is the most accurate method of determining media
capacity and should be selected if there is not an existing job history.
Place the job on hold if Select this option to have the scheduled job placed on hold if any
any failure occurs failures are detected during the test run.
4. Click OK.
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 319
Setting Default Backup Options
Setting Default Backup Options
You can set up Backup Exec with the settings that you want to use for most backup
operations, such as the backup method and compression type. If the default options are
not appropriate for a particular backup job, you can override the default options when
you set up a backup job.
▼ To configure backup options:
1. On the Tools menu, click Options.
2. On the Properties pane, under Job Defaults, click Backup.
Default backup options
320 Administrator’s Guide
Setting Default Backup Options
3. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Backup default options
Item Definition
Backup method for files Select the default Backup method. FULL - Back Up Files - Reset
Archive Bit is the typical selection for this field. For more
information about backup methods, see “Understanding Backup
Methods and Their Advantages” on page 355.
Files accessed in x days When the Working Set backup method is selected, use this field to
specify the number of days for which to include accessed files.
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 321
Setting Default Backup Options
Backup default options (continued)
Item Definition
Media overwrite Select one of the following media overwrite options:
protection Overwrite media. Select this option to place this backup on an
overwritable media. Make sure that appropriate media is in
the stand-alone drive or drive pool you select in the Device
field in this dialog box.
The media in the drive is overwritten if the media is scratch or
recyclable (its overwrite protection period has expired). If
allocated or imported media are in the drive, they may also be
overwritten depending on the Media Overwrite Protection
Level that is set. For more information, see “Media Overwrite
Protection Levels” on page 196.
If the media in the drive is not overwritable, a message is
displayed requesting that you insert overwritable media.
Append to media, overwrite if no appendable media is
available. Select this option to add this backup to the media
set listed in the Media Set field in the General applications
dialog box (see “Options - Set Application Defaults -
Preferences” on page 91). The backup set is appended if an
appendable media is available in the selected media set; if not,
an overwritable media is used and added to the media set.
If an append job fills a media, the job continues on another
piece of overwritable media.
Depending on your configuration, overwritable media is
selected from Scratch media or Recyclable media. For more
information, see “Media Overwrite Options” on page 198.
If the media in the drive is not overwritable, a message is
displayed requesting that you insert overwritable media.
Append to media, terminate job if no appendable media is
available. Select this option to add this backup to the media
set listed in the Media Set field in the General applications
dialog box (see “Options - Set Application Defaults -
Preferences” on page 91). The backup set is appended if an
appendable media is available in the selected media set; if not,
the job is terminated.
322 Administrator’s Guide
Setting Default Backup Options
Backup default options (continued)
Item Definition
Compression type Select one of the following compression types:
None. Select this option to copy the data to the media in its
original form (uncompressed).
Note Using some form of data compression can help expedite
backups and preserve storage media space.
Software. Select this option to use STAC™ software data
compression, which compresses the data before it is sent to
the storage device.
Hardware [if available, otherwise none]. Select this option to
use hardware data compression (if the storage device
supports it). If the drive does not feature data compression,
the data is backed up uncompressed.
Hardware [if available, otherwise software]. Select this
option to use hardware data compression (if the storage
device supports it). If the drive does not feature hardware
data compression, STAC software compression is used.
Verify after backup Select this option if you want backups to be verified after they are
completed. Verify operations make sure the media can be read
once the backup has been completed. Verifying all backups is
recommended.
Write checksums to Select this option if checksums are to be calculated for each data
media stream written to tape, and then written in a separate stream
immediately following the data stream. If this option is not
selected, backup performance may be improved, but there is no
way to verify the integrity of the data on the tape; Backup Exec
can only verify that the data can be read from the device.
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 323
Setting Default Backup Options
Backup default options (continued)
Item Definition
Back up files and Select this check box to back up the information for the junction
directories by following points and the files and directories to which they are linked. If this
junction points check box is not selected, then only the information for the
junction points is backed up; the files and directories to which
they are linked are not backed up.
If you use junction points created by linkd.exe (or a similar tool)
to span volumes, then Advanced Open File Option (AOFO)
backups and Change Journal incremental backups will not follow
the junction points properly. To perform AOFO and Change
Journal incremental backups of volumes with junction points,
clear this option. Junction points created by Disk Manager or
mountvol.exe are supported.
Note Since Mounted Drives that do not have a drive letter
assigned to them cannot be selected, the files and directories
to which they are linked are backed up regardless of
whether this option is selected.
If this option is selected and the actual files and directories
to which the junction points are linked are also included in
the backup selections, then the files and directories are
backed up twice; once during the full file and directory
backup, and again via the junction point.
WARNING: If a junction point is linked to a location that
encompasses it, then recursion (a situation where data is backed
up repeatedly) will occur, resulting in an error and job failure. For
example, if c:\junctionpoint is linked to c:\, recursion will occur
when attempting to back up c:\junctionpoint, and the backup job
will fail.
324 Administrator’s Guide
Setting Default Backup Options
Backup default options (continued)
Item Definition
Back up data in Remote Select this check box to back up data that has been migrated from
Storage primary storage to secondary storage. The data will not be
recalled to its original location; it will be backed up directly to the
backup media.
If this option is selected, you should not run a backup of your
entire system because Backup Exec will have to load the data that
has been migrated to secondary storage and additional time will
be required for any set that includes migrated data.
If this check box is cleared, only the placeholder that stores the
location of the data on secondary storage will be backed up, not
the data itself.
Note This option should not be selected if the device used for
secondary storage and backups contains only one drive
because Remote Storage and Backup Exec will compete for
use of the drive.
Use Change Journal if Select this option if you want to use Windows’ NTFS Change
available Journal to determine which files have been modified since the last
full backup. This option can only be used with NTFS volumes and
only when the backup method selected is FULL - Back Up Files
- Allow incrementals and differentials using modified
time, DIFFERENTIAL - Using modified time or
INCREMENTAL - Using modified time.
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 325
Setting Default Backup Options
Backup default options (continued)
Item Definition
Enable single instance Select this option if you want Backup Exec to protect Single
backup for NTFS Instance Store (SIS) volumes. SIS, which is used by Remote
volumes Installation Services to save disk space, maintains a single
physical copy of all identical files on a specified volume. If SIS
finds an identical file on the volume, a copy of the original file is
placed in the SIS and a link is made to the actual physical location.
By selecting this option, Backup Exec will back up the physical
file one time, no matter how many links have been created.
Caution If the backup job does not run to completion, the
file data may not be included in the backup set.
Rerun the backup until it is successfully
completed.
If the incremental backup method was used,
running the job again will not back up the same
files. You must run a full or copy backup to
ensure that all files are backed up completely. If
the incremental - using modified time backup
method was used, running the same backup job
to completion will back up the files correctly.
326 Administrator’s Guide
Setting Default Backup Options
Backup default options (continued)
Item Definition
Open file backup when Advanced Open File Option is not used
Never Select this option to have Backup Exec skip open files if they are
encountered during the backup operation. A listing of skipped
files appears in the job log for the backup.
If closed within x Select this option to have Backup Exec wait the specified time
seconds interval for files to close before skipping the open file and
continuing the backup operation.
If the file does not close during the specified interval, it is
skipped. A listing of skipped files appears in the job log for the
backup.
Note If multiple files are open, Backup Exec waits the specified
time interval for each file; depending on the number of
open files, this may significantly increase the backup time.
With a lock Select this option to have Backup Exec attempt to open files that
are in use. If Backup Exec is able to open a file, the file is locked
while it is being backed up to prevent other processes from
writing to it. Backing up open files is not as effective as closing
applications and allowing the files to be backed up in a consistent
state.
Without a lock Select this option to have Backup Exec attempt to open an in use.
If Backup Exec is able to open the file, the file is NOT locked while
it is being backed up. This allows other applications to write data
to the file during the backup operation.
WARNING: This option allows files to be backed up that contain
inconsistent data and possibly corrupt data.
For information about the Advanced Open File Option, see
“VERITAS Backup Exec - Advanced Open File Option” on
Backing Up
page 977.
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 327
Setting Default Pre/Post Commands
Setting Default Pre/Post Commands
You can set defaults for the commands you want to run before or after all backup and
restore jobs. If the default options are not appropriate for a particular job, you can
override the default options when you create the job.
Conditions that you can set for these commands include:
◆ Run the backup or restore job only if the pre-job command is successful
◆ Run the post-job command only if the pre-job command is successful
◆ Run the post-job command even if the backup or restore job fails
◆ Allow Backup Exec to check the return codes (or exit codes) of the pre- and post-job
commands to determine if the commands completed successfully. An exit code of zero
returned to the operating system by the pre- or post-job command is interpreted by
Backup Exec to mean the job completed successfully. A non-zero exit code is
interpreted by Backup Exec to mean the job ended with an error.
If it is critical that the job not run if the pre-job command fails, then configure Backup Exec
to check the return codes of the pre- and post-job commands to determine if the pre-job
command failed or completed successfully.
For example, if a pre-job command that shuts down a database before a backup is run
fails, the database could be corrupted when the backup is run. In this situation, it is critical
that the backup job not run if the pre-job command fails.
Additionally, if Backup Exec is configured to check the return codes of the pre- and
post-job commands, and the post-job command returns a non-zero code, the job log
reports that the post-job command failed. If you also selected to run the job only if the
pre-job command is successful, and both the pre-job command and the job ran
successfully, Backup Exec will mark the job as failed if the post-job command fails.
For example, if the pre-job command runs successfully and shuts down the database and
the backup job also runs successfully, but the post-job command cannot restart the
database, Backup Exec marks the job and the post-job command as failed.
If you select the option On each server backed up, the pre- and post-commands are run
and completed for each server before processing begins on the next selected server.
▼ To set pre/post command options:
1. On the Tools menu, click Options.
2. On the Properties pane, under Job Defaults, click Pre/Post Commands.
328 Administrator’s Guide
Setting Default Pre/Post Commands
3. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Pre-job and Post-job options
Item Description
Pre-job and post-job commands
Run job only if pre-job Select this option to run the backup or restore job only if the
command is successful pre-job command is successful. If the pre-job command fails, the
job does not run, and is marked as failed.
Backing Up
If it is critical that the job not run if the pre-job command fails,
then select Allow pre- and post-job commands to be successful
Data
only if completed with a return code of zero. If a non-zero code
is returned, it is interpreted by Backup Exec to mean that the
pre-job command did not run successfully. The job is not run and
the job status is marked as Failed.
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 329
Setting Default Pre/Post Commands
Pre-job and Post-job options (continued)
Item Description
Run post-job command Select this option to run the post-job command only if the pre-job
only if pre-job command command is successful.
is successful If it is critical that the post-job command fail if the pre-job
command fails, then select Allow pre- and post job commands to
be successful only if completed with a return code of zero. If a
non-zero code is returned for the pre-job command, it is
interpreted by Backup Exec to mean that the pre-job command
did not run successfully. The post-job command is not run.
If you also select Run job only if pre-job command is successful,
and both the pre-job command and the job are successful, but the
post-job command returns a non-zero code, the job log reports
both the job and the post-job command as failed.
Run post-job command Select this option if it is critical to run the post-job command
even if job fails regardless if the job is successful or not.
If you also select Allow pre- and post job commands to be
successful only if completed with a return code of zero and the
post-job command returns a non-zero code, the job log reports the
post-job command as failed.
Allow pre- and post-job Select this option to allow Backup Exec to check the return codes
commands to be of the pre- and post-job commands to determine if they
successful only if completed successfully.
completed with a return An exit code of zero returned to the operating system by the pre-
code of zero or post-job command is interpreted by Backup Exec to mean the
job completed successfully. A non-zero exit code is interpreted by
Backup Exec to mean the job ended with an error.
After checking the return codes, Backup Exec continues
processing according to selections you made for running the pre-
and post-job commands.
If this option is not selected, the success of the pre- and post-job
commands is not determined based on the return code.
Cancel command if not Select the number of minutes Backup Exec should wait before
completed within x canceling a pre-job or post-job command that did not complete.
minutes The default time-out is 30 minutes.
Run these commands
On this media server Select this option to run the pre- and post-job commands on this
media server only.
330 Administrator’s Guide
Setting Default Pre/Post Commands
Pre-job and Post-job options (continued)
Item Description
On each server backed Select this option to run the pre- and post-job commands one time
up on each server backed up.
The pre- and post-job command selections apply to each server
independently. If you select this option, the pre- and
post-commands are run and completed for each server before
processing begins on the next selected server.
4. Click OK.
See also:
“Pre/Post Commands for Backup or Restore Jobs” on page 261
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 331
Specifying Backup Networks
Specifying Backup Networks
The Backup Network feature allows you to direct primary backup traffic generated by
Backup Exec to a specific local network. Directing backup jobs to a specified local network
isolates the backup data so that other connected networks are not affected when backup
operations are performed. You also can use a backup network when restoring data. The
feature is enabled on the media server and allows you to protect all the remote computers
that reside on the specified local network.
When the feature is enabled and a backup job is submitted, Backup Exec verifies that the
media server and the remote computer are located on the specified local network. If both
the media server and the remote computer are on the backup network, then the backup
operation is performed.
If the media server or the remote computer is not on the specified local network, the job
fails. However, you can set up Backup Exec to use any available network to back up
remote computers that are not connected to the backup network. The following diagram
shows an example of a basic backup network configuration.
Example of backup network
Backup Exec
IP address: 128.10.0.1
media server
backup network
network ID: 128.10.0.0
subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
router A
IP address: 128.10.0.2 IP address:
128.10.0.3
IP address: 128.20.0.2 IP address: 128.20.0.3
router B
database server mail server
running Remote Agent running Remote Agent
corporate network
network ID: 128.20.0.0
subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
database user mail user database and mail
user
332 Administrator’s Guide
Specifying Backup Networks
In the example, the database server and mail server are connected to both the backup
network and the corporate network.
When backup operations are performed by the Backup Exec media server, the backup
data will use either the backup network or the corporate network to back up the database
server. If the backup data goes through the corporate network, the amount of time it takes
to back up the database server will increase because the network route between the two
computers is longer. This may cause users to experience network latencies when accessing
the mail server since there is an increase in network traffic.
In contrast, if the Specified Backup Network feature is enabled and you back up the
database server, the backup data traffic is isolated to the backup network and users
accessing the mail server are not affected. The backup network will be used to perform all
backup operations, unless the remote computer is not connected to the backup network.
If you want to back up remote computers that are not connected to the backup network,
such as the database user’s computer, then choose to use any available network route.
This allows you to back up the remote computer even though it does not reside on the
backup network.
See also:
“Using Backup Exec with Firewalls” on page 340
“Browsing Systems Through a Firewall” on page 342
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 333
Specifying Backup Networks
Specifying the Default Backup Network
You can specify a network to be used as the default for every Backup Exec job. Before
configuring the feature, test for network connectivity between the media server and the
remote computers.
Note The remote computers that you want to back up must have the most current version
of Backup Exec Remote Agent installed.
▼ To set the default backup network:
1. On the Tools menu, click Options.
2. On the Properties pane, under Job Defaults, click Network.
Network options dialog box
334 Administrator’s Guide
Specifying Backup Networks
3. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Network Options - Set Application Defaults
Item Description
Enable selection of Select this option to enable selection of Windows default shares.
default shares
Enable selection of user Select this option to enable selection of Windows user shares.
selections
Default Network
Network Interface Select the name of the network interface card that connects the
media server to the network you want to use for the backup
network. The list includes all available network interface cards on
the media server.
IP address Displays the IP address of the network interface card you selected
for the backup network.
Subnet mask Displays the 32-bit number that determines the subnet to which
the network interface card belongs.
Network ID Displays the base network that Backup Exec calculated based on
the IP address and the subnet mask of the network interface card
you selected. This is the network that will be used to perform
remote backups and restores.
Physical address For Windows 2000 and later operating systems, this field displays
the Media Access Control (MAC) address for the network
identification card you selected. For Windows NT 4 and earlier
operating systems, this field lists the service entry name.
Use any available If a remote system that you selected for backup or restore is not
Backing Up
network route for remote part of the specified backup network, select this check box to
agents not bound to the ensure that the data from the remote system is backed up or
Data
above Network ID restored over any available network.
If you do not select this check box and you selected data from a
remote system that is not part of the specified backup network,
the job fails because Backup Exec cannot back up or restore the
data from the remote system
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 335
Specifying Backup Networks
Network Options - Set Application Defaults (continued)
Item Description
Enable agents using Select this option to use the TCP/IP network protocol to
TCP/IP protocol communicate with other devices on the network. If you select this
option, make sure that all agent workstations are configured to
advertise their IP addresses directly to the media server.
To set up this protocol, refer to your Windows documentation.
Enable agents using Select this option to use the IPX/SPX network protocol to
NetWare IPX/SPX communicate with other devices on the network.
protocol If you are using Backup Exec Agents that communicate using
SPX, you should ensure that you are using a consistent IPX frame
type on your network. If you do not, and Backup Exec is using a
different IPX frame type than the workstations running the
Backup Exec Agent software, all SPX packets must be routed
through a server that can translate the packets. This generates
excessive network traffic and, if the router does not properly
handle large SPX packets, some packets may be lost. One
symptom of this problem is a backup that times-out with a
“Device not responding” error message. Please note that the
Auto-Detect frame type will not work if there are any
combinations of 802.2 and 802.3 on the network.
To set up this protocol, refer to your Windows documentation.
Enable Media Server TCP Select this option if you want to allow the media server to use a
dynamic port range range of ports for communications, and then enter the port range.
If the first port Backup Exec attempts to use is not available,
communications will be attempted through one of the other ports
in the range. If none of the ports in the range are available,
Backup Exec will use any available dynamic port. Default port
ranges are 1025 to 65535. VERITAS recommends using a range of
50 allocated ports for the media server if using Backup Exec with
a firewall (“Using Backup Exec with Firewalls” on page 340).
336 Administrator’s Guide
Specifying Backup Networks
Network Options - Set Application Defaults (continued)
Item Description
Enable Remote Agent Select this option if you want to allow remote agents to use a
TCP dynamic port range range of ports for communications, and then enter the port range.
If the first port Backup Exec attempts to use is not available,
communications will be attempted through one of the other ports
in the range. If none of the ports in the range are available,
Backup Exec will use any available dynamic port. Default port
ranges are 1025 to 65535. VERITAS recommends using a range of
25 allocated ports for the remote systems if using Backup Exec
with a firewall (“Using Backup Exec with Firewalls” on page 340).
See also:
“Changing the Backup Network for a Job” on page 337
“Specifying the Restore Network” on page 460
Changing the Backup Network for a Job
When you set up a default network, Backup Exec uses it automatically for every backup
and restore job. However, when you are setting up a new backup job, you can change the
backup network for that job. When you change the backup network for a job, you also can
set that backup network as the new default backup network for all future backup jobs.
▼ To change the backup network for a backup job:
1. On the navigation bar, click Backup.
2. Set up the backup job as usual by selecting data and setting General and Advanced
options (see “Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on
page 242).
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 337
Specifying Backup Networks
3. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click Network.
Network options for backup job
4. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Network Backup Job Properties
Item Description
Network Interface Select the name of the network interface card that connects the
media server to the network you want to use for the backup network
for this backup job. The list includes all available network interfaces
on the media server.
IP address Displays the IP address of the network you selected as the backup
network.
Subnet mask Displays the 32-bit number that determines the subnet to which the
network interface card belongs.
Network ID Displays the network identification or subnet address that Backup
Exec calculated based on the network you selected as the backup
network.
338 Administrator’s Guide
Specifying Backup Networks
Network Backup Job Properties (continued)
Item Description
Physical address For Windows 2000 and later operating systems, this field displays
the Media Access Control (MAC) address for the network card you
selected. For Windows NT 4 and earlier operating systems, this field
lists the service entry name.
Use any available If a remote system that you selected for backup is not part of the
network route for specified backup network, select this check box to ensure that the
remote agents not data from the remote system is backed up over any available
bound to the above network.
Network ID If you do not select this check box and you selected data from a
remote system that is not part of the specified backup network, the
job fails because Backup Exec cannot back up the data from the
remote system.
5. If you want Backup Exec to notify someone when the backup job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification (see “Selecting Recipients for Job
Notification” on page 509).
6. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
“Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
See also:
“Specifying Backup Networks” on page 332
“Specifying the Default Backup Network” on page 334
“Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 242
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 339
Using Backup Exec with Firewalls
Using Backup Exec with Firewalls
In firewall environments, Backup Exec provides the following advantages:
◆ The number of ports used for receiving incoming connections is kept to a minimum.
◆ Ports opened on the Backup Exec Server and systems using the Remote Agent for
Windows Servers are dynamic and offer high levels of flexibility during browsing,
backup, and restore operations.
◆ You can set specific firewall port ranges and specify backup and restore networks
within these ranges to isolate data traffic and provide high levels of reliability.
Note The Remote Agent for Windows Servers is required to perform remote backups and
restores.
Because firewalls affect system communications between a media server and remote
systems that reside outside the firewall environment, special port requirements must be
considered when configuring Backup Exec for use with firewalls.
VERITAS recommends having port 10000 open and available on the Backup Exec media
server as well as on the remote systems. In addition, you must open the dynamic port
ranges specified for communications between the media server and remote agents. The
firewall must have a static Network Address Translation (NAT) configuration for these
two-way communications to work.
When a media server makes a connection with a remote system, the initial connection will
be initiated on the well known port 10000. The Remote Agent will be listening for
connections on this predefined port. The media server side of this connection will be
bound to an available port as specified in the Enable media server TCP dynamic port
range. Additional connections from the media server to the Remote Agent will be
initiated on an available port selected in the Enable remote agent TCP dynamic port
range option, and the media server side of these connections will be bound to an available
port as specified in the Enable media server TCP dynamic port range option.
Communication between the media server and the Remote Agent for Windows Servers
will usually require 2 ports on the media server side and up to 2 ports on the remote agent
side per operation. If you plan on supporting multiple backups and restores occurring
simultaneously, you must configure your firewall to allow a range of ports large enough
to support the maximum number of simultaneous operations desired.
340 Administrator’s Guide
Using Backup Exec with Firewalls
Should a conflict arise, the default port of 10000 can be changed to another port number
by modifying the %systemroot%\System32\drivers\etc\services file, and changing the
NDMP port to an alternate port number. For example, if you installed Windows 2000 to its
default location, from your Windows Explorer, select
C:\WINNT\System32\drivers\etc\services. Using a text editor, such as Notepad,
modify your NDMP entry, or if necessary, add an NDMP entry with the new port number.
This entry should be formatted as follows:
ndmp 10000/tcp #Network Data Management Protocol
Note If the default port is changed, it must be changed on the media server and all remote
systems being backed up through the firewall on this port.
When setting up TCP dynamic port ranges, VERITAS recommends using a range of 50
allocated ports for the media server (see “Enable Media Server TCP dynamic port range”
on page 336), and 25 allocated ports for the remote systems (see “Enable Remote Agent
TCP dynamic port range” on page 337). For optimum reliability, port ranges should not
overlap.
Note The number of dynamic ports used by the media server and remote systems can
change based on the number of devices being protected and the number of tape
devices in use. You may need to increase these port ranges to maintain the highest
level of performance. Backup Exec and the firewall need to have the ranges defined
(and port 10000).
Unless you specify a range, Backup Exec uses the full range of dynamic ports available.
When performing remote backups through a firewall, you should select a specific range
on the Network defaults dialog box.
Because the backup communications between the media server and the remote agent for
Windows servers will usually require multiple two-way connections on different port
numbers, you must configure your firewall to support this type of communications.
Note Firewalls using a many to one Network Address Translation (NAT), or Circuit-level
Gateways, may not accept incoming connections destined for a private address
behind the firewall. As a result, firewalls utilizing this technology may not be
Backing Up
compatible with Backup Exec for Windows Servers firewall backup methods. You
Data
can make NAT work with port forwarding or putting Backup Exec on a DMZ host.
Please refer to your firewall documentation for more information on these and other
configurations.
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 341
Using Backup Exec with Firewalls
Browsing Systems Through a Firewall
Because most firewalls do not allow a remote system to be displayed in the Microsoft
Windows Network tree, you may need to take additional steps to select these remote
systems in the Backup Exec administration console.
▼ To view devices in firewall environments:
1. On the Tools menu, click Options.
2. On the Properties pane, under Job Defaults, click Network.
3. Verify that a dynamic range of ports has been set for the media server and remote
agent and that the firewall is configured to pass these port ranges.
4. Click OK.
5. On the navigation bar, click Backup.
6. On the backup selections pane, expand Remote Selections.
7. Right-click User-defined Selection.
8. From the shortcut menu, click User-defined Selections.
9. In UNC Name, after \\, type the name or IP address of the remote system, and then
click Add.
10. Click Close.
Under User-defined Selections, you can now select the data to be protected, providing a
valid user name and password if prompted, and create a backup job to protect this data by
following the procedures described in “Creating a Manual Backup Job by Configuring Job
Properties” on page 242.
342 Administrator’s Guide
Protecting Windows Server 2003 Systems
Protecting Windows Server 2003 Systems
The Backup Exec Shadow Copy Components file system uses Microsoft’s Volume Shadow
Copy Service to protect critical operating system and application service data, and third
party application and user data on Windows Server 2003 resources.
Volume Shadow Copy Service allows a computer to be backed up while applications and
services are running by providing a copy of a volume when a backup is initiated.
Applications do not need to be shut down to ensure a successful volume backup. Volume
Shadow Copy Service enables third party vendors to create snapshot plug-ins, or Writers,
for use with this shadow copy technology.
Note To fully protect any local or remote servers running production versions of
Windows Server 2003, you should upgrade to the latest version of Backup Exec on
all media servers and update the Remote Agent for Windows Servers on any remote
computers running Windows Server 2003. Remote Agents from Backup Exec 9.0
Revision 4367 are not supported on production versions of Windows Server 2003.
About the Backup Exec Shadow Copy Components File
System
A Writer is specific code within an application that participates in the Volume Shadow
Copy Service framework to provide point-in-time, recovery-consistent operating system
and application data. Writers appear as Shadow Copy Components, which are listed as
resources in backup and restore selections. When expanded, the Backup Exec Shadow
Copy Components file system includes the following types of Writers:
◆ Service State - Critical operating system and application service data, such as Event
Logs, Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI), Removable Storage Manager
(RSM), etc.
◆ System State - Critical operating system data, such as Windows System File Protection
(System Files), COM+ Class Registration Database, Registry, Active Directory, etc.
◆ User Data - SQL Server, Exchange Server, Active Directory Application Mode, third
Backing Up
party application and user data, etc.
Data
Only Writers that have been tested for use with Backup Exec are available for selection in
the backup selection list. Other Writers may be displayed in the selection list, but cannot
be selected for backup.
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 343
Protecting Windows Server 2003 Systems
Backup Exec Shadow Copy Components file system
The following table lists the System State Writers and their equivalents in Windows 2000
System State:
System State Writer Windows 2000 System State
Internet Information Services (IIS) Metabase System State
Writer
Registry Registry
System Files Boot Files
COM+ Class Registration Database COM+ Class Registration Database
SYSVOL SYSVOL
Active Directory Active Directory
344 Administrator’s Guide
Protecting Windows Server 2003 Systems
System State Writer Windows 2000 System State
Cluster Quorum Cluster Quorum
Certificate Services Certificate Server
The following table lists the Service State Writers and their equivalents in Windows 2000
Service State Writer Selection for backup in Windows 2000 Selection for restore in
Window 2000
Removable Storage At the volume level, by selecting At the volume level with the
Manager (RSM) %SystemRoot%\System32\NTmsdata Restore Removable Storage
data option selected.
Windows Internet Name Volume level Volume level
Service
Windows Management At the volume level, by selecting At the volume level, with the
Instrumentation %SystemRoot%\System32\wbem\repo Restore Windows
sitory Management
Instrumentation repository
option selected
Terminal Server Licensing At the volume level, by selecting At the volume level, with the
%SystemRoot%\System32\LServer Restore Terminal Services
database option selected.
Event Logs Volume level Volume level
Remote Storage Volume level Volume level
Backing Up
Dynamic Host Volume level Volume level
Configuration Protocol
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 345
Protecting Windows Server 2003 Systems
The following table lists the User Data Writers and the equivalent in Windows 2000
User Data Writer Selection for backup in Windows 2000 Selection for restore in
Window 2000
SQL Server Backups require the Backup Exec Agent Restores require the SQL
for Microsoft SQL Server (SQL Agent) Agent.
Exchange Server Backups require the Backup Exec Agent Restores require the
for Microsoft Exchange Server Exchange Agent
(Exchange Agent)
SQL Server Writer Support
The Backup Exec Shadow Copy Components file system supports the Microsoft SQL
Server Writer, which protects SQL Server and MSDE data. You must enter a Backup Exec
SQL Agent serial number in order for the Writer to be displayed. Then, both the Backup
Exec SQL Agent and the Writer are available to perform data protection operations of SQL
Server on Windows Server 2003 resources.
See also:
“Protecting SQL Server on Windows Server 2003 Using the SQL Server Writer” on
page 1089
Exchange Writer Support
The Backup Exec Shadow Copy Components file system supports the Microsoft Exchange
Writer, which protects Microsoft Exchange 2003. You must enter a Backup Exec Exchange
Agent serial number in order for the Writer to be displayed. Then, both the Backup Exec
Exchange Agent and the Writer are available to perform data protection operations of
Exchange Server on Windows Server 2003 resources.
See also:
“Protecting Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 Using the Exchange Writer” on page 1171
346 Administrator’s Guide
Protecting Windows Server 2003 Systems
Windows SharePoint Services Support
Microsoft’s Windows SharePoint Services is available in Windows Server 2003 as an
optional Windows Component. Since the data is stored in a SQL (MSDE) instance called
SHAREPOINT (by default), the SQL data is protected by the Writer instance of
SHAREPOINT in the Backup Exec Shadow Copy Components file system.
Although a Backup Exec SQL Server Agent license is not required to use the SQL Server
Writer to protect Windows SharePoint Services on Windows Server 2003, if you have a
license, you can use the Backup Exec SQL Server Agent instead of the Writer to protect the
data.
If you installed Windows SharePoint Services using an instance name other than
SHAREPOINT, the Microsoft SQL Server Writer instance does not display as a backup
selection unless you enter a serial number for the Backup Exec Agent for SQL Server.
See also:
“Protecting SQL Server on Windows Server 2003 Using the SQL Server Writer” on
page 1089
Active Directory Application Mode Writer Support
The Backup Exec Shadow Copy Components file system supports the Microsoft Active
Directory Application Mode Writer (AD/AM Writer). AD/AM provides Active Directory
service without the need for a domain controller. AD/AM is available in Windows Server
2003 as a non-operating system service. You can run multiple instances of AD/AM
concurrently on a single server and configure each instance independently.
See also:
“Restoring Windows Server 2003 Systems” on page 438
“Using Redirected Restore for Active Directory, Active Directory Application Mode,
and Install from Media” on page 455
Protecting Upgraded Windows Server 2003 Resources
Backing Up
After upgrading Backup Exec on media servers and remote computers running
production versions of Windows Server 2003, you must edit selection lists and replace the Data
System State selection with the Shadow Copy Components selection.
The enhancements made to the Backup Exec Shadow Copy Components file system to
support the Volume Shadow Copy Service will cause backup jobs that target Windows
Server 2003 resources and include System State to fail. These jobs will also fail if you do
not upgrade the media server, but only upgrade Backup Exec on remote computers
running production versions of Windows Server 2003.
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 347
Protecting Windows Server 2003 Systems
If you upgrade Backup Exec on the media server only, and not on remote Windows
resources, then existing remote Windows Server 2003 backup jobs that include System
State are not affected and will not fail.
Note To fully protect any local or remote computers running production versions of
Windows Server 2003, you should upgrade to the latest version of Backup Exec on
all media servers and update the Remote Agent for Windows Servers on any remote
computers running Windows Server 2003. Remote Agents from Backup Exec 9.0
Revision 4367 are not supported on production versions of Windows Server 2003.
To prevent backup jobs that target Windows Server 2003 resources and include System
State from failing, you must replace the System State selection with the Shadow Copy
Components selection.
If both the media server and the remote computers running Windows Server 2003 are
upgraded to the latest Backup Exec, then the Backup Exec user interface will detect and
notify you when obsolete selections such as System State are found. When you select a
server or expand it using the graphical view, selections are checked for items that are no
longer on the server, such as System State. If invalid items are found, you are prompted to
remove them from the selection list (see “To replace the System State selection:” on
page 348).
If only the remote computers running Windows Server 2003 are upgraded to the latest
Backup Exec, but the media server is not, you must manually edit the selection lists (see
“To edit selection lists when only the remote computers are upgraded:” on page 349).
▼ To replace the System State selection:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2. On the Backup Selection Lists pane, select the selection list you want to edit.
3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Properties.
4. If the selection list is being used by jobs, you will be prompted to click Yes to continue.
If System State is in the selection list, the following message is displayed:
System State is selected but cannot be found on server
LocalTest. If this server has been upgraded to Windows Server
2003 or later, remove this selection, and then select Shadow
Copy Components to fully protect your server. Do you want to
remove the System State selection?
348 Administrator’s Guide
Protecting Windows Server 2003 Systems
5. Click Yes to remove the System State selection.
After removing invalid items from the selection list, backup jobs for that computer do
not fail, but the System State-equivalent resource is not backed up. You must include
the Shadow Copy Components resource in the backup selection list in order to back
up the equivalent resources.
Note To protect Windows Server 2003 resources, you must select all Shadow Copy
Components resources, the system drive, and the boot drive for backup. Only full
backups can be run on the Shadow Copy Components.
6. Add the Shadow Copy Components resource to the selection list.
Editing a selection list affects all jobs using that selection list. If you want to only edit
selections for a specific job, edit the job rather than the selection list.
7. Make any necessary changes to the job.
▼ To edit selection lists when only the remote computers are upgraded:
1. On the Edit menu, click Edit Selection List.
2. On the Edit Selection List dialog box, click the Edit button.
3. Under View Format, click Text.
4. Highlight the System State selection, and then click Delete.
5. Click OK.
See also:
“Editing Selection Lists” on page 280
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 349
Backing Up Utility Partitions
Backing Up Utility Partitions
Backup Exec allows backing up and restoring of utility partitions. Utility partitions are
usually small partitions installed on the disk by OEM vendors like Dell, Compaq,
Hewlett-Packard, and IBM. These utility partitions contain system diagnostic and
configuration utilities.
If utility partitions are on a system, the Utility Partition node appears as a resource in
backup selections.
Backing up Utility Partitions
You must have Administrator rights to browse and backup utility partitions. If there are
no utility partitions on the system, this resource is unavailable for backup.
You can only perform a full backup of utility partitions. You can select individual utility
partition resources, which appear as Utility Partition On Disk disk_number (such as
Utility Partition On Disk 0) when the Utility Partition node is expanded. VERITAS
recommends backing up utility partitions when a full system backup is performed, such
as during disaster recovery preparation.
See also:
“Restoring Utility Partitions” on page 439
“Disaster Preparation and Recovery” on page 549
350 Administrator’s Guide
Backing Up NetWare Network Volumes
Backing Up NetWare Network Volumes
In order to see NetWare volumes in your backup selections pane, you must have the
Client (or Gateway) Services for NetWare service or NetWare Client 32 enabled on the
media server. In addition, you may need to use a fully distinguished logon for some
NetWare servers you are working with.
If you want to back up NetWare Network Volumes, expand Novell Storage Management
Services to select files. When you use the Novell Storage Management Services node, the
backed up data includes standard file data and additional special data such as Access
Control Lists, disk quotas, Macintosh-specific data, partition information, and security
data. This additional information is needed to fully restore NetWare.
Novell Storage Management Services
Backing Up
Note If you use Backup Exec on an IntraNetWare client, there is no NDS node when
browsing for a server using Network Neighborhood.
Data
While looking at the backup selections pane, you may notice a selection called NetWare or
Compatible Networks. Although you can select NetWare files to back up from this node,
VERITAS does not recommend that you use it. When you select files from the NetWare or
Compatible Networks node, only the standard files are backed up. Special files, such as
security, bindery, and ACL, are not included in the backups.
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 351
About Backup Strategies
In addition, VERITAS recommends that you use the Backup Exec Remote Agent for
NetWare Servers. Because the Remote Agent for NetWare Servers is also a Client Access
License (CAL), it enables you to fully protect your NetWare data and to perform
accelerated backups of NetWare data. You cannot select all data and special files on
resources for a remote NetWare server for backup until a Remote Agent has been
installed.
See also:
“About Backing Up NetWare Servers” on page 1358
“Default Settings for the Remote Agent for NetWare Servers” on page 1365
About Backup Strategies
A backup strategy is the collection of procedures you implement for backing up your
network, including what methods of backups are performed, when backups are
performed, and how media is rotated back into use for your regular backups. A good
backup strategy allows minimal time to get a system up and running in the event of a
disaster.
Backup Exec offers flexible solutions for protecting the data on your network. Use the
media rotation feature and let Backup Exec do all the administrative work for you, or
design and manage your own media rotation strategy, the procedures for reusing media,
that meets your exact specifications.
You can create backup job templates that define your backup strategy, and then reuse the
templates to implement your strategy for all resources being protected by your media
server.
See also:
“Media Rotation Strategies” on page 220
“Using Backup Job Templates” on page 283
352 Administrator’s Guide
About Backup Strategies
Choosing a Backup Strategy
In order to develop a secure and effective plan for managing your data, you should
consider the following:
◆ The importance of the data you are backing up.
◆ How often your system needs to be backed up.
◆ How much storage media you will use.
◆ When you will use certain storage media.
◆ How you will keep track of your backup information.
Before choosing a strategy to use with the Backup Exec system, you should answer the
following questions:
How often should I back up?
While there is no requirement on how often to back up your data, there is one
consideration that can help you decide: The cost of re-creating data that was added or
modified since the last backup.
Calculate the manpower, lost time and/or sales, and other costs that would be incurred if
the file server or workstation crashed right before the next backup was scheduled to take
place (always assume the worst scenario). If the cost is excessive, the strategy should be
adjusted accordingly.
For example, the cost to re-create an extensive database system that is continually updated
by several database operators would be quite substantial. On the other hand, the cost to
re-create the data for a user creating one or two inter-office memos would be considerably
less. In this scenario, the network administrator would probably opt to back up the
database several times daily, and set up daily jobs for the user’s workstation.
In an ideal environment, one full backup should be performed on workstations every day
and servers should be fully backed up more often. Important data files and directories
that constantly change may need to be backed up several times a day. Because of time and
media constraints, this is not feasible for many environments, so a schedule including
incremental or differential backups must be implemented. For safety reasons, a full
Backing Up
backup should always be performed before adding new applications or changing the
Data
server configuration.
How much data must be backed up?
The amount of data to be backed up is a key determinant of the media rotation strategy
you choose. If you are backing up large amounts of data that needs to be retained on
media for long periods of time, you will need to select a strategy that is suitable for these
requirements.
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 353
About Backup Strategies
How long does the data need to be stored?
The amount of time the data needs to be stored is directly related to the media rotation
scheme you use. For example, if you use one media and back up every day, your backups
will never be more than a day old.
Since storage media is relatively inexpensive when compared to the value of your data, it
is a good idea to periodically back up your system on media not used in the media
rotation scheme and store it permanently. Some administrators may choose to do this
every week, while others may choose to store only one permanent backup per month.
The threat of viruses is an issue also. Some viruses take effect immediately, while others
may take days or weeks to cause noticeable damage. Because of this, you should have at
least the following backups available to restore at any time:
◆ 3 daily backups (for example, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday).
◆ A one-week-old full backup.
◆ A one-month-old full backup.
Having these backups available should allow you to restore your system prior to when it
became infected.
Which devices am I backing up?
Since Backup Exec can back up servers, workstations, and agents, you should consider
which devices you want to protect. You will need to coordinate times that are suitable to
back up different devices. For example, you may want to back up file servers during the
evening and back up workstations at lunchtime.
Should I include more than one system in each job?
When you are setting up jobs for the network, you must decide if you want to create one
job that includes many devices or a job for each device. Here are some of the advantages
and disadvantages of each method.
◆ One job per device:
- Advantages:
- If a job fails, you know immediately which device was not backed up.
- If a device is turned off or moved, backups of other devices are not affected.
- When devices are added to the network you can simply set up new jobs for
each device.
- Disadvantages:
- You have more jobs to keep track of (for example, reviewing job histories, and
so forth).
354 Administrator’s Guide
About Backup Strategies
◆ Multiple devices per job:
- Advantages:
- There are fewer jobs to keep track of and create.
- You know the order in which the data is backed up.
- You could make it an overwrite job and thus be able to use the same name for
the media and the job.
- Disadvantages:
- If any of the devices in the job are not available during the backup, the job
results in an abnormal completion status.
Understanding Backup Methods and Their Advantages
Before you can develop your media rotation strategy, you will need to decide whether you
want to perform only full backups or use a strategy that includes Full backups and one of
the modified backup methods (differential, incremental or working set backups).
The backup methods used by Backup Exec are:
◆ Full
◆ Differential
◆ Incremental
◆ Copy
◆ Daily
◆ Working set
◆ Archive
There are advantages and disadvantages to each backup method.
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 355
About Backup Strategies
Full Backups
Full backups include all of the data on a volume and use the full backup method (so
Backup Exec detects the device as having been backed up).
Backup Exec allows you to select to use either archive bit or modified time to determine if
a file has been backed up. The advantages and disadvantages described in this section
pertain to either type of full backup.
◆ Advantages
- Files are easy to find - Since full backups include all data contained on a device,
you don’t have to search through several media to find a file that you need to
restore.
- There is always a current backup of your entire system on one media or
media set - If you should need to restore your entire system, all of the most
current information is located on the last full backup.
◆ Disadvantages
- Redundant backups - since most of the files on your file server rarely change, each
full backup following the first is merely a copy of what has already been backed
up. This requires more media.
- Full backups take longer to perform - Full backups can be time consuming,
especially when you have other devices on the network that need to be backed up
(e.g., agent workstations, remote servers).
Note You will need to perform a full backup of your server (including the Windows NT
Registry) to establish a baseline for disaster recovery.
See also:
“Understanding the Archive Bit and Backup Methods” on page 360
“Understanding Modified Time and Backup Methods” on page 361
356 Administrator’s Guide
About Backup Strategies
Differential Backups
Differential backups include backing up all files that have changed since the last full
backup. The difference between differential and incremental backups is that incremental
backups include only the files that have changed since the last full or incremental backup.
Backup Exec provides two differential backup methods, one that uses archive bit and one
that uses modified time to determine if the file was backed up. If you select to use the
FULL - Back Up Files - Reset Archive Bit and want to run differential backups, you must
use the DIFFERENTIAL - Changed Files method. If you select to use the FULL - Back Up
Files - Allows incrementals and differentials using modified time, you must use the
DIFFERENTIAL - Using modified time method. The advantages and disadvantages
described in this section pertain to either type of differential backup.
◆ Advantages
- Files are easy to find - Restoring a system backed up with a differential strategy
requires a maximum of two backups - the latest full backup and the latest
differential backup. This is less time consuming than backup strategies that
require the latest full backup and all incremental backups created since the full
backup.
- Less time required for backup and restore - Differential backups take less time to
restore than full backups. Faster recovery is possible in disaster situations because
you only need the latest full and differential backup media to fully restore a
device.
◆ Disadvantage
- Redundant backups - All of the files created or modified since the last
incremental backup are included; thus creating redundant backups.
In most schemes, differential backups are recommended over incremental backups.
Differential backups allow much easier restoration of an entire device than incremental
backups since only two backups are required. Fewer required media also decreases the
risk of not being able to restore important data because of media errors.
Incremental Backups
Backing Up
Data
Incremental backups include only the files that have changed since the last full or
incremental backup.
Backup Exec provides two incremental backup methods, one that uses archive bit and one
that uses modified time to determine if the file was backed up. If you select to use the
FULL - Backs Up Files - Reset Archive Bit and want to run incremental backups, you
must use the INCREMENTAL - Changed Files method. If you select to use the FULL -
Backs Up Files - Allows incrementals and differentials using modified time, you must
use the INCREMENTAL - Using modified time method. The advantages and
disadvantages described in this section pertain to either type of differential backup.
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 357
About Backup Strategies
◆ Advantages
- Better use of media - Only files that have changed since the last backup are
included, so there is much less data storage space required.
- Less time required for backup - Incremental backups take much less time than full
and differential backups to complete.
◆ Disadvantage
- Backups are spread across multiple media - Since multiple media is required in a
disaster situation, this can cause recovery of a device to take longer. In addition,
the media must be restored in the correct order to effectively bring the system up
to date.
Copy Backups
Copy backups include all selected data and do not affect any media rotation scheme
because the archive bit is not reset. Copy backups are useful when you need to:
◆ Back up data for a special purpose (for example, to send to another site).
◆ Back up specific data.
◆ Perform an additional backup to take off-site.
◆ Back up data that belongs to a media rotation job without affecting the rotation cycle.
Daily Backups
Daily Backups may be performed in addition to the media rotation scheme selected. The
Daily Backup method backs up all files with today’s date (created or changed today). The
Daily Backup method does not affect the files’ backup status because the archive bit is not
reset.
Working set Backups
The working set backup option allows you to back up data that has been created and
modified since the last full or incremental backup, and to specify to include data that has
been accessed in the last x days.
This option is similar to a differential backup, in which files that have been created or
changed since the volume’s last full backup are included; however, the difference lies in
that you can also specify to include all files accessed within the last x number of days. This
option can speed the recovery of a crashed server because you only need to restore the
working set backup to get up and running again, and then restore the latest full backup at
a later time (if necessary).
358 Administrator’s Guide
About Backup Strategies
To effectively include the data needed to make your system operational after restoring a
working set backup, specifying at least 30 days in the Files accessed in x days field is
recommended. With a full/working set backup scheme, the non-full backups will require
more media space than full/differential or full/incremental schemes. However, in
environments where active data is migrated frequently between machines, or when
restore times are especially critical, working set backups can make up the cost of extra
media in time savings for restoring data.
◆ Advantages:
- Restoring a system backed up with a working set strategy requires only the media
containing the latest working set backup media and the media containing the
most recent full backup.
- You can perform a working set backup, restore the data to a new system, and be
up and running faster than if you had to restore a full backup followed by all of
the incremental or differential backups.
- Working set backups take less time to run than full backups.
◆ Disadvantages:
- Along with all files accessed in the specified time, all of the files created or
modified since the last full or incremental backup are included on each media,
thus creating redundant working set backups.
- This option is available only on platforms that support the last accessed date
(Windows, NetWare, and UNIX). Working set backups will work as differential
backups when selected for other platforms.
Archive Backups
The archive backup option automatically deletes files from the volume after they have
been successfully backed up. This backup method is designed for migrating data from
disk to storage media and should not be incorporated in a regular backup schedule.
Using the archive backup method allows you to free valuable disk space and reduce
clutter on your server volume by migrating stagnant directories and files from the server
Backing Up
to media. An archive backup job backs up the selected data, verifies the media, and then
deletes the data from the volume.
Data
Note For data to be deleted, rights to delete a file must be granted; otherwise data will be
backed up but not deleted.
Backup Exec will not delete data from Backup Exec Agent workstations when using
the archive feature.
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 359
About Backup Strategies
Understanding the Archive Bit and Backup Methods
Whenever a file is created or changed, the operating system activates the Archive Bit or
modified bit. Unless you select to use backup methods that depend on a date and time
stamp, Backup Exec uses the archive bit to determine whether a file has been backed up,
which is an important element of your backup strategy.
Selecting backup methods FULL - Back Up Files - Reset Archive Bit, DIFFERENTIAL -
Changed Files, and INCREMENTAL - Changed Files - Reset Archive Bit, can affect the
archive bit.
Whenever a file has been backed up using either the FULL - Back Up Files - Reset
Archive Bit or INCREMENTAL - Changed Files - Reset Archive Bit backup method,
Backup Exec turns the archive bit off, indicating to the system that the file has been backed
up. If the file is changed again prior to the next full or incremental backup, the bit is
turned on again, and Backup Exec will back up the file in the next full or incremental
backup. Backups using the DIFFERENTIAL - Changed Files backup method include
only files that were created or modified since the last full backup. When this type of
differential backup is performed, the archive bit is left intact.
Consider the following backup strategy scenario:
Fred wants to implement a backup strategy for the office fileserver. Fred knows that
all backup strategies begin with a full backup (backup of an entire device using the
full backup method), so he creates a Selection List (see “Creating Selection Lists” on
page 274) for his server and submits the job to run at the end of the day on Friday.
Since most files on the server, such as operating system files and application files,
seldom change, Fred decides that he can save time and media by incorporating
incremental or differential backups in his media rotation scheme. Fred opts to use
incremental backups, so he schedules the script to run at the end of the day, Monday
through Thursday, with the incremental backup method.
Here’s what happens: Fred’s Friday tape contains all of the data on the fileserver and
Backup Exec changes all of the files’ statuses to backed up. At the end of the day on
Monday, the incremental job runs and only the files that were created or changed (had
the archive bit re-set by the operating system) are backed up. When the incremental
job completes, Backup Exec will turn the archive bit off, showing that the files have
been backed up. On Tuesday through Thursday, the same events happen.
If Fred’s fileserver crashed on Thursday morning, after he got it running, he would
restore each backup in the order in which it was created (for example, Friday, Monday,
Tuesday, and so forth).
If Fred had decided to perform differential backups on Monday through Thursday, he
would have only needed Friday’s and Wednesday’s tapes: Friday’s tape because it
included all of the data, and Wednesday’s tape because it included every file that had
been created or changed since Friday’s backup.
360 Administrator’s Guide
About Backup Strategies
Understanding Modified Time and Backup Methods
If you select to use FULL - Back Up Files - Allow incrementals and differentials using
modified time, DIFFERENTIAL - Using modified time, or INCREMENTAL - Using
modified time, Backup Exec uses a file’s modified time rather than the archive bit to
determine if it needs to be backed up.
When Backup Exec runs a full or incremental backup, the time the backup launches is
recorded in the Backup Exec database. The next time an incremental or differential backup
launches, Backup Exec compares the file system time to the backup time recorded in the
Backup Exec database. If the file system time is later than the database time, the file is
backed up. When an incremental backup is run, a new time is recorded in the Backup Exec
database. The database time is not updated with differential backups.
Using the modified time allows Backup Exec to run differential backups on file system,
such as Unix, which do not have an archive bit.
If you use want Backup Exec to use modified time to determine if a file has been backed
up, the full and incremental (or full and differential) backups must use the same backup
selection list.
See also:
“Using Selection Lists” on page 274
Using the Windows’ NTFS Change Journal to Determine Changed
Files
For Windows 2000 or later systems, you can enhance incremental and differential backup
performance by selecting to have Backup Exec use the information recorded in the NTFS
Change Journal. NTFS logs all file system changes in the Change Journal. If you select to
use the Change Journal and select DIFFERENTIAL - Using modified time or
INCREMENTAL - Using modified time as the backup method, Backup Exec will scan the
journal to get a list of changed files rather than scan all files, reducing the amount of time
required to perform the incremental or differential backup.
Backing Up
Data
Chapter 6, Backing Up Data 361
About Backup Strategies
362 Administrator’s Guide
Administrating Backup Exec 7
Backup Exec includes features that enable you to manage Backup Exec and jobs created in
Backup Exec. You can perform the following operations:
◆ Configure logon accounts
◆ Schedule jobs
◆ Monitor Jobs
◆ Configure error-handling rules
◆ Configure Database Maintenance
◆ Connect to ExecView
Configuring Logon Accounts
A Backup Exec logon account stores the credentials of a Windows user account. Backup
Exec logon accounts enable Backup Exec to manage user names and passwords and can
be used to browse resources or process jobs. Using Backup Exec logon accounts enables
you to easily apply Windows credential changes to the jobs that use them.
Backup Exec logon accounts are used to browse local and remote resources. Backup Exec
logon accounts can also be associated with selection list entries at the device level such as
shares, databases, etc. If you need to edit the credentials, you can edit the Backup Exec
logon account and the changes will be applied to the selected resources that use the
Backup Exec logon account.
Backup Exec logon accounts are not Windows user accounts. When you create a Backup
Exec logon account, an entry for the account is entered into the Backup Exec database; no
operating system accounts are created. If your Windows user account credentials change,
you must update the Backup Exec logon account with the new information. Backup Exec
does not maintain a connection with the Windows user account.
Administrating
Backup Exec
363
Configuring Logon Accounts
You can view, create, delete, edit, and replace Backup Exec logon accounts using the
Logon Account Management dialog box. The dialog box displays property information
for each Backup Exec logon account you create. It also displays your default Backup Exec
logon account and the Windows user name that is currently logged on to the media server.
To view this information, select the Network menu, and then click Logon Accounts.
See also:
“Creating a Backup Exec Logon Account” on page 366
Default Backup Exec Logon Account
The default Backup Exec logon account enables you to browse, make selections, or restore
data. The first time you start Backup Exec, you must specify a default Backup Exec logon
account using the Logon Account Wizard. You can select an existing Backup Exec logon
account or create a new one.
You can create multiple Backup Exec logon accounts; however, each Backup Exec user can
only have one default Backup Exec logon account. Your default Backup Exec logon
account enables you to perform the following:
◆ Browse resources. Your default Backup Exec logon account enables you to browse local
and remote resources when you create backup jobs. To browse resources, each user
must have a default Backup Exec logon account that is associated with their Windows
user account. The Backup Exec logon account does not have to be the same user name
as the Windows user that is used to log on to Backup Exec.
For example, you are logged on to a media server named MEDIASERVER as the local
Windows administrator. When you start Backup Exec, you are prompted to create a
default Backup Exec logon account for the local administrator because one does not
exist. You can create a Backup Exec logon account for the local administrator that has
the credentials for a domain administrator. The Backup Exec logon account will have
the following properties:
User name: DOMAIN\Administrator
Description: MEDIASERVER\Administrator Default Account
Owner: MEDIASERVER\Administrator
When you change your default Backup Exec logon account, you can use your new
default Backup Exec logon account to browse resources immediately; you do not have
to restart your system before the changes take effect.
364 Administrator’s Guide
Configuring Logon Accounts
◆ Make backup selections. You can select a different Backup Exec logon account when you
make selections for backup. If your default does not have rights, the Logon Account
Selection dialog box appears and enables you to create or select a different Backup
Exec logon account. You can also change the Backup Exec logon account when
making backup selections using the Connect As command in the context menu.
Note For more information on using Backup Exec logon accounts with Exchange mailbox
and SQL backups, see “Using Backup Exec Logon Accounts for SQL 2000
Resources” on page 1002 and “Using Backup Exec Logon Accounts with Exchange
2000 and 2003 Resources” on page 1095.
◆ Restore. You can assign Backup Exec logon accounts to resources when you create
restore jobs. The default Backup Exec logon account is used unless you choose a
different Backup Exec logon account when you create the restore job.
See also:
“Changing Your Default Backup Exec Logon Account” on page 371
Backup Exec System Logon Account
The Backup Exec System Logon Account (SLA) is created when you install Backup Exec.
When the SLA is created, the username and password match the credentials provided
during install for the Backup Exec Services credentials. The owner of the SLA is the
Windows user that installed Backup Exec and is a common account by default. Common
accounts are shared accounts that can be accessed by all users.
The Backup Exec System Logon Account may have access to most or all of your resources
since it contains the Backup Exec Services credentials. If you want to make Backup Exec
more secure, you can change the SLA to be a restricted account or you can delete it.
However, if you delete the SLA, the jobs in which it is used may fail. If the SLA is deleted,
you can re-create it using the Logon Account Management dialog box.
The SLA is used for the following tasks and jobs:
◆ Jobs migrated from a previous version of Backup Exec
◆ Windows Explorer interface jobs
◆ One-button backup jobs (if a default Backup Exec logon account does not exist for the
user running the job)
Administrating
Backup Exec
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 365
Configuring Logon Accounts
◆ Duplicate backup data jobs
◆ Command Line Applet
◆ Backup Exec R/3 Agent
See also:
“Creating a New Backup Exec System Logon Account” on page 371
Creating a Backup Exec Logon Account
You can create Backup Exec logon accounts using the Logon Account Wizard, which
guides you through the creation of a Backup Exec logon account, or by using the Logon
Account Management dialog. You can enter Backup Exec logon account property
information when you create the Backup Exec logon account; however, Backup Exec
assigns the Backup Exec logon account owner to the Windows user name you used to log
on to Backup Exec. The owner of the Backup Exec logon account can not be modified.
▼ To launch the Logon Account Wizard:
❖ On the Tools menu, point to Wizards, and then click Logon Account Wizard.
The wizard will guide you through the process of creating a Backup Exec logon
account.
366 Administrator’s Guide
Configuring Logon Accounts
▼ To create a new Backup Exec logon account using the Logon Account Management
dialog:
1. On the Network menu, click Logon Accounts.
Logon Account Management dialog box
2. Click New.
3. Enter the appropriate options as follows:
Add Logon Credentials dialog box
Item Description
User name Enter the fully qualified user name for the Backup Exec logon
account. For example, DOMAIN\Administrator. The user name is
provided when you attempt to connect to a resource. The user name
you enter is not case-sensitive for the resources that are accessed.
Password Enter the password for the account. The password you enter is
encrypted for security. You can leave this field blank if this Backup
Exec logon account does not need a password.
Confirm password Re-enter the password for confirmation. The password must match
the password you typed in the Password field.
Administrating
Backup Exec
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 367
Configuring Logon Accounts
Add Logon Credentials dialog box (continued)
Item Description
Description Enter the unique name for the Backup Exec logon account. The user
name is automatically added if you do not enter information into the
field.
Notes Enter any comments to describe how the Backup Exec logon account
will be used.
This is a restricted Select this check box to enable the Backup Exec logon account to be
logon account used only by the owner of the logon account and those who know
the password. If this is not selected, the Backup Exec logon account
will be a common account. Common accounts are shared accounts
that can be accessed by all users.
This is my default Select this check box to make this your default Backup Exec logon
logon account account used to browse, make selections, or restore data on your
local and remote resources.
4. Click OK to create the Backup Exec logon account.
See also:
“Deleting a Backup Exec Logon Account” on page 370
“Replacing a Backup Exec Logon Account” on page 369
Editing a Backup Exec Logon Account
When you edit a Backup Exec logon account, the changes will automatically be applied to
all the resources that use the Backup Exec logon account. Changes made to a Backup Exec
logon account are applied immediately, you do not have to restart your system for the
changes to take effect. You can edit the following properties for a Backup Exec logon
account:
◆ Type (restricted or common)
◆ Description
◆ Password
◆ User name
◆ Notes
368 Administrator’s Guide
Configuring Logon Accounts
▼ To edit a Backup Exec logon account:
1. On the Network menu, click Logon Accounts.
The Logon Account Management dialog box appears.
2. Select the Backup Exec logon account you want to change, and then click Edit.
If you are not logged on to Backup Exec with the same user name as the Backup Exec
logon account owner, you must provide the password before you can edit the account.
3. Modify the Backup Exec logon account properties as needed.
4. To change the password for the Backup Exec logon account:
a. Click Change password. If you are using the Backup Exec Web Administration
Console, select Check here to change the password for this account.
b. In Password, type a new password.
c. In Confirm, re-type the password.
d. Click OK.
5. Click OK.
Replacing a Backup Exec Logon Account
You can replace a Backup Exec logon account within all existing jobs and selections lists.
The resources and selections lists in existing jobs that use the Backup Exec logon account
will be updated to use the new Backup Exec logon account. If the new Backup Exec logon
account is restricted, you must provide the password.
▼ To replace a Backup Exec logon account with another Backup Exec logon account:
1. On the Network menu, click Logon Accounts.
The Logon Account Management dialog box appears.
2. Select the Backup Exec logon account you want to replace, and then click Replace.
The Replace Logon Account dialog box appears.
Administrating
Backup Exec
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 369
Configuring Logon Accounts
3. Select the Backup Exec logon account with which you want to replace the selected
Backup Exec logon account.
If the Backup Exec logon account is restricted and you are not logged on to Backup
Exec with the same user name of the Backup Exec logon account owner, you must
provide the password before you can edit the account.
4. Click OK.
Deleting a Backup Exec Logon Account
You cannot delete a Backup Exec logon account when it is:
◆ Being referenced by a job.
◆ Owned by a user who is logged on to the media server.
◆ Set as the default Backup Exec logon account of a user who is logged on to the media
server.
You can delete a Backup Exec logon account when the owner is logged off and all users
who have it set as their default logon account are logged off.
▼ To delete a Backup Exec logon account:
1. On the Network menu, click Logon Accounts.
The Logon Account Management dialog box appears.
2. Select the Backup Exec logon account you want to delete, and then click Delete.
3. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
The Backup Exec logon account is removed from the Backup Exec logon account list.
370 Administrator’s Guide
Configuring Logon Accounts
Changing Your Default Backup Exec Logon Account
You can change your default Backup Exec logon account that enables you to browse, make
selections, or restore data. To change your default Backup Exec logon account, you must
edit the properties for the Backup Exec logon account that you want to use as the new
default Backup Exec logon account.
▼ To change your default Backup Exec logon account:
1. On the Network menu, click Logon Accounts.
The Logon Account Management dialog box appears.
2. Select the Backup Exec logon account you want to use as your default Backup Exec
logon account, and then click Edit.
3. Select This is my default logon account check box.
4. Click OK.
Creating a New Backup Exec System Logon Account
The Backup Exec System Logon Account enables you to perform several operations, such
as one-button backup, copy jobs, and Windows Explorer interface jobs. It is also used with
Backup Exec R/3 Agent and Command Line Applet. If you delete the Backup Exec
System Logon Account, you should create a new one that enables you to perform the
specified operations and use the agent and applet.
▼ To create a new Backup Exec System Logon Account:
1. On the Network menu, click Logon Accounts.
The Logon Account Management dialog box appears.
2. Click System Account.
The Edit Logon Credentials dialog box appears.
Administrating
Backup Exec
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 371
Configuring Logon Accounts
3. Enter the appropriate options as follows:
Edit Logon Credentials dialog box
Item Description
User name Enter the fully qualified user name for the Backup Exec logon
account. For example, DOMAIN\Administrator. The user name is
provided when you attempt to connect to a resource. The user name
you enter is not case-sensitive for the resources that are accessed.
Change password Enables you to enter and confirm a new password for the account.
The password you enter is encrypted for security. You can leave this
field blank if this Backup Exec logon account does not need a
password.
Notes Enter any comments to describe how the Backup Exec logon account
will be used.
This is a restricted Select this check box to enable the Backup Exec logon account to be
logon account used only by the owner of the Backup Exec logon account and those
who know the password. If this is not selected, the Backup Exec
logon account will be a common account. Common accounts are
shared accounts that can be accessed by all users.
This is my default Select this check box to make this your default account used to
logon account browse, make selections, or restore data on your local and remote
resources.
4. Click OK to create the system logon account.
Viewing and Clearing the Audit Log
You can view the audit log to determine when changes were made to Backup Exec logon
accounts. The audit log displays the date and time the change was made, the user that
made the change, and Backup Exec logon account that was changed. The audit log entries
can be viewed, but not edited; however, you can clear all the entries in the log.
▼ To view or clear the audit log:
1. On the Network menu, click Logon Accounts.
The Logon Account Management dialog box appears.
372 Administrator’s Guide
Configuring Logon Accounts
2. Click Audit Log.
The Logon Account Audit Log dialog box provides the following information:
Alerts Audit Log
Item Description
Date/Time The date and time the change was made to the Backup Exec logon
account.
User Name The user ID that made the change to the Backup Exec logon account.
Message The name of the Backup Exec logon account to which the change
was made.
3. Click Refresh to update the audit log with new entries.
4. Click Clear to remove all entries from the audit log.
5. Click Close.
Administrating
Backup Exec
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 373
Scheduling Jobs
Scheduling Jobs
The schedule option enables you to configure the time and the frequency you want to run
jobs. You can configure a schedule for all types of jobs such as backup, restore, inventory,
new catalog, etc. During the job setup, you can choose to run jobs immediately, run once
on a specific day and time, or run according to a schedule.
▼ To configure a schedule for a job:
1. Determine the type of job you want to schedule.
The job dialog box appears that enables you to select properties for the job.
2. On the Properties pane, under Frequency, click Schedule.
Schedule Time and Frequency dialog box
374 Administrator’s Guide
Scheduling Jobs
3. Select one of the following schedule options:
- Click Run now to run the job immediately.
- Click Run on Date at Time to schedule the job to run one time on the selected date
at the selected time, and then type the date and time.
- Click Run according to schedule to configure a schedule for a recurring job, and
then click Edit Schedule Details to configure the schedule. For more information,
see “Editing the Job Schedule” on page 376.
4. Click View Schedule Summary to verify your schedule.
The Summary dialog box displays the Effective Date, Time Window, Restart Interval,
and a calendar. The calendar displays a six month period with the selected scheduled
run dates in bold.
5. Click Submit job on hold if you want to submit the job with an on-hold status.
You should select this option if you want to submit the job, but do not want the job to
run until you change the job’s hold status.
6. Click Enable automatic cancellation, and then type the number of hours or minutes
in the Cancel job if not completed within option.
This option enables you to cancel the job if is not completed within the selected
number of hours or minutes. Backup Exec starts timing the length of time the job
takes to run when the job is queued, not when the job begins.
7. You can start the job after configuring the schedule or select other options from the
Properties pane.
Note If you are using Backup Exec for Web Administration Console (BEWAC), click Next
when you are ready to submit the job to the job queue. Click Finish to run the job
after you view the job summary. If you are not satisfied with the settings you
selected, click Back. However, you must reset all of the settings. BEWAC does not
save the settings when you click Back.
See also:
“Backing Up Data” on page 239
“Monitoring Jobs” on page 381
“Configuring Default Schedule Options” on page 379
Administrating
“Configuring Holiday Scheduling for Jobs” on page 380
Backup Exec
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 375
Scheduling Jobs
Editing the Job Schedule
You can select the time and frequency you want to run a recurring job. When you select
the Run according to schedule option, and then click Edit Schedule Details, you must
configure the schedule for the recurring job.
Schedule options
There are two types of options for configuring a schedule: General Options and Run Day
Options.
General options enable you to determine the date the schedule goes into effect, the time
the job can begin, and the time it can restart during the run day, and the date when the
schedule goes into effect. The selected options apply each day the job is scheduled to run.
Run day options enable you to select the days on which a job can run. Run days consist of
specific dates, a recurring pattern of days, or both. You can also exclude specific dates
from a schedule.
376 Administrator’s Guide
Scheduling Jobs
▼ To edit schedule details for a job:
1. Under General Options or Run Day Options in the tree pane, select the appropriate
options as follows:
Schedule Options
Item Description
General Options
Effective Date Select this option to specify a date when the schedule begins.
On the right pane, select the Make the schedule go into effect
check box, and then enter the date.
Time Window Select this option to specify the time window on any scheduled
run day during which the job can begin.
On the right pane, select both the earliest and the latest time the
job can start. A job can run any time between 11:00:00PM and
10:59:59 PM.
The time window does not extend beyond 24 hours, or more
specifically, beyond 23 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds. For
example, you cannot set a time window starting at 3:00 AM and
ending at 5:00 AM the following day.
Restart Time Interval Select this option to specify a time period during which the job
can be restarted on the run day.
On the right pane, select the Restart task every check box, and
then enter the repeat interval in hours, minutes, and second.
Run Day Options
Week Days Select this option to schedule the job for specific days of the week,
weeks of each month, or days on specific weeks of the month.
On the right pane, select a check box to specify the day that the
job is scheduled to run. You can click Select All to select all the
days, and then click specific days to clear them. To select an entire
column or row, click the heading.
Day Interval Select this option to schedule a task to run every selected number
of days starting from a particular date. By default, the date from
which the interval is calculated is the current date.
Administrating
Backup Exec
On the right pane, select the Every x days check box, and enter
the number of days for the interval. To change the calculated date,
in the calculated from option, enter a new date.
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 377
Scheduling Jobs
Schedule Options (continued)
Item Description
Days of the Month Select this option to schedule a task to run on specific days of each
month.
On the right pane, select the day or days you want the task to run.
You can also select Last to schedule a task to run on the last day of
the month, regardless of the actual date the month ends.
Specific Dates Select this option to schedule specific dates for a task.
On the right pane, select the dates you want from the calendar,
and then click << to move that date to the Include list. To delete a
date from the Include list, select the date and click Delete.
Exclude Dates Select this option to exclude specific dates, such as holidays, from
a run schedule.
On the right pane, select the dates you want to exclude from the
calendar, and then click << to move that date to the Exclude list.
To delete a date from the Exclude list, select the date and click
Delete.
Summary Enables you to verify your schedule. The dialog box includes the
Effective Date, Time Window, Restart Interval, and a calendar.
The calendar displays a six month period with the selected
scheduled run dates in bold.
2. Click OK to return to the Schedule dialog box.
3. You can start the job after editing the schedule or select other options from the
Properties pane.
See also:
“Configuring Holiday Scheduling for Jobs” on page 380
378 Administrator’s Guide
Scheduling Jobs
Configuring Default Schedule Options
You can configure default scheduling parameters for all new jobs you create. If you want
to keep a static schedule for all new jobs that you run according to a schedule, you can set
a default schedule for all jobs and then use the Run according to schedule option during
job setup to make changes, if necessary.
▼ To configure default schedule options for all new jobs that run according to a
schedule:
1. On the Tools menu, click Options.
The Options - Set Application Defaults dialog box appears.
2. On the Properties pane, under Job Defaults, click Schedule.
3. Click Edit Schedule Details and then select the appropriate options. For more
information, see “Schedule Options” on page 377.
4. Click OK to return to the Schedule dialog box.
5. Click View Schedule Summary to verify your schedule.
The Summary dialog box displays the Effective Date, Time Window, Restart Interval,
and a calendar. The calendar displays a six month period with the selected scheduled
run dates in bold.
6. Click Enable automatic cancellation, and then type the number of hours or minutes
in the Cancel job if not completed within option.
This option enables you to cancel the job if is not completed within the selected
number of hours or minutes. Backup Exec starts timing the length of time the job
takes to run when the job actually begins, not when the job is scheduled to begin.
7. Click OK to save the options or select other options from the Properties pane.
See also:
“Backup Exec Defaults” on page 90
Administrating
Backup Exec
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 379
Scheduling Jobs
Configuring Holiday Scheduling for Jobs
You can edit the job properties to prevent a job from running on holidays.
▼ To configure holiday scheduling for an existing job:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2. On the Jobs pane, select the job for which you want to configure holiday scheduling.
3. Under General Tasks in the task pane, click Properties.
The Properties dialog box for the job appears.
4. On the Properties pane, under Frequency, click Schedule.
5. Click Edit Schedule Details to edit the schedule.
6. Under Run Day Options in the tree pane, click Exclude Dates.
7. On the calendar, click the date of the holiday you want to exclude, and then click << to
move the date to the Exclude list.
8. Click OK to return to the Schedule dialog box.
The job will resume on the next scheduled day.
9. You can start the job after configuring the schedule or select other options from the
Properties pane.
380 Administrator’s Guide
Monitoring Jobs
Monitoring Jobs
Backup Exec’s Job Monitor enables you to monitor and perform tasks on active,
scheduled, or completed jobs that have been submitted for processing. The Job Monitor
has two views for jobs: Jobs list and Job Calendar. You can select filters to limit the type of
jobs you want to appear in each view.
The Jobs list view displays active and scheduled jobs in the Current Jobs pane and
successful, completed, failed, and canceled jobs in the Job History pane. The Job
Calendar view displays scheduled, active, and completed jobs in either a day, week, or
monthly view.
Viewing and Filtering Jobs in the Job List View
The Jobs list view displays active, scheduled and job history jobs in the Current Jobs and
Job History panes. You can select filters to limit the jobs that appear in each pane.
▼ To view jobs in the Jobs list view:
❖ On the navigation bar, click Job Monitor and then under Views in the task pane, click
Jobs list.
Administrating
Backup Exec
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 381
Monitoring Jobs
Jobs list view
The information that appears for each job includes the following:
- State
- Job Name
- Device Name
- Job Type
- Job Status
- Priority
- Percent Complete
- Start Time
- Elapsed Time
- Byte Count
382 Administrator’s Guide
Monitoring Jobs
▼ To set View Filters for Current Jobs and Job History:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Monitor.
2. Under Views in the task pane, click Jobs list.
3. Under Current Job View Filters or Job History View Filters, select or clear the
appropriate filters as follows:
Jobs List View Filters
Item Description
Current Job View Filters
Show active jobs Lists jobs currently processing or in the job queue.
Show scheduled jobs Lists the next occurrence for a job.
Job History View Filters
Show successful jobs Lists all jobs that completed without errors.
Show completed jobs Lists jobs that completed, but may contain one or more minor errors.
with exceptions
Show failed jobs Lists jobs that were processed, but one or more significant errors
occurred.
Show canceled jobs Lists jobs that were terminated as the operation was running.
Show last 24 hours Lists all the jobs that were processed in the last 24 hours.
Show last 7 days Lists all the jobs that were processed in the last 7 days.
Show all Lists all jobs that were processed.
See also:
“Viewing and Changing Active Job Status” on page 386
“Viewing and Modifying Scheduled Jobs” on page 390
“Viewing Completed Jobs” on page 394
Administrating
Backup Exec
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 383
Monitoring Jobs
Viewing and Filtering Jobs in the Calendar View
The Job Calendar displays active, scheduled and completed jobs in a day, week, or month
view, sorted by the start time. You can also select filters to limit the jobs that appear in
each view.
▼ To view jobs in the Calendar view:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Monitor and then under Views in the task pane, click
Calendar.
Note Icons at the top of the Job Calendar enable you to select calendar views, navigation,
and display filters without using the task pane.
Calendar view
384 Administrator’s Guide
Monitoring Jobs
2. Under Calendar Views, select the appropriate view for the jobs as follows:
Calendar Views
Item Description
Day Lists all the jobs and information about each job for the selected day.
You can view jobs for a different day by selecting a day from the
calendars that appear. Click the arrows at the top of the calendars to
view the previous or subsequent months.
Week Lists all the jobs for the selected week. For recurring jobs, only the
next 24 occurrences for the job are listed for a day. You can view
previous or subsequent weeks using the scroll bar.
Month Lists all the jobs for the selected month. You can view previous or
subsequent weeks using the scroll bar.
3. If the current day is not selected for a calendar view, under Navigation, click Go To
Today.
The current day appears in the view.
▼ To set View Filters and Display Filters for the Job Calendar:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Monitor.
2. Under Views in the task pane, click Calendar.
3. Under View Filters or Display Filters, select or clear the appropriate filters as follows:
Job Calendar View Filters
Item Description
View Filters
Show active jobs Lists jobs currently processing or in the job queue.
Show scheduled jobs Lists the next occurrence for a job.
Show scheduled job Lists all occurrences of a recurring job. If the Show scheduled jobs
recurrences filter is clear, this filter cannot be selected.
Administrating
Backup Exec
Show successful jobs Lists all jobs that completed without errors.
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 385
Monitoring Jobs
Job Calendar View Filters (continued)
Item Description
Show completed jobs Lists jobs that completed, but may contain one or more minor errors.
with exceptions
Show failed jobs Lists jobs that were processed, but one or more significant errors
occurred.
Show canceled jobs Lists jobs that were terminated as the operation was running.
Display Filters
Show job state icon Displays the job status icon for the jobs.
Show job time Displays the time jobs are scheduled to run.
See also:
“Viewing and Changing Active Job Status” on page 386
“Viewing and Modifying Scheduled Jobs” on page 390
“Viewing Completed Jobs” on page 394
Viewing and Changing Active Job Status
You can view properties and change the status of active jobs that are submitted for
processing in the Jobs list or Calendar view in the Job Monitor. If you select the
Calendar view and the job is not displayed, click the arrow that appears above the
listed jobs to display all the jobs for the selected day.
▼ To view active job properties:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Monitor.
2. Under Views in the task pane, click Jobs list or Calendar.
386 Administrator’s Guide
Monitoring Jobs
3. Select the active job you want to view from the Current Jobs pane or the Job
Calendar, and then under General Tasks in the task pane, click Properties.
The Job Activity dialog box appears. The Job Activity dialog contains two tabs: Job
Activity and Job History. The Job Activity tab only appears for active jobs and
provides detailed information about the job’s current status. The Job History tab
provides a summary of the job as it is being processed. For more information on the
job history, see “Viewing Completed Jobs” on page 394.
The Job Activity tab provides the following information:
Job Activity dialog box
Item Description
Job Name The job name entered during job configuration.
Job log The filename of the job log. The job log cannot be viewed until the
job has completed and is located in Program
Files\VERITAS\Backup Exec\NT\Data.
Status The status of the operation. Possible statuses for an active job
include:
Running. The operation is underway.
Queued. The job has been initiated, but Backup Exec is actively
looking for a suitable drive or media, waiting for the Open File
Option to initialize, or waiting for a pre- or post-job command to
complete.
Cancel Pending. The job has been canceled, but Backup Exec cannot
process the request immediately. This status is displayed until the
job is actually canceled. The job is then displayed in Job History with
a status of Canceled.
Loading Media. The media is being loaded and positioned on the
target device, or the job is waiting for the Open File Option to
initialize.
Pre-processing. Backup Exec is calculating the amount of data that
will be backed up.
Media Request. The job requires additional media because the media
is full or there is no available media in the device.
Device Paused. The device that the job was sent to is paused.
Server Paused. The Backup Exec server is paused.
Administrating
Operation The type of operation currently in progress (Archive, Backup,
Backup Exec
Catalog, Restore, Verify, Backup Scan and etc.).
Server name The media server processing the job.
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 387
Monitoring Jobs
Job Activity dialog box (continued)
Item Description
Device name The name of the storage device processing the job.
Source The media or share being processed. The icon field to the left of the
field name displays either:
A disk drive icon when a backup or archive operation is
running, or
A tape drive icon when a restore or verify operation is running.
Destination Where the data is being written. The icon field to the left of the field
name displays either:
A tape device icon when a backup operation is running, or
A disk drive icon when a restore operation is running.
Current Directory Name of the current directory being processed. The icon field to the
left of the field displays either:
A folder if the active job is a backup or restore operation
No icon, if the active job is not a backup or restore operation, but
a job such as an Erase or Format operation.
Current File Name of the current file being processed. The icon field to the left of
the field name displays either:
A page, if the active job is a backup or restore operation
No icon, if the active job is not a backup or restore operation, but
a job such as an Erase or Format operation.
Statistics
Directories Number of directories processed.
Files Number of files processed.
Skipped Files Number of files skipped during the operation.
Corrupt Files Number of corrupt files encountered during the operation.
Files in use Number of files in use encountered during the operation.
Job Rate Amount of data backed up per minute for the entire job.
Bytes Number of bytes processed.
388 Administrator’s Guide
Monitoring Jobs
Job Activity dialog box (continued)
Item Description
Start Time Time the operation started.
Elapsed Time Length of time that has elapsed since the operation started.
Percent complete Select percentage of the job that has completed. To display this
option, select Display progress indicators for backup jobs in
Preferences in the Tools - Options menu.
Estimated total bytes The total number of bytes for the backup job estimated during a
prescan. To display this option, select Display progress indicators
for backup jobs in Preferences in the Tools - Options menu.
Estimated time The estimated time it will take for the job to complete. To display
remaining this option, select Display progress indicators for backup jobs in
Preferences in the Tools - Options menu.
Cancel Job Cancels the processing of the job. If the job is scheduled, it will run
again at the next scheduled time. Canceling a job may take a
considerable amount of time depending on the tape drive selected
for the job.
Print Prints the Job Activity information. You must have a printer
attached to your system and configured in order to print the report.
▼ To cancel an active job:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Monitor.
2. Under Views in the task pane, click Jobs list or Calendar.
3. Select the active job from the Current Jobs pane or the Job Calendar, and then under
Active Job Tasks in the task pane, click Cancel.
Confirm the cancellation of the job. If the job is scheduled, it will run again at the next
scheduled time.
You can select multiple jobs in the Jobs list view in the Job Monitor by selecting a job,
and then pressing the <Ctrl> or <Shift> keys while you click other jobs that you want
to select. This allows you to perform tasks such as Cancel on more than one job at a
time, as long as the jobs are of similar type.
Administrating
Backup Exec
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 389
Monitoring Jobs
▼ To place all scheduled occurrences of an active job on hold:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Monitor.
2. Under Views in the task pane, click Jobs list or Calendar.
3. Select the active job from the Current Jobs pane or the Job Calendar, and then under
Active Job Tasks in the task pane, click Hold Schedule.
The active job continues and all scheduled occurrences of the job are placed on hold.
To remove the hold on future jobs, click Hold Schedule again.
You can select multiple jobs in the Jobs list view in the Job Monitor by selecting a job,
and then pressing the <Ctrl> or <Shift> keys while you click other jobs that you want
to select. This allows you to perform tasks such as Hold Schedule on more than one
job at a time, as long as the jobs are of similar type.
See also:
“Viewing Completed Jobs” on page 394
Viewing and Modifying Scheduled Jobs
You can modify scheduled jobs submitted for processing using the Jobs list or Calendar
view in the Job Monitor. The Calendar view also enables you to schedule a new job.
The Jobs list view displays a single occurrence of a scheduled job in the Current Jobs
pane. The Calendar view can display a single occurrence or all occurrences of a scheduled
job depending on the View Filters selected. If you select the Calendar view and the job is
not displayed, click the arrow that appears above the listed jobs to display all the jobs for
the selected day.
You can select multiple jobs in the Jobs list view in the Job Monitor by selecting a job, and
then pressing the <Ctrl> or <Shift> keys while you click other jobs that you want to select.
This allows you to perform tasks such as Test Run or Delete on more than one job at a
time, as long as the jobs are of similar type.
Running a Scheduled Job Immediately
You can run a scheduled job immediately and the job will also run on the next scheduled
occurrence.
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Monitor.
2. Under Views in the task pane, click Jobs list or Calendar.
390 Administrator’s Guide
Monitoring Jobs
3. Select the scheduled job from the Current Jobs pane or the Job Calendar, and then
under Scheduled Job Tasks in the task pane, click Run now.
The scheduled job is submitted to the job queue for processing.
Placing a Scheduled Job on Hold
You can place a scheduled job on hold to prevent the job from running. The scheduled
job will not run until you change the job’s hold status.
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Monitor.
2. Under Views in the task pane, click Jobs list or Calendar.
3. Select the scheduled job from the Current Jobs pane or the Job Calendar, and then
under Scheduled Job Tasks in the task pane, click Hold Schedule.
The scheduled job is placed on hold. To remove the hold and run the job according to
the schedule, click Hold Schedule again.
You can select multiple jobs in the Jobs list view in the Job Monitor by selecting a job,
and then pressing the <Ctrl> or <Shift> keys while you click other jobs that you want
to select. This allows you to perform tasks such as Hold Schedule on more than one
job at a time, as long as the jobs are of similar type.
Changing the Priority for a Scheduled Job
The priority determines the order that jobs run. If another job is scheduled to run at the
same time as this job, the priority you set determines which job runs first.
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Monitor.
2. Under Views in the task pane, click Jobs list or Calendar.
Administrating
Backup Exec
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 391
Monitoring Jobs
3. Select the scheduled job from the Current Jobs pane or the Job Calendar, and then
under Scheduled Job Tasks in the task pane, click the priority you want to select for
the job.
Priorities include:
- Highest priority
- High priority
- Medium priority
- Low priority
- Lowest priority
The priority is changed for all occurrences of the scheduled job.
You can select multiple jobs in the Jobs list view in the Job Monitor by selecting a job,
and then pressing the <Ctrl> or <Shift> keys while you click other jobs that you want
to select. This allows you to perform tasks such as setting priorities on more than one
job at a time, as long as the jobs are of similar type.
Running a Test Job for a Scheduled Job
The test run option determines if a scheduled backup will complete successfully. During
the test run, the tape capacity, credentials, and media are checked. If the test job
determines there is a problem, the job will continue to run and the problem will appear in
the job log.
▼ To run a test job for a scheduled job:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Monitor.
2. Under Views in the task pane, click Jobs list or Calendar.
3. Select the active job from the Current Jobs pane or the Job Calendar, and then under
Scheduled Job Tasks in the task pane, click Run test job.
You can select multiple jobs in the Jobs list view in the Job Monitor by selecting a job,
and then pressing the <Ctrl> or <Shift> keys while you click other jobs that you want
to select. This allows you to perform tasks such as Test Run on more than one job at a
time, as long as the jobs are of similar type.
4. Enter test run properties for the job. For more information, see “General settings
options for test run job” on page 316.
392 Administrator’s Guide
Monitoring Jobs
5. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification and enter notification
information for the items. For more information, see “Selecting Recipients for Job
Notification” on page 509.
6. On the Properties pane, under Frequency, click Schedule and then click Submit job
on hold if you want to submit the job with an on-hold status.
Select this option if you want to submit the job, but do not want the job to run until
you change the job’s hold status.
7. Click Run Now to submit the test run job.
Deleting Scheduled Jobs
Deleting a scheduled job from the Job Monitor removes a single job occurrence or all
occurrences of the scheduled job.
▼ To delete a scheduled job:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Monitor.
2. Under Views in the task pane, click Jobs list or Calendar.
3. Select the scheduled job from the Current Jobs pane or the Job Calendar, and then
under Scheduled Job Tasks in the task pane, click Delete.
You can select multiple jobs in the Jobs list view in the Job Monitor by selecting a job,
and then pressing the <Ctrl> or <Shift> keys while you click other jobs that you want
to select. This allows you to perform tasks such as Delete on more than one job at a
time, as long as the jobs are of similar type.
4. After clicking Delete, you are prompted to delete backup selection lists that are no
longer in use by any other jobs. Click Yes to all to delete all of the unused backup
selection lists, or click No to all to leave the backup selection lists intact.
To delete selection lists later, on the Edit menu, click Delete Selection Lists.
5. Confirm the deletion of the scheduled job. If you are deleting the job from the Jobs list
view, all occurrences of the job will be deleted. If you are deleting the job from the
Calendar view, you can delete a single day’s occurrences or all occurrences of the job. Administrating
Backup Exec
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 393
Monitoring Jobs
Viewing Completed Jobs
You can view detailed job-related properties for each job that has been processed. The Job
History dialog box contains two tabs: Job History and Job Log. The Job History tab
provides summary information for the job. The Job Log tab provides job and file statistics.
Most job logs display in XML format. However, some logs may display in text format.
▼ To view completed job properties:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Monitor.
2. Under Views in the task pane, click Jobs list or Calendar.
3. Select the completed job you want to view from the Job History pane or the Job
Calendar, and then under General Tasks in the task pane, click Properties.
The Job History dialog box appears. Click Expand All to view all the information
contained in the topics. Click Collapse All to hide the information in the topics.
The Job History tab provides the following job summary and set detail information:
Job History
Item Description
Job name The job name entered during job configuration.
Job type The type of operation that was performed (Archive, Backup,
Catalog, Restore, Verify).
Job status The status of the operation.
Job log The filename and location of the job log.
Server name The media server that processed the job.
Selection list name The selection list processed in the job.
Device Name The name of the device that processed the job.
Target name The name of the device selected during job configuration.
Media set name The name of the media set that processed the job.
Job Summary
394 Administrator’s Guide
Monitoring Jobs
Job History (continued)
Item Description
Original start time Time the job was submitted for processing.
Job started Time the operation started.
Job ended Length of time the operation took.
Files Total number of files processed.
Directories Total number of directories processed.
Skipped files Number of files skipped during the operation.
Corrupt files Number of corrupt files encountered during the operation.
Files in use Number of open files encountered during the operation.
Byte count Number of bytes processed.
Job Rate Amount of data backed up per minute for the entire job. The job rate
is calculated by dividing the byte count for the entire job by the
elapsed time for the entire job.
Set Detail Information
Set type The type of operation that was performed on the media set (Archive,
Backup, Catalog, Restore, Verify).
Set status The status of the operation.
Set description The job name entered during job configuration.
Resource name The name of the resource accessed during the operation.
Logon account The Backup Exec logon account used to access the resource.
Agent used Displays if an agent was used during the operation.
Advanced Open File Displays if the Advanced Open File Option was used during the
Option used operation.
Administrating
Backup Exec
Start time Time the operation started.
End time Length of time the operation took.
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 395
Monitoring Jobs
Job History (continued)
Item Description
Files Total number of files processed.
Directories Total number of directories processed.
Skipped Files Number of files skipped during the operation.
Corrupt files Number of corrupt files encountered during the operation.
Files in use Number of open files encountered during the operation.
Byte count Number of bytes processed.
Rate Number of megabytes processed per minute.
Media used Name of the media used during the operation. If the job does not
require additional media, this option will not display.
File was skipped Lists the name of the file that was skipped. If the job does not
contain a skipped file, this option will not display.
File is in use Lists the name of the file in use. If the job does not encounter a file in
use, this option will not display.
File is corrupt Lists the name of the corrupt file. If the job does not contain a
corrupt file, this option will not display.
4. Click Job Log to view detailed information about the job.
The job log is in an HTML format. Click Expand All to view all the information in the
topics or Collapse All to hide the information in the topics.
The Job Log tab provides the following information:
Job Log
Item Description
Job Information Displays the job server, job name, job start date and time, job type,
and job log name.
Device and Media Displays the robotic library name, drive name, slot number, media
Information label, media ID, media overwrite protection and append date and
time, and the targeted media set.
396 Administrator’s Guide
Monitoring Jobs
Job Log (continued)
Item Description
Job Operation Displays the options selected during job configuration and agents
used during job processing.
Job Completion Status Displays the job end time, completion status, error codes, error
description, and error category. The job completion section is green,
orange, or red, depending on the job status.
Errors Displays a detailed description of the errors encountered during job
processing. The errors are grouped by set and labeled. The label
includes the operation and destination resource name for that set.
The error section is red in the job log.
Exceptions Displays a detailed description of the minor errors encountered
during job processing. The exceptions section is orange in the job
log.
5. Click Print if you want to print the job history or job log; however, you must have a
printer attached to your system and configured in order to print the report.
6. Click OK.
See also:
“Understanding Job Log Status” on page 398
“Configuring Default Job Log Options” on page 400
Deleting Completed Jobs
You can delete a job from the Job Monitor, or have Backup Exec automatically delete the
job history using database maintenance. If you delete a job, it is completely removed from
the system and cannot be recovered.
▼ To delete a completed job:
1. On the navigation bar, click Job Monitor.
2. Under Views in the task pane, click Jobs list or Calendar.
Administrating
Backup Exec
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 397
Monitoring Jobs
3. Select the job you want to delete from the Job History pane or the Job Calendar, and
then under General Tasks in the task pane, click Delete.
You can select multiple jobs in the Jobs list view in the Job Monitor by selecting a job,
and then pressing the <Ctrl> or <Shift> keys while you click other jobs that you want
to select. This allows you to perform tasks such as Delete on more than one job at a
time, as long as the jobs are of similar type.
4. After clicking Delete, you are prompted to delete backup selection lists that are no
longer in use by any other jobs. Click Yes to all to delete all of the unused backup
selection lists, or click No to all to leave the backup selection list intact.
To delete selection lists later, on the Edit menu, click Delete Selection Lists.
5. Confirm the deletion of the job history and associated job log.
See also:
“Configuring Database Maintenance” on page 405
Understanding Job Log Status
Backup Exec includes seven possible job completion statuses for jobs that were processed.
Job statuses include the following:
◆ Successful. The job completed without errors.
◆ Completed with exceptions. The job completed, but a file in use, skipped, or corrupted
file was encountered during the operation.
◆ Failed over. The job ran in a cluster environment and was active on one machine and
then the cluster performed a failover and the job was restarted on another server in
the cluster. There are two separate sets of job history when a job is failed over. The first
job history will have the Failed over status and the second job history will have the
status that is appropriate for the completed job.
◆ Resumed. The status is the same as the failed over status, however the Apply
CheckPoint Restart option was selected.
◆ Canceled. The administrator terminated the operation as it was running.
◆ Canceled, timed out. The Enable automatic cancellation feature in the Frequency -
Schedule property was enabled and the job was not completed within the specified
timeframe.
398 Administrator’s Guide
Monitoring Jobs
◆ Failed. The operation took place, but one or more significant errors occurred. The job
log should indicate what caused the errors so that you can decide if you want to run
the job again. For example, if you get a job failure occurred due to a lost connection
during job processing, you could choose to resubmit the job when the connection
becomes intact.
Note If a drive loses power during a backup operation, you should restart the backup job
using a different tape. You can restore the data written to the tape up to the point of
the power loss, but you should not reuse the tape for subsequent backup
operations.
A failed job will have an error message in the Errors section of the job log. The most
common errors are searchable in the VERITAS Online Knowledge Base at
support.veritas.com
Some reasons a job may fail are:
- Devices specified by the job were not available when the job was run.
- The logon account information used in the backup job is incorrect. Verify the
logon account information is valid for the resource being backed up.
- There was a problem with the storage device when the job was run.
- The computer being backed up was shut down prior to or during the backup job.
Administrating
Backup Exec
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 399
Monitoring Jobs
Configuring Default Job Log Options
You can configure default options for job logs that specify the amount of detail you want
to include in the completed job log. For jobs that produce large job logs, for example, a
backup of a considerable number of separate files, you may want to reduce the amount of
detail in the job log. The size of the job log increases proportionally to the level of detail
configured for the job log.
▼ To configure default job log options:
1. On the Tools menu, click Options.
2. On the Properties pane, under Job Defaults, click Job Logs.
3. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Job Log default options
Item Description
Information to include in log
Summary information Select this option to include the job name, job type, job log name,
only media server name, storage device, the starting date and time, any
errors encountered, ending date and time, and completion statistics.
This option also includes the name of files that were skipped, the
media set name, the backup type and results of the verify operation
if one was performed.
Summary information Select this option to include summary information and a list of all
and directories processed subdirectories.
processed
Summary information, Select this option to include Summary information, processed
directories, and files subdirectories, and a list of all the filenames that were processed.
processed
Summary information, Select this option to include Summary information, processed
directories, files and subdirectories, a list of all the filenames and their attributes.
file details Selecting this option increases the job log sizes significantly.
Job log file base Enter the prefix to be used for the job logs that are processed.
See also:
“Backup Exec Defaults” on page 90
400 Administrator’s Guide
Monitoring Jobs
Using Job Logs with Vertical Applications
The Backup Exec Administration Console provides a view of the job logs in HTML
format. If necessary, you can convert the job logs to a text format for use with vertical
applications.
To convert a job log file to a text format, type the following at a command prompt:
bemcmd -o31 -f"<pathname\job log filename>"
For example, to display the job log C:\program files\Backup
Exec\NT\Data\bex00001.xml in text format to the command prompt, you would type:
bemcmd -o31 -f"C:\program files\Backup
Exec\NT\Data\bex00001.xml"
To redirect the job log to a file, you would type:
bemcmd -o31 -f"C:\program files\Backup
Exec\NT\Data\bex00001.xml" > bex00001.txt
See also:
“Using the Command Line Applet” on page 611
Administrating
Backup Exec
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 401
Error-Handling Rules
Error-Handling Rules
Backup Exec has predefined error-handling rules that determine how job errors are
handled. They apply to all backup jobs and are defined based on the cause of the failure.
The rules can be configured to automatically perform operations such as retry, pause, or
cancel a job after a failure occurs.
If Backup Exec is running in a cluster environment, you can also configure the cluster
failover error-handling rule. However, the rule only appears if the server on which
Backup Exec is installed is in a cluster environment. The cluster failover error-handling
rule and the Apply CheckPoint Restart option in Cluster Backup Job Properties work
together to enable you to resume jobs from the point of failover. The option is dependent
on the error-handling rule, so if you disable the rule, the option will automatically be
disabled to match the rule’s setting.
Error-handling rules are disabled by default, except for cluster failover, which is enabled
by default. Error-handling rules can be enabled or disabled for jobs that result in one of
the following types of errors:
◆ Resource Errors
◆ Server Errors
◆ Job Cancellation
◆ Job Errors
◆ System Errors
◆ Network Errors
◆ Backup Device Errors
◆ Security Errors
◆ Backup Media Errors
◆ Other Errors (errors that are not in any of the previous categories)
◆ Cluster Failover
See also:
“Enabling or Disabling Checkpoint Restart” on page 768
402 Administrator’s Guide
Error-Handling Rules
Configuring Error-Handling Rules
You can configure error-handling rules for jobs in which the final status, error category,
and error code match a defined rule. The settings for error-handling rules enable you to
rename the error-handling rule, activate the rule, and retry, pause, or cancel the job.
Note If Backup Exec is running in a cluster environment, the cluster failover
error-handling rule appears. You can only enable or disable the rule, there are no
additional options you can configure.
▼ To configure an error-handling rule:
1. On the Tools menu, click Configure Error-Handling Rules.
The Error-Handling Rules dialog box appears. Each rule displays the Name, Job
Status, Error Category, and Enabled status.
2. Select the error-handling rule you want to configure, and then click Settings.
3. Complete the items in the Error-Handling Rule Settings dialog box as follows:
Error-Handling Rule Settings
Item Description
Name The title of the error-handling rule.
Final Job Status The status for the job that will activate the rule. The job status can be
viewed, but not modified. Available statuses include:
Error
Canceled
Failed
Administrating
Backup Exec
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 403
Error-Handling Rules
Error-Handling Rule Settings (continued)
Item Description
Error Category The category of error for which the rule will be applied. The error
category can be viewed, but not modified. Available error categories
include:
Backup Device
Backup Media
Job
Network
Other
Resource
Security
Server
System
Enabled Select this check box to enable the error-handling rule.
Retry Options
Retry Job Select this check box to enable Backup Exec to retry the job.
Maximum retries Enter the number of times you want to retry the job. The maximum
number of times the job can be retried is 99.
Retry Interval Enter the number of minutes to wait before the job is retried. The
maximum number of minutes is 1440.
Final Job Disposition
Pause job until error Select this option to place the job on hold until you can manually
condition has been clear the error. After you clear the error, you must remove the hold
manually cleared for the job.
Cancel job and Select this option to cancel the current job after the selected number
reschedule for its next of retry options has been met. After the job is canceled, it will run at
scheduled service the next scheduled time.
Notes Enter information for the error-handling rule.
404 Administrator’s Guide
Configuring Database Maintenance
Configuring Database Maintenance
The Database Maintenance option enables you to manage the Backup Exec database and
the Desktop and Laptop Option (DLO) database. Each database maintenance operation is
performed independently on each database. The Backup Exec database maintains a record
of files and data you have configured such as templates, catalogs, and etc. Database
maintenance enables you to perform the following:
◆ Optimize database size
◆ Delete expired data
◆ Save the contents of the database files
◆ Perform a database consistency check
You do not have to select all the options; however, each one performs a different process
that enables you to protect and maintain your database. Selecting all the options enables
you to recover the database quickly and maintain optimal performance.
Informational alerts are generated at the beginning and the end of the database
maintenance process each time database maintenance is performed. The alerts provide
details about the type of maintenance that was performed on each database and the
amount of time the maintenance took to complete. If the database maintenance process
fails, the alert indicates where the failure occurred and the reason for the failure.
▼ To configure database maintenance:
1. On the Tools menu, click Options.
2. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click Database Maintenance.
Administrating
Backup Exec
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 405
Configuring Database Maintenance
3. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Database Maintenance options
Item Descriptions
Enable Backup Exec Select this check box to activate the database maintenance process.
database maintenance
Last time maintenance The date and time the last database maintenance was performed.
was performed
Perform database Enter the time you want to perform database maintenance. All the
maintenance at maintenance will occur once a day at the time you specify.
Delete expired data
Delete expired data Select this check box to activate the deletion of expired job history,
job logs, alert history, and reports from the Backup Exec database
after the specified number of days have passed.
Note For the Desktop and Laptop Option (DLO) database, only the
Alert History setting applies. DLO does not have job history,
job logs, or reports.
Number of days to keep data before deleting it from the Backup Exec database
Job history Enter the number of days to keep job history data in the database
before it is deleted. Job history data includes summary statistics for a
job and details about media, devices and backup sets used to
process the job.
Job logs Enter the number of days to keep job logs in the database before
they are deleted. Job logs includes detailed information about the
job.
Alert history Enter the number of days to keep alert history data in the database
before it is deleted. Alert history data includes property and
response information for the alert.
Reports Enter the number of days to keep report data in the database before
it is deleted. Report data includes property information about report
jobs that were generated. The report itself is not deleted.
406 Administrator’s Guide
Using ExecView in Backup Exec
Database Maintenance options (continued)
Item Descriptions
Perform database Select this check box to check the logical and physical consistency of
consistency check the data in the database.
Note The option is not enabled by default, but it is recommended
that you run a consistency check periodically at a time when
there is minimal activity from Backup Exec.
Optimize database size Select this check box to reorganize fragmented pages and decrease
the size of the physical database to 10 percent above what is actually
used.
Save contents of Select this check box to dump the data contained in the database into
database to the the Backup Exec data directory so that the database backup file
Backup Exec data (BEDB.bak) can be backed up. The dump file will be maintained in
directory the data directory until the next database maintenance process is
performed and then this file will be overwritten. Selecting this
option enables you to recover the database in the event of failure.
For more information, see “Recover a Media Server Database” on
page 835.
4. Click OK.
Using ExecView in Backup Exec
ExecView is a web-based monitoring tool that includes a user interface called the
ExecView Console. ExecView provides a single management console for locally or
remotely monitoring and managing devices, jobs, and alerts for your Backup Exec media
servers. The ExecView Console can be launched on Windows servers from Internet
ExplorerTM. The ExecView Communication Module (ECM) is installed on your media
servers and sends information about your media servers to a database on the ExecView
Information Server (EIS), a web server that resides on Windows servers.
From the ExecView Console, you can monitor your media servers, devices attached to
those servers, jobs, and alerts.
Administrating
Backup Exec
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 407
Using ExecView in Backup Exec
Your ExecView Console, EIS, and ECM can run on three separate systems or you can have
any combination of these components residing on the same system. For example, your
ExecView Console and EIS can reside on the same Windows server.
ExecView Components in Common Scenario
ExecView Console
Windows servers
ExecView Information Server
Windows server
ExecView Communication Module
(Backup Exec Servers)
Windows servers or NetWare 4.2 and later
You can have multiple EIS and multiple media servers reporting through the same
ExecView Console, but the console can only report information about devices, jobs, and
alerts from one EIS at a time.
To monitor media servers from ExecView, you must first create a profile for the EIS, and
then create a server group, a group of media servers that report to the EIS.
Placing servers into groups allows you to:
◆ Control the size of the display in ExecView.
◆ Monitor your enterprise network more efficiently.
Servers can be grouped by any category, such as department or function, and can belong
to multiple server groups. You can create as many groups as you need, and each group
can contain as many servers as necessary.
408 Administrator’s Guide
Using ExecView in Backup Exec
A user can set preferences for how many scheduled and completed jobs are displayed for
each server, whether the time displayed on the ExecView Console’s screens will be the
local system’s time or the media server time, and set the refresh rate for the ExecView
Console. If multiple profiles are created, each profile can have different user preferences
set. You can log into to multiple ExecView Consoles using different profiles; however,
each ExecView Console only allows one user (profile) to be logged on at a time.
For more information about ExecView, see the ExecView documentation in the
ExecView\language\Docs directory on the Backup Exec CD.
Configuring ExecView
You can configure ExecView connection settings and then save them in Backup Exec. You
can also edit the settings at any time using the configuration method. Configuring the
connection settings enables you to quickly launch the ExecView console through Backup
Exec.
▼ To configure ExecView connection settings:
1. On the Tools menu, point to ExecView, and then click Connection Settings.
The ExecView Information Server Settings dialog box appears.
2. Enter the appropriate options as follows:
ExecView Information Server Settings dialog box
Item Description
Name of remote host Enter the host machine on which the ExecView Information Server
machine on which the (EIS) runs. EIS is a web server that resides on a Windows system. It
ExecView Information is the central server that the ExecView Communication Module
Server (EIS) is running (ECM) communicates with and sends data to.
Port number on which Enter the port number on which the EIS listens for console
the EIS web server is connections. The console communicates with the EIS using http
listening protocol on this port.
3. Click OK.
Administrating
Backup Exec
Chapter 7, Administrating Backup Exec 409
Using ExecView in Backup Exec
▼ To launch the ExecView console:
❖ On the Tools menu, point to ExecView, and then click ExecView Console.
If the ExecView Information Server settings are configured, the ExecView Console is
launched. If the settings are not configured, you must enter the ExecView Information
Server settings using the steps in the previous procedure.
410 Administrator’s Guide
Restoring Data
Restoring Data 8
The restore operation allows you to retrieve information from storage media, including
media created with backup software other than Backup Exec, and restore it to any server
or remote workstation.
In most cases, you will need to restore only one file, but there may be times when
directories, groups of files, or (in a disaster situation) an entire system will need to be
restored. Backup Exec offers several convenient methods for finding the files you need to
restore:
◆ Resource view. The resource view lists backed up data by the resource from which it
was backed up. This feature is useful for finding files that were located on a certain
server or workstation.
◆ Media view. The media view lists the data that is contained on a piece of media. This
feature is useful for viewing the contents of a tape that was backed up from another
media server.
◆ Advanced file selection. The Advanced File Selection feature allows you to specify file
and date attributes for the data you want to restore.
◆ Search catalogs. The Search Catalogs feature makes it easy to find files that you want to
restore, or to make sure that you have backups of certain files. This feature also allows
you to see all cataloged, backed up versions of a file, so you can restore earlier
versions if needed.
You can select options that you want to use for most restore operations. Backup Exec will
use these default options unless you override these options when setting up a specific
restore job.
411
Restore Operations and the Catalog
When creating your restore jobs, you can:
◆ Restore data to the system from which it was originally backed up or redirect the
restore to another system.
◆ Specify if the restore job should begin processing immediately or schedule it to run at
a future time.
◆ Specify which local network is to be used for restoring data, ensuring that other
connected critical networks are not affected by this Backup Exec operation.
See also:
“Using the Resource View” on page 444
“Using the Media View” on page 444
“Selecting Data to Restore” on page 444
“Using Advanced File Selection to Restore” on page 446
Restore Operations and the Catalog
While backing up data from a resource, Backup Exec creates a set of catalog files that
reside on the media server and on the media. These catalog files contain information
about the contents of all media and are used when selections are made for restore jobs.
Media backed up at other Backup Exec installations must be cataloged by the local media
server before data can be viewed in the Restore Job Properties dialog box because the
catalog for the media does not exist on the media server. The media must have a Catalog
operation performed on it before files can be selected to restore.
See also:
“Cataloging Media in a Drive” on page 413
“Setting Catalog Defaults” on page 415
“Catalog Levels” on page 418
412 Administrator’s Guide
Restoring Data
Restore Operations and the Catalog
Cataloging Media in a Drive
Use Catalog to log the contents of a media created by a product other than this installation
of Backup Exec (imported media), or to create a new catalog on the local hard drive if the
catalog for the media no longer exists. Media must have a catalog before data can be
restored from it or verified. You can also catalog backup-to-disk files. If the media is being
used by this system for the first time, you may need to inventory the media first (see
“Inventorying Media in Devices” on page 171).
▼ To catalog media:
1. On the navigation bar, click Devices.
2. Select the device containing the media to be cataloged, and then select the media you
want to catalog.
3. Under Media Tasks in the task pane, select New catalog.
4. Select the Device options as described in “Device Options for Catalog Jobs” on
page 414.
5. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click General, and select the options as
described in “General Options for Catalog Jobs” on page 415.
6. If you want a person or group to be notified when the job completes, on the Properties
pane, under Settings, click Notification, and then select the options you want (see
“Selecting Recipients for Job Notification” on page 509).
7. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
“Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
The catalog operation can be monitored or canceled through the Job Monitor.
See also:
“Using Backup-to-Disk Folders and Files” on page 149
“Monitoring Jobs” on page 381
“Setting Catalog Defaults” on page 415
“Selecting Data to Restore” on page 444
“Canceling a Restore Operation” on page 462
Chapter 8, Restoring Data 413
Restore Operations and the Catalog
Device Options for Catalog Jobs
When you select to create a catalog job, the first options that appear are the Device
options.
Catalog Job Properties dialog box These options include:
Device options for catalog job
Item Description
Device Select the device on which this job will run.
Password If this media is password protected and being cataloged by this
system for the first time, enter the password.
Confirm Password If this media is password protected and being cataloged by this
system for the first time, re-enter the password.
414 Administrator’s Guide
Restoring Data
Restore Operations and the Catalog
General Options for Catalog Jobs
General options for a catalog job include:
General settings options for job
Item Description
Job name Enter a name for the job or accept the default name.
Job priority Select the priority level for this job. If another job is scheduled to run
at the same time as this job, the priority you set determines which job
runs first. Your choices are:
Highest
High
Medium
Low
Lowest
Setting Catalog Defaults
▼ To configure catalog defaults:
1. On the Tools menu, select Options.
2. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click Catalog.
Chapter 8, Restoring Data 415
Restore Operations and the Catalog
Default catalog options
3. Select the appropriate options as follows:
Default catalog options
Item Description
Use storage media-based Select this option to allow Backup Exec to read the catalog
catalogs information from the media.
Media-based catalogs allow quick cataloging of tapes that are not
included in the disk-based catalog (for example, media that was
written by another installation of Backup Exec). This feature
allows tapes to be cataloged in minutes, rather than the hours
required with traditional file-by-file cataloging methods.
If you want to create a new catalog by having Backup Exec read
each file block, clear this option. Clearing this option is only
recommended if normal catalog methods are unsuccessful.
416 Administrator’s Guide
Restoring Data
Restore Operations and the Catalog
Default catalog options (continued)
Item Description
Truncate catalogs after x Select this option to retain only the header information and to
days remove all file and directory details after the specified number of
days. This option reduces the size of the catalogs considerably.
After the catalogs have been truncated, the files and directories
cannot be restored unless the media is recataloged.
Note The last access date is not reset when catalogs are
truncated. Therefore, if you select to have catalogs
truncated after 20 days and then select Remove
unused catalogs after 30 days, the catalogs will be
truncated on the 20th day. On the 30th day, unless
the catalogs have been accessed, they will be
removed.
Remove unused catalogs This enables Backup Exec to automatically delete disk-stored
after x days catalogs that have not been accessed in the specified number of
days. Enabling this feature can help manage disk space used by
catalogs; however, after removing catalog information for media,
the media must then be re-cataloged before data can be selected
from it for a restore operation. The access date for disk-stored
catalogs is updated each time data is restored from, or appended
to the media.
Current path The path where the catalog files are located. This path defaults to
\Catalogs in the \Backup Exec\NT directory.
Catalog drive Select a volume where the catalog files are located. This is useful
if you have limited disk space on your media server.
Catalog path Specify a path on the volume for the catalog files. If the path you
provide does not exist, you will be prompted to create the path.
4. Click OK.
See also:
“Restore Operations and the Catalog” on page 412
“Catalog Levels” on page 418
Chapter 8, Restoring Data 417
Restore Operations and the Catalog
Catalog Levels
The amount of information that can be viewed through the catalog for media is
determined by the media’s “catalog level”. Backup Exec fully catalogs each backup;
however, there may be instances where media does not appear as fully cataloged in the
Restore Job Properties dialog box. The following are possible catalog levels within the
Backup Exec system as show in the Media view and within Restore selections:
Media catalog levels
Item Description
Fully Cataloged Media With fully-cataloged media, you can:
View information on all the directories and files contained in
each backup set.
Search for files to restore.
Use the file versioning feature.
Truncated Cataloged Truncated cataloged media lists only backup set information. No
Media files or file attributes can be viewed. This version of Backup Exec
writes only full catalogs. However, truncated cataloged media that
was migrated from earlier versions of Backup Exec, but not
cataloged by this version, will appear as truncated cataloged media.
Truncated cataloged media will not allow you to make restore
selections. You must catalog the media to view and select files to
restore.
Uncataloged Media There is no catalog information for the media. You must catalog the
media to view and select files to restore.
See also:
“Setting Catalog Defaults” on page 415
“Restore Operations and the Catalog” on page 412
418 Administrator’s Guide
Restoring Data
Restoring Data to a Server or Workstation
Restoring Data to a Server or Workstation
Restoring data to a server or workstation involves the creating of a restore job in which
you specify:
◆ Source
◆ Destination
◆ Settings
◆ Frequency
Unless you specify otherwise, the restore job will use the default options set through the
Tools menu.
You can use the Restore Wizard to have Backup Exec guide you through the creation of a
restore job, but after you become familiar with Backup Exec, you will probably choose to
set your options by configuring restore job properties.
See also:
“Setting Restore Defaults” on page 457
Using the Restore Wizard
▼ To launch the Restore Wizard:
1. From the navigation bar, click Job Setup.
2. Under Restore Tasks in the task pane, select New job using wizard.
3. Follow the on-screen prompts.
Chapter 8, Restoring Data 419
Restoring Data to a Server or Workstation
Creating a Manual Restore Job by Configuring Job Properties
▼ To restore data to a server or workstation:
1. On the navigation bar, click Restore.
2. Select the data to be restored (see “Selecting Data to Restore” on page 444), and
complete other Selections options as described in “Selections Options for Restore
Jobs” on page 423.
Note To protect remote resources, you must install the Backup Exec Remote Agent for
Windows Servers on the remote computer.
3. On the Properties pane, under Destination, click Device.
4. Select the device containing the data being restored.
5. On the Properties pane, under Settings, click General, and select the options as
described in “General Options for Restore Jobs” on page 425.
You can select additional configuration options for the restore job before selecting to
run or schedule the job. Select additional options on the Restore Job Properties dialog
box’s Properties pane:
- If you want to redirect this job to another system other than the one from which
the data was backed up, on the Properties pane, under Destination, click one of
the following (see “Redirecting a Restore Operation” on page 452):
- File Redirection. Select this option to redirect file sets.
- SQL Redirection. Select this option to redirect SQL Server sets to another
SQL server.
- Exchange Redirection. Select this option to redirect Exchange sets to another
Exchange server.
- Sharepoint Redirection. Select this option to redirect Sharepoint Portal
Server sets to another Sharepoint server.
420 Administrator’s Guide
Restoring Data
Restoring Data to a Server or Workstation
- If you want to set advanced options for the restore job, on the Properties pane,
under Settings, click Advanced. Then, complete the options as described in
“Advanced Options for Restore Jobs” on page 428.
- If you want to set commands to run before or after the job, on the Properties pane,
under Settings, click Pre/Post Commands and complete the options as described
in “Pre/Post Commands for Restore Jobs” on page 432.
- If you are restoring other platform types or database agents, such as SQL,
Exchange, or NetWare, select the platform type from the Properties pane, under
Settings, and then refer to the chapter or appendix for that item for instructions on
completing the options.
- If you want to specify a local network to be used for this restore job, on the
Properties pane, click Network, and then enter the network information (see
“Specifying the Restore Network” on page 460).
- If you want Backup Exec to notify recipients when this job completes, on the
Properties pane, under Settings, click Notification, and then select each recipient
to be notified when the job completes (see “Configuring E-mail and Pager
Notification Methods” on page 483).
Depending on how the default settings for your software are configured, some of the
options may or may not already be selected. You can override the default options by
selecting or clearing items in these dialog boxes.
6. If you want to run the job now, click Run Now. Otherwise, on the Properties pane,
under Frequency, click Schedule to set the scheduling options you want to use (see
“Scheduling Jobs” on page 374).
Chapter 8, Restoring Data 421
Restoring Data to a Server or Workstation
To monitor the job while it is processing, click Job Monitor, and ensure Show active jobs
is selected under Current Job View Filters. You can review results of the restore job in the
job’s log.
Caution When restoring System State, you must reboot your system before performing
subsequent restore operations.
Note Depending on your file system environment, byte counts for restored data may not
match the byte count recorded when the data was backed up. This is normal and
does not mean that files were excluded in the restore operation. For more
information, see “Restore Questions” on page 584.
See also:
“Selecting Data to Restore” on page 444
“VERITAS Backup Exec - Remote Agent” on page 843
“Redirecting a Restore Operation” on page 452
“Redirecting Restores for SQL 2000” on page 1032
“Restoring Exchange 2000 and 2003” on page 1114
“Restore Options for Exchange 5.5” on page 1149
“Restoring NetWare Servers” on page 1363
“Restore Options for Lotus Domino Databases” on page 1323
“Viewing Completed Jobs” on page 394
“Restoring File Permissions” on page 436
422 Administrator’s Guide
Restoring Data
Restoring Data to a Server or Workstation
Selections Options for Restore Jobs
When the Restore Job Properties dialog box appears, Selections is chosen by default on
the Properties pane. Through the Selections options, you choose the data you want to
include in the restore job. You can also choose how the data will appear in this dialog box.
Restore Selections
Options on this dialog box include:
Selections options for restore job
Item Description
Selection list If you are creating a job using an existing selection list, select the
selection list or lists you want to use. Otherwise, use the default
Selection list, which creates a new selection list using this name.
Load Selections from Click this button if you want to use a previously created selection list or
Existing List merge existing selection lists.
Chapter 8, Restoring Data 423
Restoring Data to a Server or Workstation
Selections options for restore job (continued)
Item Description
View Format
Graphical Select this option to view selections in a directory tree view.
Show file details Select this option to display details about the files available for
selecting.
Text Select this option to view selections as a list of files and directories.
Advanced Click this button if you want to use the Advanced File Selection for
selecting files for restoring (see “Using Advanced File Selection to
Restore” on page 446).
Include subdirectories Select this option if you want to select the contents of all the subfolders
when a directory is selected.
424 Administrator’s Guide
Restoring Data
Restoring Data to a Server or Workstation
General Options for Restore Jobs
General options for restore jobs, including the name of the job, can be set through the
Restore Job Properties dialog box. To set these options, on the Properties pane, under
Settings, click General.
General settings options for restore job
Options for this dialog box include:
General settings options for restore job
Item Description
Job name Enter a name that describes the data that you are restoring. This is
the name that is used to identify this operation in the job schedule.
Chapter 8, Restoring Data 425
Restoring Data to a Server or Workstation
General settings options for restore job (continued)
Item Description
Job priority Select the priority level for this job. If another job is scheduled to run
at the same time as this job, the priority you set determines which job
runs first. Your choices are:
Highest
High
Medium
Low
Lowest
Restoring existing files
Restore over existing files Select this option to have Backup Exec overwrite files on the target
resource that have the same name as files that are being restored. Use
this option only when you are sure that you want to restore an older
version of a file.
Skip if file exists Select this option to prevent Backup Exec from overwriting files on
the target disk with files that have the same names that are included
in the restore operation.
Skip if existing file is more Select this option to prevent Backup Exec from restoring over files
recent that exist on the target resource if they are more recent than the files
included in the restore operation.
This option is useful if you are rebuilding a system. For example,
after installing the operating system on a crashed computer, you
could restore a previous full backup of the system without worrying
about overwriting later versions of operating system files.
Restore corrupt files Select this option only if you do not wish to have Backup Exec
automatically exclude corrupt files from the restore process.
This option is only recommended if a job has failed because a catalog
query could not determine the corrupt files on the tape. Normally,
when a restore job is run, Backup Exec queries the catalog to
determine if any corrupt files are on the tape and excludes them from
the restore job. If, during the query process, Backup Exec cannot
determine if a file is corrupt, the Restore job will not continue and
will be marked as Failed. In the unlikely event that the automatic
exclusion of corrupt files cannot be accomplished, you may
manually exclude corrupt files in the Restore selections window and
run the job with the Restore Corrupt File option enabled.
426 Administrator’s Guide
Restoring Data
Restoring Data to a Server or Workstation
General settings options for restore job (continued)
Item Description
Restore security Check this box to restore file-level security information on NTFS
partitions, if it exists in the data you selected.
Preserve tree (This option is on by default.) Check this box to restore the data with
its original directory structure intact. If you clear this option, all data
(including the data in subdirectories) is restored to the path you
specify in the Redirection dialog box.
Clearing the Preserve Tree option is useful when restoring several
subdirectories or individual files from media, but it should not be
cleared when restoring an entire drive.
See also:
“Creating a Manual Restore Job by Configuring Job Properties” on page 420
Chapter 8, Restoring Data 427
Restoring Data to a Server or Workstation
Advanced Options for Restore Jobs
To set Advanced options for restore jobs, on the Properties pane, under Settings, click
Advanced.
Advanced restore options
Options for this dialog box include:
Advanced options for restore
Item Function
Restore Removable Select this check box to restore the Removable Storage data. The
Storage data Removable Storage database is stored in the
Systemroot\System32\Ntsmsdata directory and is automatically
backed up when the system directory is selected for backup.
Removable Storage is a service used to manage removable media
and storage devices; it allows applications to access and share the
same media resources.
428 Administrator’s Guide
Restoring Data
Restoring Data to a Server or Workstation
Advanced options for restore (continued)
Item Function
Restore disk quota data Select this check box to restore disk quota data. Disk quota data is
automatically backed up when the root directory of a volume is
selected for a backup.
Disk quotas track and control disk usage on a per user, per volume
basis; the values can be restored to the limits that were set before the
backup.
Restore Terminal Services Select this check box to restore the Terminal Services database. The
database default location for the Terminal Services database, which contains
licensing data for client licenses, is the
Systemroot\System32\LServer directory and is automatically
backed up when the system directory is selected for backup.
Terminal Services allow client applications to be run on a server so
that client computers can function as terminals rather than
independent systems.
Restore Windows Select this check box to restore the Windows Management
Management Instrumentation (WMI) repository. The WMI repository is stored in
Instrumentation repository the Systemroot\System32\wbem\Repository directory and is
automatically backed up when the system directory is selected for
backup.
The Windows Management Instrumentation repository provides
support for monitoring and controlling system resources and
provides a consistent view of your managed environment.
Restore Cluster Quorum Select this check box to restore the cluster configuration. For more
information about restoring clusters, see “Restoring Data To
Clusters” on page 788.
Force the recovery of the Select this check box to restore the cluster configuration if you are not
cluster quorum even if able to take the other nodes in the cluster offline or if the disk that the
other nodes are online cluster quorum previously resided on has been changed.
and/or disk signatures do If this option is selected, the cluster service for any nodes that are
not match. online is stopped. This option also allows the drive letter of the disk
that the cluster quorum was on to remain the same, even if the
configuration has changed and the disk signatures contained in the
restore media do not match the disk signatures contained in the
cluster quorum.
Any changes made to the cluster quorum after the last backup will
be lost.
This option is only available if Restore Cluster Quorum is also
selected.
Chapter 8, Restoring Data 429
Restoring Data to a Server or Workstation
Advanced options for restore (continued)
Item Function
Mark this server as the Select this check box to designate this server as the primary
primary arbitrator for replicator for all members in the set when restoring FRS-managed
replication when restoring folders or SYSVOL as part of System State.
folders managed by the If all members of a replica set are to be restored, then stop replication,
File Replication Service, or restore all the member servers, and then when restoring the last
when restoring SYSVOL in member server, select this option to designate the server as the
System State. primary replicator. If this option is not selected, replication may not
function.
Note In this version of Backup Exec, all restores of SYSVOL and
FRS-managed folders are non-authoritative. An authoritative
restore can only be performed by redirecting the restore and
then copying the files to the server. Refer to your Microsoft
documentation for details on performing an authoritative
restore.
Restore Windows NT 4.0 Select this check box to restore registry information if it exists in the
registry data you selected (applies to Windows NT v4.0 only).
Merge the existing Select this option if you want to merge the existing hardware and
hardware configuration registry services with the data you selected to be restored. This
and registry services with option should only be used for restoring System State or the NT
the data to be restored Registry.
Overwrite the existing Select th